kia, tthe ccompany
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturing company focused on building high-
quality vehicles at value prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with Service above your expectation and delight customer experience.
In our Kia dealerships you will experience our “Family-like Care”
promise, that creates feelings of warmth, hospitality and trust –
feelings of being looked after by people who care.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be
carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you
may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your
specific Kia vehicle.
Enjoy your vehicle & experience Kia “Family-like Care” !
JD eng FOREWORD.QXP 3/9/2012 3:26 PM Page 1
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty and Maintenance book that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle. Kia urges you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure
enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equip-
ment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obliga-
tion. If you have questions, we recommend to contact your authorized Kia dealer.
Kia assures you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2012 Kia Motors Slovakia s.r.o.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by
any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written author-
ization from Kia Motors Slovakia s.r.o..
FFoorreewwoorrdd
JD eng FOREWORD.QXP 3/9/2012 3:26 PM Page 2
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
JD eng FOREWORD.QXP 3/9/2012 3:26 PM Page 3
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Biodiesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster . . . . 1-6
1
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.
These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety.You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recom-
mendations provided in these WARN-
INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded gaso-
line which complies with EN 228 and has
an octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher. You may use unlead-
ed gasoline with an octane rating of RON
91-94 / AKI 87-90 but it may result in
slight performance reduction of the vehi-
cle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 /
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 2
13
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels contain-
ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)
over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. We recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 3
Introduction
41
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good qual-
ity gasolines meet Europe Fuel stan-
dards (EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/ 5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-
tives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-
tation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following tem-
perature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-
fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-
ure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 4
15
Introduction
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-
els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding
7% with biodiesel will cause increased
wear or damage to the engine and fuel
system. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use of
non approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make it
necessary to drain it out and to
bleed the lines to avoid jamming the
injection pump and damaging the
engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and
unspecified additives, it can cause
the DPF system to be damaged and
white smoke can be emitted.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petro-
leum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recom-
mended or approved by the vehi-
cle manufacturer.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 5
Introduction
61
* : if equipped
❈ For more detailed explanations, refer
to section 4, “Instrument cluster”.
Charging system warning light
Glow indicator (Diesel only)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel only)
Engine coolant temperature
warning light
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Light on indicator
Turn signal indicator
ABS warning light
Air bag warning light
Low fuel level warning light
Electronic stability control (ESC)
indicator
Electronic stability control
(ESC) OFF indicator
Immobilizer indicator
Low beam indicator*
Tailgate open warning light
Electronic power steering (EPS)
system warning light
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFLS) malfunction indicator*
AFLS
Front fog light indicator*
Rear fog light indicator*
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Electric parking brake (EPB)
malfunction indicator*
EPB
Active ECO indicator*
ECO
Auto stop for ISG system
indicator*
Cruise control indicator*
Cruise SET indicator*
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Malfunction indicator
Engine oil level warning light*
(Diesel only)
Low tire pressure telltale*/
TPMS malfunction indicator*
Low windshield washer fluid
level warning light*
JD eng 1.QXP 3/9/2012 3:27 PM Page 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:00 PM Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (FRONT)
1. Front removable towing hook .................6-29
2. Front windshield wiper..........................4-118
3. Outside rearview mirror ..........................4-43
4. Door lock ................................................4-17
5. Head lamp ............................................4-111
6. Front fog lamp.......................................4-115
7. Hood ......................................................4-28
8. Tire and wheel ........................................7-53
OJD012001
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:00 PM Page 2
23
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (REAR)
1. Roof antenna........................................4-169
2. Rear window defroster..........................4-126
3. Rear wiper ............................................4-121
4. Door lock ................................................4-17
5. Rear parking assist system ....................4-90
6. Child-protector rear door lock.................4-21
7. Fuel filler.................................................4-30
8. Rear towing hook....................................6-29
9. Rear combination lamp
10. Tailgate handle switch .........................4-22
11. High mounted stop lamp
12. Rearview camera................................4-109
OJD012002
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:00 PM Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Seat..........................................................3-2
2. Inside door handle ................................4-18
3. Power window switch ............................4-24
4. Power window lock switch......................4-26
5. Hood release lever ................................4-28
6. Outside rearview mirror folding..............4-44
7. Outside rearview mirror control..............4-44
8. Headlight leveling device ....................4-116
9. Instrument panel illumination control
system..............................................4-47, 60
10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button ....5-15
11. Active ECO button ..............................5-32
12. Lane departure warning system button..5-59
13. Heated steering wheel button..............4-38
14. Light control/Turn signals ..................4-110
15. Steering wheel ....................................4-37
16. Wiper/Washer ....................................4-118
17. Manual transaxle shift lever
Automatic transaxle shift lever ....5-20/5-23
18. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ..4-38
19. Fuse box ..............................................7-63
OJD012003
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:01 PM Page 4
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OJD012004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Instrument cluster ........................4-46, 59
2. Horn ...................................................4-39
3. Steering wheel audio control............4-170
4. Cruise control switch /
Speed limiter switch...................5-51/5-56
5. Driver’s air bag ...................................3-48
6. Ignition switch or
ENGINE START/STOP button .......5-5/5-9
7. Hazard warning switch .....................4-109
8. Audio ................................................4-171
9. Seat warmer.......................................3-12
10. Central door lock switch ...................4-18
11. ESC OFF button...............................5-44
12. Climate control system ........4-127/4-136
13. Cigar lighter....................................4-154
14. Aux, USB and iPod port .................4-158
15. Power outlet ...................................4-157
16. Front passenger’s air bag ................3-48
17. Glove box .......................................4-152
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:01 PM Page 5
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OJD072001/OJD072002
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-35
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-40
3. Positive battery terminal ....................7-50
4. Negative battery terminal ..................7-50
5. Fuse box............................................7-63
6. Air cleaner ........................................7-43
7. Radiator cap ......................................7-39
8. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-38
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-35
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-41
■■
Gasoline engine - GDI
■■
Gasoline engine - MPI
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:01 PM Page 6
27
Your vehicle at a glance
OJD072003
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-35
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-40
3. Positive battery terminal ....................7-50
4. Negative battery terminal ..................7-50
5. Fuse box............................................7-63
6. Air cleaner ........................................7-43
7. Radiator cap ......................................7-39
8. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-38
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-35
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-41
11. Fuel filter ........................................7-42
■■
Diesel engine
JD eng 2.qxp 7/21/2012 12:01 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Airbag-supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Air bag warning and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Side impact air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 1
Safety system of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumber support*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest adjustment
Front passenger seat
(7) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(8) Seatback recliner
(9) Seat adjustment, height*
(10) Lumber support*
(11) Seat warmer*
(12) Headrest adjustment
Rear seat
(13) Armrest*
(14) Headrest adjustment
(15) Split folding rear seat
* : if equipped
SEAT
OJD032001
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 2
33
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that your chest is at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for front seat pas-
senger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 3
Safety system of your vehicle
43
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
OJD032002
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 4
35
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
Turn the control knob forward or rearward
to move the seatback to the desired
angle.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OJD032003 OJD032004
OJD032055
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 5
Safety system of your vehicle
63
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The driver’s seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on the
outside of the seat cushion. Before driv-
ing, adjust the seat to the proper position
so as to easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instrument
panel.
Forward and rearward
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
OJD032005
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 6
37
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seatback to the
desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion. Pull the
rear portion of the control switch up to
raise or down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OJD032006 OJD032007 OJD032008
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 7
Safety system of your vehicle
83
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for automatic seat)
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver seat
position with a simple button operation.
By saving the desired position into the
system memory, different drivers can
reposition the driver seat based upon
their driving preference. If the battery is
disconnected, the position memory will
be erased and the driving position should
be restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory using
the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) or Neutral (for
manual transaxle) while the engine
start/stop button is ON or ignition
switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat comfortable for
the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system while the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OJD032054
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 8
39
Safety system of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) or Neutral (for
manual transaxle) while the engine
start/stop button is ON or ignition
switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memory,
press the desired memory button (1 or
2). The system will beep once, then the
driver’s seat will automatically adjust to
the stored position.
Adjusting the control switch for the dri-
ver’s seat while the system is recalling
the stored position will cause the move-
ment to stop and move in the direction
that the control switch is moved.
Easy access function (if equipped)
The system will move the driver's seat
automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the ignition key is removed and
front driver’s door is opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the OFF position and front
driver’s door is opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ACC or START posi-
tion.
You can activate or deactivate this feature.
Refer to "User settings" in section 4.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory while sitting in
the vehicle. Push the seat position
control switch to the desired posi-
tion immediately if the seat moves
too far in any direction.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 9
Safety system of your vehicle
103
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps protect the head and neck in
the event of a collision.
Forward and rearward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
4 different positions by pulling the head-
rest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rear-
wards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
OPA039052
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
OJD032009
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 10
311
Safety system of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
OJD032010 OJD032011
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly
protect the occupants.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:06 AM Page 11
Safety system of your vehicle
123
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OJD032012
OFF → HIGH ( ) → MID ( )
LOW ( )
→
→
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
and gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the heater or
seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers on the seats while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 12
313
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
in all the seating positions for the occu-
pant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
OJD032013
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OPA039053
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
*
* if equipped
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 13
Safety system of your vehicle
143
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Armrest (if equipped)
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
OJD032014 OJD032015
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
OJD032016
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 14
315
Safety system of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks (or cushions) may be
folded to facilitate carrying long items or
to increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold the rear seat cushion and back
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lift the front portion of the seat cush-
ion up.
3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cush-
ion. Stand the rear seat cushion verti-
cally.
4. Pull the lock release lever (red visible).
OJD032018
OJD032019
OJD032017
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks (or cushions) is to allow
you to carry longer objects than
could otherwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 15
Safety system of your vehicle
163
5. Remove the headrest from the rear
seatback.
6. Stow the headrest by inserting the
headrest poles into the holder on the
bottom of the seat cushion.
7. Fold the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
8. To use the rear seat, reposition the
headrest on the seatback and adjust it
to the desired position.
9. Lift and push the seatback backward
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place
(red invisible).
OJD032020 OJD032021 OJD032022
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 16
317
Safety system of your vehicle
10. Return the seat cushion to the origi-
nal position by pushing down the rear
side of the seat cushion first. Make
sure the seat cushion is locked in
place.
11. Return the rear seat belt to the prop-
er position.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care should be taken of
objects placed in the rear seats,
since those may hit the front seat
occupants in a frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Failure
to take these steps may allow the
vehicle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
OJD032023
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 17
Safety system of your vehicle
183
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt web-
bing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
(Continued)
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children
to ride in the front passenger seat.
If a child over 12 must be seated in
the front seat, he/she must be
properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as
possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each belt
assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 18
319
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Driver’s seat belt warning (1)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn the
ignition switch ON regardless of belt fas-
tening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light illuminates until the belt is
fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9km/h, the illuminated
warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6km/h. (if equipped)
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20km/h the seat belt
warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 100 seconds and the correspon-
ding warning light will blink. (if equipped)
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
OAM032161L
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 19
Safety system of your vehicle
203
Front passenger’s seat belt warning (2)
As a reminder to the front passenger, the
front passenger’s seat belt warning lights
will illuminate for approximately 6 sec-
onds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the ignition switch is
turned ON or if it is disconnected after
the ignition switch is turned ON, the cor-
responding seat belt warning light will
illuminate until the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9km/h, the illuminated
warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20km/h the seat belt
warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 100 seconds and the correspon-
ding warning light will blink.
✽✽
NOTICE
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the center
fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6 sec-
onds.
• The front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing may operate when luggage is
placed on the front passenger seat.
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning (3,4,5)
If the ignition switch is turned ON(engine
is not running) when the rear passen-
ger's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened,
the corresponding seat belt warning light
will illuminate until the belt is fastened.
OJD032024
OJD032025
OJD032058
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 20
321
Safety system of your vehicle
And then, the rear corresponding seat
belt warning light will illuminate for
approximately 35 seconds, if any of fol-
lowing occurs;
- You start the engine when the rear belt
is not fastened.
- You drive over 9km/h when the rear belt
is not fastened.
- The rear belt is disconnected when
driving under 20km/h.
If the rear seat belt is fastened, the warn-
ing light will turn off immediately.
If the rear seat belt is disconnected when
you drive over the 20km/h, the corre-
sponding seat belt warning light will blink
and warning chime will sound for 35 sec-
onds.
But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoulder
belt is/are connected and disconnected
twice within 9 seconds after the belt is
fastened, the corresponding seat belt
warning light will not operate.
Lap/shoulder belt
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck. You
will not be getting the most effective pro-
tection. The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near the
door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
OLM039026
■ Front seat
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 21
Safety system of your vehicle
223
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF
1
2
OJD032026
■ Rear center seat belt (if equipped)
CAUTION
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
B200A01NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm near the door.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 22
323
Safety system of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (A) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
B210A01NF
A
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
OED030300
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 23
Safety system of your vehicle
243
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
8KMB3311
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:07 AM Page 24
325
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS
air bag. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seat contained in this manual.
(Continued)
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 25
Safety system of your vehicle
263
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if the belt
fits periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
afforded the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 26
327
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 27
Safety system of your vehicle
283
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or dam-
age of any kind. Any damaged parts
should be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. We recommend that you con-
sult an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 28
329
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be prop-
erly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX
anchors.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 29
Safety system of your vehicle
303
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always prop-
erly position and secure children
in the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of
a moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
WARNING
To reduce a risk of serious or fatal
injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 30
331
Safety system of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. For safety reasons,
we recommend that the child restraint sys-
tem be used in the rear seats.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instruc-
tions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
CRS09
OJD032027
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 31
Safety system of your vehicle
323
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
OEN036101 OEN036104E2MS103005
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 32
333
Safety system of your vehicle
Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
Age Group
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear outboard
Rear center
(if equipped)
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
XUU
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
XUU
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
XUU
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
XUU
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passen-
ger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position. To ensure the
safety of your child, the front pas-
senger’s air bag must be deactivat-
ed when it should be necessary to
install a child restraint seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 33
Safety system of your vehicle
343
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the transverse trim behind the rear
seats (5 Door) or the floor behind the
rear seats (Wagon).
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
OJD032029
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
OJD032028
OGDE032020L
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 34
335
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R 44.
❈ ISOFIX: International Standards Origanisation FIX
OVI039060
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
WARNING
Do not install a child restraint seat
at the center of the rear seat using
the tether anchors. The tether
anchors are only provided for the
left and right outboard rear seating
positions.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
tether anchor attachments may not
be strong enough to secure the
child restraint seat properly in the
center of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 35
Safety system of your vehicle
363
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the floor behind the rear seats
(wagon) or the shelf behind the rear
seats (sedan). The ISOFIX anchorages
are located between seat cushion and
backrest, marked with the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the correspon-
ding top tether anchorage point on the
floor behind the rear seats (wagon) or the
shelf behind the rear seats (sedan).
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
ISOFIX anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the ISOFIX anchors.
OJD032030
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 36
337
Safety system of your vehicle
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
(Continued)
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the cen-
ter of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 37
Safety system of your vehicle
383
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Centre
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the
"specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 38
339
Safety system of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe
CRS Manufacturer information
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0+
(0-13kg)
Baby Safe Plus II Britax Römer Rearward facing with ISOFIX adapter E1 04301146
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Duo Plus Britax Römer
Forward facing with vehicle
ISOFIX lower anchorage + Top Tether
E1 04301133
Forward facing with vehicle
3-point seat belt
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 39
Safety system of your vehicle
403
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD032031/OJD032032
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 40
341
Safety system of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining, factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away).The front passenger should
always move their seat as far
back as possible and sit back in
their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 41
Safety system of your vehicle
423
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat is forbidden when
the air bag is active
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the front
passenger’s air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-50 page.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage areas
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 42
343
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag warning and indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with curtain air bags,
be sure to install the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
securely lock the child restraint
system in position.
Inflation of curtain air bags could
cause serious injury or death to
an infant or child.
W7-147
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 43
Safety system of your vehicle
443
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor illuminates for approximately 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor also comes on when the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position and goes off after approxi-
mately 60 seconds.
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator also comes on when the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator will not illuminate (The pas-
senger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag
system be inspected by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
OJD032033 OJD032034
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 44
345
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors*
10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-
ments while the ignition switch is ON to
determine if a frontal, near-frontal impact
or side impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. We recommend that the
system be inspected by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
OJD032053
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 45
Safety system of your vehicle
463
The air bag modules are located both in
the center of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B02L B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 46
347
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the ON posi-
tion. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on after illumi-
nating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition key is turned to the
ON position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warn-
ing light to illuminate.
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 47
Safety system of your vehicle
483
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with air bags, improp-
erly and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
(Continued)
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
OJD032036
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OJD032035
■ Driver’s front air bag
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 48
349
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, we rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Air bags can only be used once –
we recommend that the system
be replaced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 49
Safety system of your vehicle
503
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch if a child restraint is
installed on the front passenger's seat or
if the front passenger's seat is unoccu-
pied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child, the
passenger’s front air bag must be deacti-
vated when it should be necessary to
install a rearward facing child seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances.
OJD032037
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 50
351
Safety system of your vehicle
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the mechanical key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator ( ) will illuminate and stay on until
the passenger’s front air bag is reactivat-
ed.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the mechanical key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out and the passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for
approximately 60 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-
tion, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
()
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator
()
will not illumi-
nate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control
Module reactivates the passen-
ger’s front air bag and the pas-
senger’s front air bag will inflate
in frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position.
(Continued)
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
OJD032033
OJD032034
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 51
Safety system of your vehicle
523
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front pas-
senger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal-
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passen-
ger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-
ger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivat-
ed. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if it illumi-
nates while the vehicle is being
driven, we recommend that the
system be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 52
353
Safety system of your vehicle
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle
is in motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact condi-
tions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
OJD032038
OJD032040
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:08 AM Page 53
Safety system of your vehicle
543
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact colli-
sions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact. The
curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations, colli-
sions from the front or rear of the vehicle
or in most rollover situations.
OJD032039
OJD032041
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition key is
on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 54
355
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
WARNING
• In order for side impact and cur-
tain air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat occu-
pants and both outboard rear
occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
(Continued)
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 55
Safety system of your vehicle
563
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
OJD032042/OJD032043/OJD032044/OJD032045
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 56
357
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar and
C pillars where side collision sen-
sors are installed. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
OED036096
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 57
Safety system of your vehicle
583
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side air bags (side
impact and/or curtain air bags) are
designed to inflate only in side impact
collisions, but they may inflate in other
collisions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OED036099
OJD032048
OGDE031045
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 58
359
Safety system of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any addi-
tional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
• However, if equipped with side impact
and curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OED036102OJD032048OED036100
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 59
Safety system of your vehicle
603
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because the vehicle can not
detect rollover accident.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over following (or after) side impact col-
lision.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
OED036103 OED036104 OJD032050
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 60
361
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, we recom-
mend that the system be replaced
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized Kia
dealer knows these precautions
and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow
these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on floor-
ing, you shouldn't try to start the
engine; we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 61
Safety system of your vehicle
623
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side impact air bag covers could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 62
363
Safety system of your vehicle
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
OJD032051
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
OJD032052
Air bag warning label (if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk
of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings focus on the risk of children. We also want
you to be aware of the risks adults are exposed to which have been described in
previous pages.
JD eng 3.QXP 7/17/2012 11:09 AM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Remote keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation. . . . . . 4-13
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Theft-alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• From outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• From inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Deadlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Door lock/unlock features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Opening the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Opening the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Closing the hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Sliding the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Resetting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Tilt & telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Flex steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-49
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-49
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 1
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• LCD display informations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-62
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-62
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
LCD display warnings and indicators
(instrument panel display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Smart Parking Assist System(SPAS) . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• How the system works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Additional instructions(messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• High - beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Headlight leveling device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-117
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Windshield wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Windshield washers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Luggage room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
4
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 2
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Puddle lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Center console storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Sliding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Luggage tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Luggage side tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Aux, USB and iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Barrier net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• How car audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
4
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 3
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped on the bar
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you lose
your keys, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized Kia
dealer. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record the
code number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the key and elec-
tronic devices inside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the igni-
tion. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
WARNING
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
Kia dealer. If an aftermarket key is
used, the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue
to operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire due
to excessive current in the wiring.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 4
45
Features of your vehicle
Vehicles with smart key system
Whenever the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ON position, the immobi-
lizer system checks and verifies if the key
is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer sys-
tem activates automatically. Without a
valid smart key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfuntioin.
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, we recommend that you consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer sys-
tem to malfunction. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your immobi-
lizer password is a customer unique
password and should be kept confi-
dential. Do not leave this number
anywhere in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from nor-
mally transmitting.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
64
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automat-
ically.
• To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
Type B
• To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042002
■ Type B
OAM049096L
■ Type A
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
OJD042001
■ Type B
OXM049003
■ Type A
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 6
47
Features of your vehicle
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine hood and tailgate
must be closed). Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically fold if
the outside rearview mirror folding
switch (Type B) is in the AUTO posi-
tion (if equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. Also, the outside rearview
mirror will automatically unfold if the
outside rearview mirror folding switch
(Type B) is in the AUTO position (if
equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors will
lock and the outside rearview mirror
will unfold if the outside rearview mir-
ror folding switch (Type B) is in the
AUTO position (if equipped) unless a
door is opened within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3)
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the tailgate is
unlocked.
✽✽
NOTICE
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically unless it is
opened within 30 seconds.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
84
Transmitter precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with the
ignition key. If you have a problem with
the transmitter, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er vehicle warranty.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 8
49
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the bat-
tery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Type A
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover (1).
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the illustra-
tion.
3. Install the rear cover.
Type B
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover.
OJD042003OED039003A
■ Type A ■ Type B
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:15 AM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
104
2. Pull the smart key module out.
3. Turn the smart key module over.
4. Push the battery out from the battery
holder.
5. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position as indi-
cated in the illustration.
6. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For transmitter or smart key replace-
ment, we recommend that you contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of
trouble-free use, however it can
malfunction if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the
battery, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to use
the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter or smart key, don't drop it, get
it wet, or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
■ Type B
OJD042004
■ Type A
OJD042005
OJD042006
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:35 AM Page 10
411
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Smart key function
1.Door lock
2.Door unlock
3.Tailgate unlock
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and tailgate and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside door
handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
once (the engine hood and tailgate
must be closed). Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically fold
if the outside rearview mirror folding
switch (Type B) is in the AUTO posi-
tion (if equipped).
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
opened.
OJD042001 OJD042008
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
124
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2.Press the button of the front outside
door handle.
3.All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink twice. Also, the
outside rearview mirror will automati-
cally unfold if the outside rearview mir-
ror folding switch (Type B) is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
front outside door handle, other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock and the outside rearview
mirror will unfold if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch (Type
B) is in the AUTO position (if
equipped) unless a door is opened
within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlocking
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the tailgate handle switch.
3.The tailgate will unlock.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the tailgate handle.
OJD042016
OJD042241
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 12
413
Features of your vehicle
Smart key precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two-
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact an author-
ized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/receiving emails. Avoid plac-
ing the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate normal-
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1.Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
2.Insert the key into the hole of the out-
side door handle. Turn the key toward
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
OJD042002
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
144
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm sys-
tem will have a label attached to the vehi-
cle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and tailgate are closed and
latched.
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handle with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine hood remains
opened, the hazard warning lights will
not operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if the tailgate and
engine hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights will blink once and the
theft-alarm will arm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
OJC040170
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 14
415
Features of your vehicle
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine hood remains
opened, the hazard warning lights will
not operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if the tailgate and
engine hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights will blink once and the
theft-alarm will arm.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
hood and tailgate are closed and
latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine hood remains
opened, the hazard warning lights will
not operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if the tailgate and
engine hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights will blink once and the
theft-alarm will arm.
• Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passen-
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, tailgate or
engine hood is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using transmitter or smart key.
• The tailgate is opened without using
transmitter or smart key.
• The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds, unless the system is dis-
armed. To turn off the system, unlock the
doors with the transmitter or smart key.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
164
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed while carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Without smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• With smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with the
smart key, open the door with the
mechanical key and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and we recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 16
417
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked with
the transmitter or smart key.
• Doors can be locked and unlocked by
pressing the button of the outside door
handle with the smart key in your pos-
session. (vehicles equipped with smart
key system)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Mechanical key
• If the transmitter or smart key does not
operate normally, you can lock or
unlock the doors by the mechanical
key.
Insert the key into the key hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock
and toward the front of the vehicle to
lock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key while the power door lock switch
does not operate normally, only the dri-
ver’s door will lock/unlock.
• Once the door is unlocked, it may be
opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING
• If you don't close the door secure-
ly, the door may open again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
OAM04097L/OJD042001
OJD042010
■ Type A ■ Type B
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
184
In case of an emergency
If the power door lock switch does not
operate electrically, the only way to lock
the door(s) is with the mechanical key
from the outside key hole.
You can lock the doors without the out-
side key hole as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency door
lock hole and turn the key horizontally
to lock.
3. Close the door securely.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door handle
Driver’s door and front passanger’s door
(if equipped)
If the inner door handle is pulled when
the door is locked, the door will unlock
and open.
Rear door (if equipped)
If the inner door handle is pulled once
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled once
more, the door will open.
With central door lock/unlock switch
It is operated by pressing the door lock/
unlock switch.
• When you press the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock and
the indicator light on the switch will illu-
minate.
• If any door is opened when the switch
is pressed, all doors will not lock.
• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of
the central door lock switch will go off.
• When you press the central door
unlock switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
OJD042012
L
L
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
OJD042013 OJD042014
U
U
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 18
419
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors can-
not be unlocked with the central door
lock/unlock switch.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows down.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the follow-
ing:
• Operate the other door locks and
handles.
• Lower the driver’s window and
use the key to unlock the door
from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 19
Features of your vehicle
204
Deadlocks (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with a
deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent
opening of a door from either inside or
outside the vehicle once the deadlocks
have been activated providing an addi-
tional measure of vehicle security.
To lock the vehicle using the deadlock
function, the doors must be locked by
using the transmitter or smart key. To
unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or
smart key must be used again.
Door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock system
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
Engine off door unlock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock:
Without smart key system
When the key is removed from the igni-
tion switch.
With smart key system
When the engine start/stop button is in
the OFF position.
Shift lever door lock/unlock system
• All doors will automatically lock when
the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P
(Park).
You can activate or deactivate the auto
door lock/unlock features in the vehicle.
Refer to "User setting" in this section.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
transmitter or the smart key with
anybody left in the vehicle. The pas-
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock
the doors with the door lock button.
For example, if the door is locked
with the transmitter, the passenger
in the vehicle cannot unlock the
door without the transmitter.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 20
421
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole (1) and turn it to the “lock( )”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the lock position, the rear door will
not open even though the inner door
handle (3) is pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (3) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OJD042015
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
224
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter, smart key or
central door lock/unlock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-
gate unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key is pressed for approximately
1 second or the tailgate handle switch
is pressed with the smart key in your
possession.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it up.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate locks automatically.
(All doors must be locked.)
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Closing the tailgate
Lower and push down the tailgate firmly.
Make sure that the tailgate is securely
latched.
TAILGATE
OJD042016
OJD042241
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
OJD042087
■ 5Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 22
423
Features of your vehicle
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment. The tailgate can
be opened by doing as follows:
1. Input the machanical key into the hole.
2. Push the machanical key to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
opened, keep the air vents and all
windows open so that additional
outside air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
OJD042017
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tail-
gate if you are accidentally locked
in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tail-
gate latch and striker while closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tail-
gate's latch.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
244
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch*
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch*
*: if equipped
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OJD042018
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 24
425
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The dri-
ver’s door has a master power window
switch that controls all the windows in the
vehicle. Also, the driver has a power win-
dow lock switch which can block the
operation of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds period.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experi-
ence the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
Type A
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Type B - Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
while the window is in operation, pull up
or press down and release the switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up the power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window
is completely closed.
OJD042020OJD042019
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
264
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “auto up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not oper-
ate if the window is raised using the
halfway position on the power window
switch.
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
The driver can disable the power window
switches on rear passenger doors by
pressing the power window lock button
located on the driver’s door to the LOCK
position (pressed).
OUN026013 OJD042021
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:16 AM Page 26
427
Features of your vehicle
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to the
power window system, do not open
or close two windows or more at
the same time.This will also ensure
the longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(pressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side the window while driving.
OED036088
WARNING
When opening or closing the win-
dows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely
out of the way.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, push the secondary latch
inside of the hood center and lift the
hood.
3.Pull out the support rod.
4.Hold the hood opened with the support
rod.
HOOD
OJD042022
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) posi-
tion for automatic transaxle and to
the 1(First) gear or R(Reverse) for
manual transaxle, and setting the
parking brake.
WARNING - Hot parts
Be very careful not to touch the
support rod when the engine and
parts are hot. You could get burned
or get seriously injured.
OJD042023 OJD042024
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 28
429
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm
(1 ft.) above the closed position and let
it drop. Make sure that it locks into
place.
WARNING - Hood
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenev-
er you inspect the engine com-
partment. This will prevent the
hood from falling and possibly
injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood raised. The view will be
blocked and the hood could fall
or be damaged.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
304
Opening the fuel filler lid
1. To open the lid, press the center edge
of the lid when all doors are unlocked.
✽✽
NOTICE
The lid will open and close only when all
doors are unlocked.
2. Fully open the lid (1).
3. To open the cap, turn it counterclock-
wise (2).
4. Refuel as needed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid does not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-
tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. To close the lid, press the edge of the
lid. Make sure it is securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OJD042025
OJD042026
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 30
431
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning post-
ed at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline Shut-
Off, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
324
(Continued)
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment. Follow any safety instruc-
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make sure
that you use parts designed for
replacement in your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 32
433
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm, be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the sun-
roof is not fully closed, the warning chime
will sound for approximately 7 seconds
and a warning message will appear on
the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving
your vehicle.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof control
lever
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
OJD042027 OJD042078/OJD042215
■ Supervision■ Normal vision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
344
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, press the sun-
shade control switch(1).
• To close the sunshade when the sun-
roof glass is closed.
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).
- Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down.
To stop the sliding at any point, press the
sunshade control switch momentarily.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunshade will slide all the way
open then the sunroof glass will slide all
the way open. To stop the sunroof move-
ment at any point, pull or push the sun-
roof control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the
way open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-
trol lever momentarily.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OJD042029
OJD042030OJD042028
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 34
435
Features of your vehicle
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with the
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward or
full it down.
The sunroof glass will close.
Then to close sunshade
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).
- Push the sunroof control lever forward
or full it down
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed while the sunroof glass or sunshade is
closing automatically, it will reverse the
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passen-
gers and objects are away from the sun-
roof before closing it.
OYF049215
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s head,
hands and body are not trapped by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside through an
opened sunroof while driving.
• Make sure your hands and face are
safely out of the way before clos-
ing a sunroof.
• A panorama sunroof is made of
glass, therefore it may break in an
accident. If you do not have your
seat belt on, you may stick out of
the broken glass and get injured or
killed. For all passengers safety,
have an appropriate protection on.
(ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing
or when the sunroof is covered
with snow or ice, the glass or the
motor could be damaged.
• If you drive with the sunroof opened
right after a car wash or rain, water
may get inside the vehicle.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
364
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1.Turn the engine on and close the sun-
roof glass and sunshade completely.
2.Release the control lever.
3. Push the sunroof control lever forward in
the direction of close (about 10 seconds)
until the sunroof operates as follows;
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN
Then, release the control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operates as follows;
SUNSHADE & SLIDE OPEN SIMUL-
TANEOUSLY → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more detailed information, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 36
437
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electronic power steering
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steer-
ing wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illu-
minate.
• The steering effort is high immediately
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK/OFF posi-
tion.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously
when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If an error is detected in the electric
power steering system, EPS will stop
assisting driver in steering the vehicle
to prevent accidents and the warning
light on the cluster will illuminate or
blink. We recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
• When you operate the steering wheel in
low temperature, abnormal noise could
occur. If temperature rises, the noise
will disappear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if you
turn the steering wheel all the way to
the left or right continuously, the
steering wheel becomes heavier from
the end. This is not a system malfunc-
tion but for your safety. As time pass-
es, the steering wheel returns to its
normal condition.
• When the charging system warning
light comes on or the voltage is low
(When the alternator (or battery) does
not operate normally or it malfunc-
tions), the steering wheel may get
heavy and become difficult to control
operate abnormally.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
384
Tilt & telescopic steering
A tilt and telescopic steering wheel
allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can also raise it to
give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust the
steering wheel to the desired angle (2)
and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel
to the desired position before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, pressing the heated steering wheel
button warms the steering wheel.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 minutes
after the heated steering wheel is turned
on.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OJD042031 OJD042083
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 38
439
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OJD042032
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
OJD042165/OJD042166/OJD042189/OJD042190
The indicator on the button will illuminate and notify you on the LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on
the button will turn off and notify you on the LCD display.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to
the heated steering wheel system.
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
404
Flex steering wheel (if equipped)
The flex steering wheel controls steering
effort as driver's preference or road con-
dition.
You can select the desired steering mode
by pressing the steering mode button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode will
appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode will
change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is not
pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD dis-
play will change to the previous screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium steer-
ing effort.
OJD042161
OJD042239
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042167
OJD042192
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
OJD042170
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:17 AM Page 40
441
Features of your vehicle
Comfort mode
The steering wheel becomes lighter. The
comfort mode is usually used when driv-
ing in downtown or parking the vehicle.
Also, the comfort mode helps weak peo-
ple to drive easily.
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heavier.
The sport mode is usually used when
driving in highway.
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while oper-
ating the steering wheel, the LCD
display will change, but the steer-
ing effort will not change immedi-
ately. After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power steer-
ing is not working properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.
OJD042169
OJD042191
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
OJD042168
OJD042193
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
424
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
OMD040031
D
D
DD
aa
aa
yy
yy
NN
NN
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 42
443
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
OMD040032
Indicator
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mir-
ror are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
444
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to
select the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding point
on the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left or
right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral (center) position to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OJD042033
OJD042034
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 44
445
Features of your vehicle
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be fold-
ed or unfolded by pressing the switch as
below.
Up (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Down (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatical-
ly as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the but-
ton on the outside door handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors closed
and locked) with a smart key in pos-
session.
OJD042035
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-
essary while the engine is not run-
ning.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
464
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (NORMAL VISION)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
5. Turn signal indicators
6. LCD display
OJD042036
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the
following pages.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 46
447
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity
can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the
switch
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
OJD042047
OJD042044/OJD042045
OJD042040
■ Diesel Engine■ Gasoline Engine
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
484
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning
light may come on earlier than usual
due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
You can turn off the indicator. Refer to
“User setting” in this section.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“O (Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OJD042046
OJD042231/OJD042232
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 48
449
Features of your vehicle
Automatic transaxle shift position
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Double clutch transmission (DS
mode) shift indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which Double clutch
transmission shift lever is selected.
In DS mode, the “SPORTS” indicator dis-
plays in cluster. For more detailed informa-
tion about DS mode, refer to the chapter 5.
OJD042233 OJD042234
* DCT : Double clutch transmission
CAUTION - DCT
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe protec-
tion mode, the transaxle indicator
blinks with buzzer sound. The
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,
the LCD warning about safe pro-
tection mode also displays. In this
condition, the driving may not be
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-
ing, the driving condition is get-
ting worse and the system may
have problem. To return the nor-
mal driving condition, apply the
foot brake and stop the vehicle for
few minutes before driving off.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
504
Speed limiter indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the speed
limit control system is enabled by move
the lever up on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes off when the lever
up again to deactivate the system.
If there is a problem with the speed limit
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to “Speed limit
control system” in section 5.
The speed limiter indicators illuminates
on the LCD display.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
OJD052031
OJD042051
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 50
451
Features of your vehicle
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. All stored driving information
(except odometer, distance to empty and
instant fuel economy) resets if the battery
is disconnected.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button for less than 1
second to select any mode as follows:
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Tripmeter B
Instant fuel consumption*
Tripmeter A
Distance to empty*
Average fuel consumption*
Engine coolant temperature gauge
* : if equipped
Elapsed time*
Average speed*
↔↔
↔↔↔↔↔↔
Service*
↔
User setting*
↔
OJD042050
OJD042052
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
524
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will
be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
Average fuel economy (if equipped)
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average fuel
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
To clear the average fuel economy to
zero (--.-), do as follow;
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consump-
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel
consumption to zero (--.-).
OJD042053 OJD042054
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 52
453
Features of your vehicle
Instant fuel economy (if equipped)
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel con-
sumption during the last few seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty is an estimate
of the available driving distance. This
value may differ from the actual driv-
ing distance.
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is dis-
played, clears the average speed to zero
(---).
OJD042055 OJD042056
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
544
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“130°C”, it indicates overheating
that may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OJD042057 OJD042058
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 54
455
Features of your vehicle
Service mode
This mode calculates when you need a
scheduled maintenance service (mileage
or days)
If you want to see the service mode when
other modes are displayed, press the ▲
or ▼ button less than 1 second.
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the scheduled maintenance
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-
play will show the elapsed mileage or
days.
If you want to reset the maintenance
schedule, when the service required mes-
sage is displayed :
- Press the button more than 5 sec-
onds.
- " : Reset" will be shown on the LCD
display.
- Press the button again more than 1
second.
If you do not press the button within 5
seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.
If you want to change the interval of the
maintenance service schedule, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,
when the displayed service schedule
has not elapsed or elapsed without
actual vehicle service, the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
might not be match the actual service
schedule anymore.
You should comply with the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
for the maintenance of your vehicle.
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the displayed service sched-
ule might not match the actual service
schedule.
OJD042061
OJD042059
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
564
If service mode is not activated, the LCD
display shows, like the above picture.
In this case, we recommend that you
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
User Settings
In this mode there are 3 kinds of the sub-
menu.
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position or engine
running.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the User
setting mode is displayed.
3. With the User setting mode displayed,
press the button until the screen
is changed.
4. You can change the item by pressing
the ▲ or ▼ button and select an item
by pressing the button.
OJD042063
OJD042064
OJD042060
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 56
457
Features of your vehicle
Door Menu
• Auto Door Lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park)
position to the R(Reverse),
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-
tion. (for automatic transaxle
shift lever)
• Auto Door Unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is in the OFF
position).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position. (for auto-
matic transaxle shift lever)
Lamp Menu
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)
If the headlamp delay function is checked :
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp
Welcome function will be activated.
• Welcome Light (if equipped)
If the welcome light function is checked :
The welcome light function of puddle
lamp will activate.
• Auto Triple Turn
(One-touch triple turn signal)
If the auto triple turn function is checked :
The lane change signals will blink 3 times
when the turn signal lever is moved
slightly.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
584
Settings Menu
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position
Memory System equipped vehicle)
(if equipped)
If the seat easy access function is
checked :
The driver's seat will automatically move
forward or rearward for the driver to enter
or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Steering position (if equipped)
If the steering position function is
checked:
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play when the steering wheel is not
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP
button in the ON position.
• Shift indicator (for manual transaxle)
If the shift indicator function is checked :
The shift indicator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Manual
transaxle shift indicator” in this section.
• AVG fuel ECO Reset
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refuel-
ing.
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-
my will not reset auto-
matically when you drive
after refueling. You can
reset the average fuel
economy by pressing
the button for more
than 1 second when the
average fuel economy is
displayed.
• Language
Choose the language you prefer within
the LCD display.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 58
459
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (SUPERVISION)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
5. Turn signal indicators
6. LCD display
OJD042038L
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the
following pages.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:18 AM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
604
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity
can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the
switch
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
OJD042047
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OJD042044/OJD042045
OJD042042
■ Diesel Engine■ Gasoline Engine
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 60
461
Features of your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning
light may come on earlier than usual
due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
You can turn off the indicator. Refer to
“User setting” in this section.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“O (Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OJD042046
OJD042236/OJD042237
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
624
Automatic transaxle shift position
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Double clutch transmission (DS
mode) shift indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which Double
clutch transmission shift lever is selected.
In DS mode, the “S” indicator displays
with “SPORTS” indicator in cluster. For
more detailed information about DS
mode, refer to the chapter 5.
OJD042235 OJD042238
CAUTION - DCT
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe protec-
tion mode, the transaxle indicator
blinks with buzzer sound. The
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,
the LCD warning about safe pro-
tection mode also displays. In this
condition, the driving may not be
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-
ing, the driving condition is get-
ting worse and the system may
have problem. To return the nor-
mal driving condition, apply the
foot brake and stop the vehicle for
few minutes before driving off.
* DCT : Double clutch transmission
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 62
463
Features of your vehicle
Speed limiter indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the speed
limit control system is enabled by move
the lever up on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes off when the lever
up again to deactivate the system.
If there is a problem with the speed limit
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to “Speed limit
control system” in section 5.
The speed limiter indicators illuminates
on the LCD display.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
OJD052043
OJD042173
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
644
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Press the button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select any group as follows :
OJD042172
Engine coolant temperature gauge
User setting mode
Service mode
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
SYSTEM*
Trip mode
* : if equipped
Trip mode A
Trip mode B
Driving information mode
Press the
▼
button for less than 1
second to select in Trip mode group
as follows :
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 64
465
Features of your vehicle
Driving information mode
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving
Information.
All stored driving information (except
odometer, distance to empty and instant
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-
connected.
1. Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will
be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
2. Average fuel economy
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average fuel
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
To clear the average fuel economy to
zero (--.-), do as follow;
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consump-
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel
consumption to zero (--.-).
3. Instant fuel economy
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few sec-
onds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty is an estimate
of the available driving distance. This
value may differ from the actual driv-
ing distance.
OJD042175
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
664
Trip mode (A, B)
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving
Information.
All stored driving information (except
odometer, distance to empty and instant
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-
connected.
1. Tripmeter (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
2. Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is dis-
played, clears the average speed to zero
(---).
3. Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
OJD042174
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 66
467
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to “Lane departure
warning system” in section 5.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“130°C” position, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OJD042176 OJD042180
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
684
Service mode
This mode calculates when you need a
scheduled maintenance service (mileage
or days)
If you want to see the service mode when
other modes are displayed, press the
button less than 1 second.
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the scheduled maintenance
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-
play will show the elapsed mileage or days.
If you want to reset the maintenance
schedule, when the service required mes-
sage is displayed :
- Press the button more than 5 sec-
onds.
- " : Reset" will be shown on the LCD
display.
- Press the button again more than 1
second.
If you do not press the button within
5 seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.
If you want to change the interval of the
maintenance service schedule, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,
when the displayed service schedule
has not elapsed or elapsed without
actual vehicle service, the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
might not be match the actual service
schedule anymore.
You should comply with the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
for the maintenance of your vehicle.
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the displayed service sched-
ule might not match the actual service
schedule.
OJD042184OJD042186
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 68
469
Features of your vehicle
If service mode is not activated, the LCD
display shows, like the above picture.
In this case, we recommend that you
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
User Settings
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position or engine
running.
2. Press the button until the User set-
ting mode is displayed.
3. You can change the item by pressing
the
▼
button and select an item by
pressing the button.
Door Menu
• Auto Door Lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park)
position to the R(Reverse),
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-
tion. (for automatic transaxle
shift lever)
• Auto Door Unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is in the OFF
position).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position. (for auto-
matic transaxle shift lever)
OJD042187OJD042185
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
704
Lamp Menu
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)
If the headlamp delay function is checked :
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp
Welcome function will be activated.
• Auto Triple Turn
(One-touch triple turn signal)
If the auto triple turn function is checked :
The lane change signals will blink 3 times
when the turn signal lever is moved
slightly.
• Welcome Light (if equipped)
If the welcome light function is checked :
The welcome light function of puddle
lamp will activate.
Settings Menu
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position
Memory System equipped vehicle)
(if equipped)
If the seat easy access function is
checked:
The driver's seat will automatically move
forward or rearward for the driver to enter
or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Welcome Sound
If the welcome sound function is checked :
The Welcome Sound function will be acti-
vated.
• Steering Position (if equipped)
If the steering position function is
checked:
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play when the steering wheel is not
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP
button in the ON position.
• Shift Indicator (for manual transaxle)
If the shift indicator function is checked :
The shift indicator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Manual
transaxle shift indicator” in this section.
• AVG fuel ECO Reset
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refuel-
ing.
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-
my will not reset auto-
matically when you drive
after refueling. You can
reset the average fuel
economy by pressing
the button for more
than 1 second when the
average fuel economy is
displayed.
• Speed Gauge Scale
- 100% : The size of the numbers on
speed gauge is normal state.
- 110% : The size of the numbers on
speed gauge will increase.
• Unit
You can choose the displayed unit in the
instrument cluster “km” or “mile”.
• Language
Choose the language you prefer within
the LCD display.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 70
471
Features of your vehicle
LCD display information
Sunroof open
If driver removes the ignition key (Smart
key : turns off the engine) and opens the
driver-side door when the sunroof is not
fully closed, warning message will appear
on the LCD display. Also, the warning
chime sounds for approximately 7 sec-
onds.
Illumination intensity
The illumination intensity of the instru-
ment panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
panel illumination” in section 4.
Turn on fuse switch (mode switch)
The notice appears to inform the driver to
turn on the fuse switch in the instrument
panel under the steering wheel.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in sec-
tion 7.
OJD042078/OJD042215
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042079/OJD042214
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042240/OJD042188
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:19 AM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
724
Parking assist warning (if equipped)
Displays the area an obstacle is detected
while moving forward or rearward.
For more details, refer to “Parking assist
system” in section 4.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left (or
right) after a couple of seconds, “Align
steering wheel” illuminates on the LCD
display for 5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the right (or left)
and make it turned to the left (or right) less
than 30 degrees.
For vehicle’s equipped with smart
key system
Key is not in vehicle
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON,
or START position, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display. Also, the chime
sounds for 5 seconds when the smart
key is not in the vehicle and the door is
closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
OJD042163/OJD042196
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042164/OJD042211
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042073/OJD042205
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 72
473
Features of your vehicle
Key is not detected
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the engine
start/stop button, the warning illuminates
on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also,
the immobilizer indicator blinks for 10
seconds.
Press start with smart key
If you press the engine start/stop button
while the warning “Key is not detected”
illuminates the warning “Press the start
button with smart key” illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
immobilizer indicator blinks for 10 sec-
onds.
Low key battery
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the OFF position when the smart key in
the vehicle discharges, the warning illu-
minates on the LCD display for about 10
seconds. Also, the warning chime
sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
OJD042072/OJD042204
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042075/OJD042207
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042066/OJD042198
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
744
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for automatic transaxle)
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing the
brake pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for manual transaxle)
If the engine start/stop button turns to the
ACC position twice by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly without depressing the
clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
Shift to "P" position (for Auto transaxle)
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will turn to the
ACC position. If the button is pressed
once more it will turn to the ON position.
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play for about 10 seconds to indicate that
you should press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position to turn off the engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
OJD042070/OJD042202
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042071/OJD042203
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042065/OJD042197
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 74
475
Features of your vehicle
Press start button again
If you can not operate the engine
start/stop button when there is a problem
with the engine start/stop button system,
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds
and the chime sounds continuously to
indicate that you could start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
once more.
The chime will stop if the engine
start/stop button system works normally
or the theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the engine start/stop button, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P(Park) position.
Press start button while turn steering
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
warning chime sounds once and the
engine start/stop button light blinks for 10
seconds.
When you are warned, press the engine
start/stop button while turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left.
OJD042074/OJD042206
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042077/OJD042209
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042067/OJD042199
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
764
Check steering wheel lock system
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
changes to the OFF position, the warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD
display. Also, the warning chime sounds
for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop
button light blinks for 10 seconds.
Check brake switch fuse
When the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds in ACC.
OJD042069/OJD042201
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042076/OJD042208
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 76
477
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
(Instrument cluster)
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). If any light that does not illumi-
nate, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention.
The following warning and indicators are
introduced in the previous pages.
• Automatic transaxle/Double clutch trans-
mission shift lever indicator
• Manual transaxle shift indicator
• Parking assist warning (LCD display)
Active ECO indicator
(if equipped)
When the active ECO is operating the
ECO indicator illuminates green. For
more detailed information, refer to
"Active ECO" in chapter 5.
Seat belt warning and
chime light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For more details, refer to the “Seat belt”
in section 3.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the air bag
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turn the igni-
tion switch to the ON position or started
the engine, or if it comes on while driving,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
ECO
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
784
Immobilizer indicator
Without smart key system
This indicator illuminates when the
immobilizer key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
indicator goes out after the engine is run-
ning.
If this indicator blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position before start-
ing the engine, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
With smart key system
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobi-
lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes
off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC or ON position, the indicator will
illuminate for approximately 30 sec-
onds to indicate that you are able to
start the engine. However, when the
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
engine start/stop button is pressed, the
indicator will blink for a few seconds to
indicate that you are not be able to
start the engine.
• If the indicator illuminates only for 2
seconds and goes out when the
engine start/stop button is turned to
ON position with the smart key in the
vehicle, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is pressed, the indi-
cator will blink and you are not able to
start the engine. However, you are able
to start the engine by pressing the
engine start/stop button directly with
the smart key. Also, if the smart key
system related parts have a problem,
the indicator will blink.
Tailgate open warning light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate is not closed securely.
Low fuel level warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “O/E” can
cause the engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if equipped).
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 78
479
Features of your vehicle
EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some problems. If it comes on while
driving, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
Light on indicator
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights are on.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
804
AFLS (Adaptive Front
Lighting System)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
If the AFLS malfunction indicator illumi-
nates, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
AFLS
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 80
481
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
EPB (Electric Parking
Brake) malfunction indica-
tor (if equipped)
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approximate-
ly 3 seconds. If the warning light does not
come on, or continuously remains on we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but if this occurs, it does not
indicate the EPB has malfunctioned.
For more details, refer to "EPB" in sec-
tion 5.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer. The normal braking system will
still be operational, but without the assis-
tance of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
EPB
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
824
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle’s
ABS and EBD system may have mal-
functioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. We rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the ESC indicator will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. We
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
WARNING
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 82
483
Features of your vehicle
Auto stop indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator will illuminate when the
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurrs, the
auto stop indicator on the cluster will
blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle
Stop and Go) system in section 5.
For vehicles equipped with instrument
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates
on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON-OFF button on the steer-
ing wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instru-
ment cluster illuminats when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-
nate when the cruise control cancel but-
ton O is pushed or the system is disen-
gaged.
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. We recommend that
the system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
SET
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
844
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) indicator (if equipped)
Low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
The low tire pressure and position tell-
tales illuminates when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximately
one minute when there is a problem with
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to the TPMS in
section 6.
The low tire pressure position telltale illu-
minates on the LCD display.
Engine oil pressure warn-
ing
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-
ommend that you call an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instabili-
ty, immediately take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, apply the
brakes gradually and with light
force, and slowly move to a safe
position off the road.
CAUTION
If the engine does not stop immedi-
ately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 84
485
Features of your vehicle
Engine oil level warning
light (if equipped, for diesel)
The engine oil level warning light illumi-
nates when the engine oil level should be
checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities" in section 8.)
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure
the oil level is not above F mark on the
dipstick.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you travel approximately 50
km~100 km after the engine warms
up, after adding the engine oil, the
warning light will go off.
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 10 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately. However,
when you turn off the warning light
without adding the engine oil, the light
will come on again after traveling
approximately 50 km ~ 100 km after
the engine warms up.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as soon
as it is safe to do so, turn off the
engine and check the oil level. If the
oil level is low, fill the engine oil to
the proper level and start the engine
again. If the light stays on with the
engine running, turn the engine off
immediately. In any instance where
the oil light stays on when the
engine is running, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav-
eling approximately 50 km~100 km
after the engine warms up, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Even if this light doesn't come on
after the engine has started, the
engine oil should be checked and
supplied periodically.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
864
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
tion, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the Emission
Control System Malfunction
Indicator Light illuminated may
cause damage to the emission con-
trol systems which could effect dri-
vability and/or fuel economy.
CAUTION -
Gasoline engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power. We
recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to blink in spite of the
procedure, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can worsen.
CAUTION -
Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. We recommend that the
system be inspected by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 86
487
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant tempera-
ture warning light
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
120±3°C (248±5.4°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
Glow indicator
(Diesel engine)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-
tion. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-
minating time varies with the water tem-
perature, air temperature and battery
condition.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK/OFF position for 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up while the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light contin-
ues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
while driving, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light
illuminates, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehi-
cle's engine parts and injection sys-
tem of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:20 AM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
884
LCD DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY)
Calendar / Clock / Outside ambi-
ent Temperature (if equipped)
The monitor will display the outside ambi-
ent temperature, date and time.
To change the date, time or temperature
unit(°C ↔ °F), press the SET (2) button
for more than 1 seconds.
Then you will enter the set-up mode and
mode changes in the following order as
you press the SET (2) button less than 1
second.
HOUR → MINUTE → YEAR → MONTH
→ DAY → 12H/24H → TEMPERATURE
UNIT CHANGE → Escape set-up mode
Press the SET (2) button less than 1 sec-
ond to select the mode and set the data
using the UP (1, ) and DOWN (1, )
button while the selected setting mode
blinks.
To cancel the SET UP mode, do one of
the following :
- Press the SET button less than 1 sec-
ond in set-up temperature unit change
mode
- Press the SET button more than 1 sec-
ond in any set-up mode
- After 15 seconds without any key press
- Ignition is On or OFF in Set-up mode
- Battery is disconnected
Door and tailgate open display
The monitor will display the correspon-
ding door or tailgate that is not closed
securely.
OJD042142
OJD042145
OJD042143
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 88
489
Features of your vehicle
TPMS (if equipped)
The monitor will display the correspon-
ding tire that is low with pressure.
For details, see Tire Pressure Monitoring
System on chapter 6.
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy when:
• Ignition ON
• Temperature range: approximately below
4°C (39.2°F).
The warning light will blink for 10 sec-
onds and then illuminate. Also, the warn-
ing chime will sound.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
OJD042144 OJD042146
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
904
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intend-
ed to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the indi-
cator on the rear parking assist OFF
button is not illuminated.
If you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the rear
parking assist OFF button again. (The
indicator on the button will illuminate.)
To turn the system on, press the button
again. (The indicator on the button will
go off.)
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be
activated correctly.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
OJD042080
OJD042084
OJD042242
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Sensors
Sensors
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 90
491
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm (47
in. to 23.6 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(23.6 in. to 12.2 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequent-
ly
• When an object is within 30 cm (11.8
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Type of the warning indicator
(if equipped)
*1: It indicates the range of sensed object
by each sensor. (Left, Center, Right)
❈ In case the object is between or close
to the sensors, the indicator could be
different.
Distance from
object
Warning indicator
61cm ~ 120 cm
(24 in. ~ 47 in.)
31cm ~ 60 cm
(12.2 in. ~ 23.6 in.)
Less than 30 cm
(11.8 in.)
*
1
*
1
*
1
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
924
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the sensor.
7. Trailer towing.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)
in diameter.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm (11.8 in.) from the sen-
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 92
493
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the vehi-
cle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
944
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle by
chiming or displaying the area an obsta-
cle is detected on the instrument cluster
if any object is sensed within the distance
of 60 cm (24 in.) (Type A) or 100 cm
(39.4 in.) (Type B) in front and 120 cm
(47 in.) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving pay as much attention
to what is in front and behind of you as
you would in a vehicle without a parking
assist system.
Operation of the parking assist
system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the park-
ing assist system button is pressed
with the ignition switch ON.
Type A
The indicator of the parking assist sys-
tem button turns on automatically and
activates the parking assist system
when you shift the gear to the
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS
button. It will turn off automatically
when you drive above 40 km/h(24.8
mph) except in the case when the
parking assist system button is
pressed with the ignition switch ON.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OJD042081
OJD042085
OJD042084
OJD042242
■ Rear, 5 Door
■ Front
■ Rear, Wagon
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 94
495
Features of your vehicle
Type B
The indicator of the parking assist sys-
tem button turns on automatically and
activates the parking assist system
when you shift the gear to the
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS
button. It will turn off automatically
when you drive above 40 km/h(24.8
mph).
• If the vehicle speed is above
10km/h (6.2 mph), the parking
assist system will not operate.
• The sensing distance while moving for-
ward is approximately 60 cm (24 in.)
(Type A) or 100 cm (39.4 in.) (Type B)
when you are driving less than 10 km/h
(6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
✽✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approxi-
mately 25 cm when the system is ON.
✽
✽
NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration accord-
ing to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
: without Warning sound
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently (Type B)
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
964
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not oper-
ate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-
mally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or
gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-
fere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
CAUTION
• This system can only sense
objects within the range and loca-
tion of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other
areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limita-
tions.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 96
497
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound sequen-
tially depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been modi-
fied. Any non-factory installed equip-
ment or accessories may also interfere
with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less
than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may
sense an incorrect distance. Use with
caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may be
inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor with any hard objects that could
damage the surface of the sensor.
Sensor damage could occur.
✽
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors,
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, or objects located
between sensors may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
984
The Smart Parking Assist System helps
drivers park their vehicle by using sen-
sors to measure parallel parking spaces,
control the steering wheel to semi-auto-
matically park the car and provide
instruction on the LCD display to help
through parking.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The vehicle will not stop for pedestri-
ans or objects that may be in its path,
so the driver must monitor the
maneuver.
• Use the system only in parking lots
and places used for parking.
• The system does not work if there is
no car parked in front of the parking
space you are planning to park or if it
is a diagonal parking space.
• After parking your vehicle using the
system, the vehicle may not be parked
at the exact spot you have wished. For
example, the space between your vehi-
cle and wall may not be the distance
you have desired.
• Deactivate the system and park your
vehicle manually, when the situation
requires parking manually.
• The Parking Assist System's front and
rear warning sound activates when
the Smart Parking Assist System is
activated.
• After searching for a parking space is
completed, the Smart Parking Assist
System will be canceled if the Parking
Assist System is cancelled by pressing
the button to the OFF position.
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OLM041270
WARNING
• The Smart Parking Assist System
should only be considered as a
supplementary function. The driv-
er must check the front and rear
view for objects. The operational
function of the Smart Parking
Assist System can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibili-
ty rests always with the driver.
• The system may not operate nor-
mally if the vehicle needs wheel
alignment adjustment. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If you use a different tire or wheel
size rather than the size recom-
mended by the Kia dealer, the sys-
tem may not work properly. Always
use the same size tire and wheel.
• If you use additional frame on
license plate then SPAS may gen-
erate abnormal warning sound.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 98
499
Features of your vehicle
Operating condition
The system will help park the vehicle in
the middle or back of a parked vehicle.
Use the system when all the below con-
ditions are met.
• When the parking space is a straight
line
• When parallel parking is required
• When there is a parked vehicle
• When there is enough space to move
the vehicle
Non-operating condition
Never use the Smart Parking Assist
System in the below conditions.
• Curved parking space
• Inclined roads
• A vehicle loaded with longer or wider
cargo compared to the vehicle
• Diagonal parking space
• Parking space with trash, grass or bar-
riers
• Heavy snow or rain
• A pole close to the parking line
• Bumpy roads
• A vehicle equipped with a snow chain
or spare tire
• Tire pressure lower or higher than the
standard tire pressure
• A trailer connected to the vehicle
• Slippery or uneven road
• Big vehicles such as buses or trucks
parked
• Sensor covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water
• Moisture frozen on the sensor.
• A motorcycle or bicycle parked
• A trash can or obstacle near
• Heavy wind
• Wheel changed to an unauthorized
size
• A problem with the wheel alignment
• Next to a garden or bush
• A accessory installed on the detective
area the of sensors (such as number
plate holder)
• Vehicle leaned severely to one side
• Strong sunlight or very cold weather
• Ultrasonic interference other vehicle's.
Such as horn sounds of other vehicles,
motorcycle's engine noise, air brake
noise of heavy vehicles and with the
other vehicle's parking assist system
working.
OLM041271
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
1004
WARNING
Do not use the Smart Parking
Assist System in the following con-
ditions for unexpected results may
occur and cause a serious accident.
1. Parking on inclines
The driver must apply the accelera-
tor and brake pedal when parking
on inclines. If the driver is unfamil-
iar with applying the accelerator
and brake pedal, a car accident may
occur.
(Continued)
OJD042156
(Continued)
2. Parking in snow
Snow may interfere with sensor
operation or the system may cancel
if the road is slippery while parking.
Also, if the driver is unfamiliar with
applying the accelerator and brake
pedal, a car accident may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Parking in narrow space
The system may not search for
parking spaces if the space is too
narrow. Even if it operates always
be careful.
(Continued)
OJD042157
OJD042158
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 100
4 101
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
4. Parking diagonal
The system is a supplemental for
parallel parking. Diagonal line park-
ing is not available. Even if the vehi-
cle is able to enter the space, do
not operate the Smart Parking
Assist System. The system will
attempt parallel parking.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Parking in uneven road
Parking in uneven roads, the driver
needs to properly apply the pedal
(clutch, accelerator or brake). If not,
the system may cancel when the
vehicle slips or an accident may
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6. Parking behind a truck
An accident may occur when park-
ing behind a vehicle higher than
yours. For example, bus, truck, etc.
(Continued)
OSL040145
OJD042159
OJD042160
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
1024
How the system works
1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist
System
2. Select parking assist mode
3. Search for parking space (slowly move
forward.)
4. Search complete (automatic search by
sensor.)
5. Steering wheel control
(1) Shift according to the instruction on
the LCD display.
(2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal
applied.
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
plete
7. If necessary, manually adjust position
of vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Before activating the system check if
the conditions are possible to use the
system.
• For your safety, always apply the
brake pedal except for when driving.
(Continued)
7. Obstacle in parking space
The system may search for a park-
ing space even though an obstacle
is in the parking space. An accident
may occur if you continue to park
the vehicle with the system.
Do not solely rely on the Smart
Parking Assist System.
OLM041272
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:21 AM Page 102
4 103
Features of your vehicle
1. Activate Smart Parking Assist
System
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button (the button indicator will
illuminate).
• The Parking Assist System will be acti-
vated (the button indicator will illumi-
nate).
A warning sound will be heard if an
obstacle is detected.
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button again for more than 2
seconds to turn off the system.
• The Smart Parking Assist System
defaults to the OFF position whenever
the ignition switch is turned on.
2. Select parking assist mode
• Select the parking assist mode by
pressing the Smart Parking Assist
System button with the shift lever in N
(Neutral) or D(Drive) and the brake
pedal depressed.
• The right side parallel mode is select-
ed automatically when the Smart
Parking Assist System is activated.
• To select the left side parallel mode
press the Smart Parking Assist System
button once more.
• If the button is pressed again, the sys-
tem will turn off.
3. Search for parking space
• Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately 50cm ~
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the
parked vehicles. The side sensors will
search for a parking space.
• If the vehicle speed is over 30km/h
(18.6mph), a message will appear to
notify to reduce speed.
• If the vehicle speed is over 40km/h
(24.8mph), the system will cancel.
OJD042082 OJD042219/OJD042216
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
OJD042220/OJD042217
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
1044
✽✽
NOTICE
• Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
it is crowded with other vehicles.
• If the parking lot is small, slowly drive
more nearer to the parking space.
• The search for a parking space will be
completed only when there is enough
space for the vehicle to move to park.
✽
✽
NOTICE
• When searching for a parking space,
the system may not be able to find a
parking space if there is no vehicle
parked, a parking space is available
after driving by or a parking space is
available before driving by.
• The system may not operate normally
in the following conditions:
(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
✽
✽
NOTICE
Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately 50cm ~
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the parked
vehicles. If not within the distance, the
system may not be able to search for a
parking space.
4. Search complete
While driving forward to search for a
parking space, the above message will
appear with a beep sound if the search is
complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to
the R (Reverse) position.
CAUTION
After searching for a parking space
is completed, continue using the
system after checking the sur-
rounding area.
OLM041273
50~150 cm
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• If the parking space is to small
the system may be cancelled at
the Steering wheel control stage.
Do not park your vehicle if the
space is too small.
OJD042221/OJD042218
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 104
4 105
Features of your vehicle
5. Steering wheel control
• The above message will appear if the
shift lever is in R (Reverse). The steer-
ing wheel will be controlled automati-
cally.
• The system will be cancelled if you
firmly hold the steering wheel while it is
controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle
speed is over 7km/h(4.3mph).
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you do not follow the instructions
provided, you may fail to park your
vehicle.
However, if the Parking Assist System
warning sound (distance from object
is within 30cm: continuous beep)
occurs, slowly drive the vehicle to the
reverse direction of the detected
object after checking the surrounding.
• Always check the surrounding before
driving your vehicle if the Parking
Assist System warning sound (dis-
tance from object is within 30cm: con-
tinuous beep) is heard for the object is
close to your vehicle.
To cancel the system while parking
Press the Smart Parking Assist System
button or turn the steering wheel to the
left or right.
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• Always check for objects around
your vehicle before driving.
• If the vehicle does not move even
though the brake pedal is not
depressed, check the surround-
ing before depressing the accel-
erator pedal. Be sure not to speed
over 7km/h(4.3mph).
OJD042222
WARNING
Do not put your hands between the
steering wheel while it is being
automatically controlled.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
1064
Gear shift while steering wheel control
When the above message appears with a
beep sound, shift the gear and drive the
vehicle with the brake pedal depressed.
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
pleted
Complete parking your vehicle according
to the instructions on the LCD display. If
required, manually control the steering
wheel and complete parking your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
The brake pedal must be depressed by
the driver while parking your vehicle.
OJD042224/OJD042225/OJD042223/OJD042225
WARNING
Always be careful while parking for
other vehicles or pedestrians.
■ Manual transaxle
■ Automatic transaxle
CAUTION
Always check the surrounding
before releasing the brake pedal.
OJD042226
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 106
4 107
Features of your vehicle
The system may be cancelled in the below
conditions:
• Ignoring the gear shift message and
drive the vehicle approximately 150cm
(59in).
• The front and rear Parking Assist
System warning sound (distance from
object is within 30cm: continuous
beep) is heard at the same time.
• 6 minutes have passed since the vehi-
cle has been controlled by the Smart
Parking Assist System.
• The shift lever is changed to the P
(Park) or R (Reverse) position while
searching for parking space.
Additional instructions(messages)
When the Smart Parking Assist System
is operating, a message may appear
regardless of the parking order.
The messages will appear according to
the circumstances. Follow the instruc-
tions provided while parking your vehicle
with the Smart Parking Assist System.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In the below conditions the system
will be cancelled. Park your vehicle
manually.
1. Search for parking space
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
40km/h (24.8mph)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to R
(Reverse)
2. Steering wheel control
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
7km/h (4.3 mph)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to D
(Drive) before entering the parking
space
- When you hold the steering wheel
firmly
OJD042227/OJD042229
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
1084
System malfunction
• If there is a problem with the system,
when the system is turned on, the
above message will appear. Also, the
indicator on the button will not light up
and a beep sound will be heard 3
times.
• If there is a problem with only the
Smart Parking Assist System, the
Parking Assist System will operate
after 2 seconds.
If you notice any problem, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
OJD042228
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 108
4 109
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
❈ The actual rear view in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the navigation monitor while backing-up.
❈ For more detailed informations, refer
to supplement for navigation system.
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the vehicle in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. Both
turn signal lights will blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though
the key is not in the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch again.
OJD042089
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibil-
ity of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up
because there is a dead zone that
can't see through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
OJD042086
OJD042088
RR
RR
ee
ee
aa
aa
rr
rr
vv
vv
ii
ii
ee
ee
ww
ww
dd
dd
ii
ii
ss
ss
pp
pp
ll
ll
aa
aa
yy
yy
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
1104
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key (Smart
key : turns off the engine) and opens
the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
The headlamps (and/or taillights) remain
on for same minutes (Type A: 20 minutes,
Type B: 5 minutes) after the ignition key
is removed or turned to the ACC or
LOCK position. However, if the driver’s
door is opened and closed, the head-
lights are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter or smart key twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
You can activate or deactivate the head-
lamp delay fuction. Refer to “User setting”
in this section.
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome
function (if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
or smart key, the headlights will come on
for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter or smart key, the headlights
will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the head-
lamp welcome fuction. Refer to “User set-
ting” in this section.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlamp
delay function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, it causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 110
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Static bending light (if equipped)
While driving the corner, for your sight
and safety, the static bending light turns
on automatically. The system will operate
automatically as follows:
• When vehicle speed is under 10km/h
and steering wheel angle approximate-
ly 80 degrees.
• When vehicle speed is over 10km/h
and steering wheel angle approximate-
ly 35 degrees.
• When the vehicle is at a standstill.
• When moving rearwards with one of
the above conditions satisfied the lights
will light up the opposite direction.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Position light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Position light position ( )
When the light switch is in the position
light position, the tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
OED040045 OED040046
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
1124
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-
tive front lighting system (AFLS), it will
also operate when the headlamp is ON.
OYN049201
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instru-
ment panel, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windshield, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
OED040800
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:22 AM Page 112
4 113
Features of your vehicle
High - beam operation
1. Turn the light switch to the headlight
position.
2. Push the lever away from you.
• The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for
a prolonged time while the engine is
not running.
Flashing headlights
Pull the lever towards you. It will return to
the normal position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
OED040801
OED040802
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
1144
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
You can inactivate one-touch lane
change function in “Auto triple turn” of
“User setting”. Refer to “User setting” in
chapter 4.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
OED040804
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 114
4 115
Features of your vehicle
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
on after the position light is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light
switch (1) to the O (Off) position.
Rear fog light
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
rear fog light switch (1) to the on position
when the headlight is turned on.
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the
rear fog light switch is turned on after the
front fog light switch (if equipped) is
turned on and the headlight switch is in
the position light position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear
fog light switch to the on position again.
Rear fog light is located only on the dri-
ver’s side (for wagon).
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will turn off when:
Type A
• The position light or headlight (low beam)
switch is ON.
• The engine is OFF.
Type B
• The headlight (low beam) switch is ON.
• The engine is OFF.
OED040806
OAM049046L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYN049200
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:35 AM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
1164
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passen-
gers and the loading weight in the lug-
gage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
The higher the number of the switch is
positioned, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
OJD042049
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permis-
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 116
4 117
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses the
steering angle and vehicle speed, to
keep your field of vision wide by swiveling
and leveling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO position
when the engine is running. The adaptive
front lighting system will operate when
the headlamp is ON. To turn off the
AFLS, change the switch to other posi-
tions. After turning the AFLS off, head-
lamp swiveling no longer occurs, but lev-
eling operates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes
on, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OJD042090OYN049201
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
1184
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· 2 – High wiper speed
· 1 – Low wiper speed
· --- – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· O – Off
· – Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· – Continuous wipe
· --- – Intermittent wipe
· O – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
Windshield wipers (front)
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
: For a single wiping cycle, move the
lever to this position and release it.
The wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is held in this position.
O : Wiper is not in operation
--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals. Use this mode
in light rain or mist. To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed control knob.
1 : Normal wiper speed
2 : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OXM049230L/OAM049048L
■
■
Front
■
■
Rear (if equipped)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 118
4 119
Features of your vehicle
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to off posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
shield glass.
OEL049900
Rain sensor
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the off position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the off posi-
tion. Otherwise, wipers may operate
and ice may damage the windshield
wiper blades. Always remove all
snow and ice and defrost the wind-
shield properly prior to operating
the windshield wipers.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
1204
Windshield washers (front)
In the O (Off) position, pull the lever gen-
tly toward you to spray washer fluid on
the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
OXM049048E
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windshield and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 120
4 121
Features of your vehicle
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will operate at the same
time when you operate the windshield
washer. It will operate when the headlight
switch is in the first or second position
and the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button is in the ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers periodical-
ly to confirm that the washer fluid is
being sprayed properly onto the head-
light lenses.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
- Normal wiper operation
--- - Intermittent wipe
O - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever.
OXM049103E OXM049125L
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
1224
Interior lamp AUTO cut
• When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the transmit-
ter or the smart key, all interior lamp
will be off after a few seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in the
vehicle after turning off the engine, the
lights will turn off after 20 minutes.
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) to turn the map lamp
on or off
• /OFF (2) : The lamps are off even
if a door is opened.
• /DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp comes on when a door
is opened. If you close the door, the
lamps go out after approximately 30
seconds.
- The map lamp comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds when doors are
unlocked with a transmitter or smart
key as long as the doors are not
opened.
- The map lamp will stay on for approxi-
mately 20 minutes if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp will stay on continu-
ously if the door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position.
- The map lamp will go out immediate-
ly if the ignition switch is changed to
the ON position or all doors are
locked.
• /ON (4) : The map lamp stays on
at all times.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the lamp is turned on by pressing
the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off
even if the switch is in the OFF position
(2).
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
OGD041104
OJD042091
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 122
4 123
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
Type A
Press the button to turn the light on or off.
If the map lamp turns on by the map
lamp switch, the room lamp will turn on.
Type B
Press the switch to turn on the
room lamp.
Press the switch O to turn off the room
lamp.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this button
is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
OGD041151
■ Type B
OGDE041216
■ Type A
OLM049105
CAUTION
- Vanity mirror lamp
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage
the sunvisor.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:23 AM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
1244
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
OJD042092 OJD042093
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 124
4 125
Features of your vehicle
Headlamp welcome
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all
doors (and tailgate) are locked and
closed, the headlight, position light and
tail light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton (on the transmitter or smart key), the
lights will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are locked and closed, the room
lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any
of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
When all doors are locked and closed,
the puddle lamp will come on for 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached with
the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
1264
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
while engine is running.
• To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch
panel. The indicator on the rear win-
dow defroster button illuminates when
the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is heavy accumulation of snow
on the rear window, brush it off before
operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
The outside mirror defroster will operate
at the same time you turn on the rear
window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window
defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OJD042094
OJD042095
■ Manual climate control
■ Automatic climate control
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 126
4 127
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042100
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Air conditioning button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Mode selection knob
5. Air intake control button
6. Temperature control switch
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
1284
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air
conditioning system on. (if equipped)
OJD042102
((
((
ii
ii
ff
ff
ee
ee
qq
qq
uu
uu
ii
ii
pp
pp
pp
pp
ee
ee
dd
dd
))
))
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 128
4 129
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard
outlets, or windshield. Six symbols are
used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor,
Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Face/Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, B, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed towards
the face, the floor and the windshield with
a small amount of air directed to the side
window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OJD042104
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 129
Features of your vehicle
1304
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel or vent
control lever.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control switch allows
you to control the temperature of the air-
flow in the vehicle.
To change the temperature:
• Turn the knob to the right to increase
temperature.
• Turn the knob to the left to decrease
temperature.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-
lated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
OJD042105
OJD042107
OJD042108
OJD042106
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 130
4 131
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging
of the windshield and side windows and
the air within the passenger compart-
ment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OJD042101
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 131
Features of your vehicle
1324
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OJD042103
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 132
4 133
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at
the label inside of hood. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement
MAC evaporators shall be certi-
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE
Standard J2842.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 133
Features of your vehicle
1344
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 134
4 135
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is found,
we recommend that the system be inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of hood. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable
and at very high pres-
sure, the air conditioning
system should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is
important that the cor-
rect type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refrigerant
is at very high pressure,
the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is important
that the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:24 AM Page 135
Features of your vehicle
1364
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042109
1. Driver's temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Fan speed control button (Higher speed)
4. Fan speed control button (Lower speed)
5. Climate control display
6. Air conditioning button
7. Air intake control button
8. Passenger's temperature control knob
9. Dual temperature control selection button
10. OFF button
11. Front windshield defroster button
12. Mode selection button
13. Rear window defroster button
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 136
4 137
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
You can choose either the soft mode or
fast mode to select the fan speed.
Soft mode : The wind blows gently.
Fast mode : The wind blows heavier than
the soft mode to reach the selected tem-
perature fast.
Each time you press the AUTO button,
the mode will change as follows:
Soft mode ↔ Fast mode
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows:
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically according to the temperature
setting.
OJD042110
OJD042119
Soft mode
Fast mode
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:37 AM Page 137
Features of your vehicle
1384
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F
-Except Europe).
✽
✽
NOTICE
Placing any object over the sensor on
the instrument panel may interfere with
the heating and cooling system.
OGD041120OJD042230
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 138
4 139
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
If you push the button once, the corresponding switch will turn on, and if you push the
button again, the switch will turn off.
OJD042102
((
((
ii
ii
ff
ff
ee
ee
qq
qq
uu
uu
ii
ii
pp
pp
pp
pp
ee
ee
dd
dd
))
))
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 139
Features of your vehicle
1404
Face-Level (B, D, F*)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield.
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the
same time.
- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )
mode
* : if equipped
Maximum (MAX) defrost mode
When you select the MAX defrost mode,
the following system will set automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be turn
on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will set to the high
speed.
To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press
the mode button or MAX defrost button
again or AUTO button.
OJD042116 OJD042122
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 140
4 141
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel or vent
control lever.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the
left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Operate the driver’s side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tempera-
ture. Operate the passenger’s side tem-
perature control to adjust the passenger
side temperature.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control knob is operated,
it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the passenger side
temperature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)
temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-
vates for maximum heating or cooling.
OJD042113
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OJD042112
OJD042107
OJD042108
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 141
Features of your vehicle
1424
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control button. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows:
While pressing the DUAL button, press
the Face-Level selection button for 3
seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
OJD042117
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 142
4 143
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
button.
To change the fan speed, press the upper
button ( ) for higher speed, or press
the lower button ( ) for lower speed.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OJD042114
OJD042115
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 143
Features of your vehicle
1444
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OJD042118
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 144
4 145
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at
the label inside of hood. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement
MAC evaporators shall be certi-
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE
Standard J2842.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 145
Features of your vehicle
1464
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 146
4 147
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of hood. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable
and at very high pres-
sure, the air conditioning
system should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is
important that the cor-
rect type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refrigerant
is at very high pressure,
the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is important
that the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 147
Features of your vehicle
1484
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the hottest position
and the fan speed control to the high-
est speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)
will also be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-
matically, press the corresponding button
manually.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the position during
cooling operation in extremely
humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the out-
side air and the windshield could
cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection to the position
and fan speed control to the lower
speed.
OJD042123 OJD042124
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:25 AM Page 148
4 149
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding
button manually. If the position is
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a
higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
(HIGH) position.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windshield by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the climate control system is on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside tem-
perture is below -15 °C.
OJD042125
OJD042126
OGDE041135
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 149
Features of your vehicle
1504
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windshield and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the
windshield
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
while pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to
give notice that the A/C off can not be
selected.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns on
automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off auto-
matically, when the ignition switch turns
to the OFF position.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
OJD042129
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 150
4 151
Features of your vehicle
Center console storage
To open the center console storage, push
the lever and then lift up the cover.
Sliding armrest (if equipped)
To move forward
Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)
then pull it forward
To move rearward
Push the armrest rearward with your
palm.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
OJD042130 OJD042131
WARNING
Do not grab the front portion of the
armrest (1) when moving the arm-
rest rearward. It may pinch your fin-
gers.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 151
Features of your vehicle
1524
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the button
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning. The tem-
perature of the cool box will change
according to the temperature of air
conditioning.
2. Turn the knob to the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, turn the
knob to the close position.
✽✽
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool
box is reduced.
OJD042133
WARNING
Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
OJD042132
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
CC
CC
ll
ll
oo
oo
ss
ss
ee
ee
OO
OO
pp
pp
ee
ee
nn
nn
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 152
4 153
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
Luggage tray (wagon)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-
angle (front tray), tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
Luggage side tray (if equipped)
The luggage side tray can be used for
storing small items.
• To open the cover, pull up the handle
and lift the cover.
OGD041139
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass holder.
Such objects can be thrown from the
holder in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses holder
while the vehicle is moving. The rear
view mirror of the vehicle can be
blocked by an open sunglass holder.
OGDE042314
OGDE042313
OJD042153
OGDE042310
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 153
Features of your vehicle
1544
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
Push the lighter all the way into the socket.
When the element has heated, the lighter
will pop out to the "ready" position.
We recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorized Kia
dealer.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover. (Type B)
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OJD042134
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and
coffee pots, etc.) may damage the
socket or cause electrical failure.
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OJD042135
OJD042136
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 154
4 155
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Type B
To use the cup holder, open the cover.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you may burn your-
self. Such a burn to the driver
could lead to loss of control of
the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans and bottles out of direct
sunlight. Placing them in a hot vehi-
cle can cause them to explode.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray
as a waste receptacle.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquid, do not
dry the cup holder at high tempera-
tures. This may damage the chrome
part of the cup holder.
OJD042137
OJD042138
■ Front
• Type A
• Type B
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:26 AM Page 155
Features of your vehicle
1564
Rear
To use the cup holder, pull down the arm-
rest.
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only bottles should be placee in the
holder as it is written in the vehicle
“BOTTLE ONLY”.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side. (2)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and open the mirror cover (3).
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it
on. (if equipped)
The ticket holder (4) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
OMD040167K
OJD042139
■ Rear (if equipped)
OJD042162
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 156
4 157
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
❈ To learn how to use the vanity mirror
lamp, refer to "Interior light" in this sec-
tion.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage
the sunvisor.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
OJD042140
OJD042154
■ Type A
■ Type B
• Front
OJD042155
OJD042243
■ Rear, 5Door (if equipped)
■ Rear, wagon (if equipped)
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 157
Features of your vehicle
1584
Aux, USB and iPod
You can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in an
USB and also an iPod port to plug in an
iPod.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Clothes hanger
OED040354
CAUTION
• Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
• Be careful when opening and clos-
ing the doors. Clothes, etc. may
get caught between the door gap.
OJD042141
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get electrocuted or fire
may occur.
CAUTION
• Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 158
4 159
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders locat-
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-
gage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
Kia recommends that the Kia
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
OGDE041219
■ Type A ■ Type B
OJD042152
OGDE042312
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 159
Features of your vehicle
1604
This symbol indicates the
position of the front holders
(wagon).
Cargo area cover (5 Door)
Use the cover to hide items stored in the
cargo area.
The cargo area cover will be lifted when
the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the
strap (1) from holder if you want to return
the cover to original position. To remove
the cargo area cover completely, lift the
cover to a 43-degree angle and pull it out
to the full (2). For installation of the cover,
reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION
• When you return the cargo area
cover to its original position, hold
the cover and lower it.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the cover removed. It may dam-
age to the cover.
• The cargo area cover may be lift-
ed when the tailgate is opened.
Ensure that the luggage on the
cover is moved to a safe place.
• Since the cargo area cover may be
damaged or malformed, do not
apply excessive force to the cover
or do not put the heavy loads on it.
OJD042150
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
area cover while driving. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 160
4 161
Features of your vehicle
Barrier net (wagon) (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a barrier
net.
When you load some cargoes on the rear
seat or rear cargo area, you must install
the barrier net behind front seatback or
rear seatback.
It is designed to help protect the heads of
the occupants by obstructing objects fly-
ing forward in frontal collisions.
There are eight hook holders on both
side of the headliner over the headrests
for upper side fixation and on the floor
behind the front seats or rear seats for
lower side fixation.
To install the barrier net
1. Open the cover for the holder position
(1) or (2) you want to install.
2. Insert the net upper shaft into the large
hole (3) and then secure by sliding into
the small hole (4).
3. Hang the net strap hooks in the corre-
sponding hook holders on the floor
behind the front seat or rear seat.
This symbol indicates the
position of the hook holders
on the floor behind the rear
seat.
OGDE042299 OJD042244
OJD032057
OGDE042302
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 161
Features of your vehicle
1624
4. Fasten the straps, by using the
adjuster (1).
To remove the barrier net
1. Loosen the straps by using the strap
adjusters and remove the strap hooks
from the hook holders.
2. Remove the net upper shaft by pulling
it through the large holes.
3. Remove the barrier net.
OGDE042303
WARNING
• Make sure that there is no slack
in the barrier net by fastening the
strap securely when installing the
net. The strap should be fastened
after confirming that the hook is
inserted into the upper hook
holder securely.
• Make sure that the seatbacks are
locked securely.
WARNING
• Do not put passengers in the rear
seat or cargo area behind the bar-
rier net.
• Do not put passenger in the rear
centre seat when the barrier net
is installed behind the rear seats.
The barrier net may interfere with
use of the rear centre safety belt.
• Do not load cargo in the area
higher than the barrier net's
upper end.
• Do not load heavy cargo in the
area higher than the seatback to
avoid accident even if the barrier
net is installed.
• Do not load cargo which has
sharp edge that can pass through
the barrier net.
• Do not apply excessive force to
the barrier net by hanging on to
the net or by suspending heavy
cargo and so on.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 162
4 163
Features of your vehicle
Cargo security screen (wagon)
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen
1. Pull the cargo security screen towards
the rear of the vehicle by the handle
(1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).
✽✽
NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen with
the handle in the center to prevent the
guide pin from falling out of the guide.
When the cargo security screen is not in
use:
1. Pull the cargo security screen rear and
down to release it from the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will auto-
matically slide back in.
✽✽
NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not auto-
matically slide back in if the cargo secu-
rity screen is not fully pulled out. Fully
pull it out and then let go.
OGDE042304 OGDE042305
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 163
Features of your vehicle
1644
To remove the cargo security screen
1. Push the guide pin inward.
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull out
the cargo security screen.
Luggage rail system (wagon)
(if equipped)
The luggage rail system may prevent the
luggage from sliding around in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-
cle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as for-
ward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put luggage on it when it is
used.
OGDE042306 OGDE042307
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:27 AM Page 164
4 165
Features of your vehicle
Build in segmentation bar
• Put both pillars (A) from the segmenta-
tion bar in the openings from the rail.
• To move the segmentation bar, put
your hand on the side of the pillar and
push down the lever arm (B).
• Make sure the pillars click into place.
• To release the belt, turn the upper ele-
ment (C) to the left or right until it
clicks.
• Now you can pull the belt (D) and
secure your luggage by putting the belt
around the luggage and put the hook
(E) into the middle of the segmentation
bar (F).
• For bulky luggage, you can hook both
hooks into each other.
• To make sure the belt locks, put the
upper element (C) back into the lock
position (1).
Applying the shackle on the guide rail
• Put the shackle (A) in the position
where the shackle is put in the rail.
• To move the shackle, press the button
(1) and move the shackle along the rail.
• Make sure the shackle is clicked into
place.
• To fix the luggage, pull up the hook (2)
in the middle cargo bay.
• Now you can mount e.g. belt to fix the
luggage in the hook.
• The shackle cannot be used in the
position where the shackle is put in and
out of the rail (3).
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Shopping bag holder
CAUTION
• The segmentation bar must be
mounted and demounted with
both pillars simultaneously.
• Max. load: 30 kg with one belt
40 kg with two belts
OGDE042308
CAUTION
• Do not hang a bag weighing more
than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause
damage to the shopping bag
holder.
• Do not hang the frail objects
when you drive rough road, the
objects may be damaged.
OJD042151
CAUTION
Tensile force : max. 30 kgf. for
1 shackle
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:28 AM Page 165
Features of your vehicle
1664
Mounting bracket for roof carrier
(if equipped)
To install or remove a roof carrier, you
can use the mounting bracket and cover
on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool(coin or flat blade driv-
er) into the slot and slide the cover
toward the arrow on the cover.
2. Rotate the cover half way and insert
the cover on the roof hole as the illus-
tration.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent loosing the roof carrier
cover, install the cover on the roof before
you install the roof carrier.
3. After using the roof carrier, install the
cover back on the roof in the reverse
order.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof in such a way that it could interfere
with sunroof operation.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
OED046090 OED046091
WARNING
Use a coin or flat blade driver when
you remove the roof carrier cover.
If you use your fingernail, it may
damage your fingernail.
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof,
take the necessary precautions to
make sure the cargo does not
damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:28 AM Page 166
4 167
Features of your vehicle
Roof rack (for wagon)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
We recommend to obtain the crossbars
and fixing components needed to install
the roof rack on your vehicle from an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The crossbars (if equipped) should be
placed in the proper load carrying
positions prior to placing items onto
the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo onto
the roof rack in such a way that it
could
interfere with sunroof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being used to
carry cargo, the crossbars may need to
be repositioned if wind noise is detected.
WARNING
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof. Severe wind
updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof. This
is especially true when carrying
large, flat items such as wood
panels or mattresses. This could
cause the items to fall off the roof
and cause damage to your vehi-
cle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
are securely fastened.
OJD042245
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
• When you are carrying cargo on
the roof rack, do not operate the
sunroof (if equipped).
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:28 AM Page 167
Features of your vehicle
1684
(Continued)
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when car-
rying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible across the crossbars (if
equipped) and roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may dam-
age your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
(Continued)
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
JD eng 4a(~168).qxp 7/17/2012 10:28 AM Page 168
4 169
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID head
lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electron-
ic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle or when
loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
OHM048154N
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 169
Features of your vehicle
1704
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driving.
VOL (+ / -) (1)
• Push up the lever to increase volume.
• Push down the lever to decrease vol-
ume.
SEEK ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions base on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
MUTE (3)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
MODE (4)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
CAUTION
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
OJD042149
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
OJD042147
■ Type A
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 170
4 171
Features of your vehicle
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around your
city. They are intercepted by the radio anten-
na on your car. This signal is then received
by the radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
JBM001 JBM002 JBM003
FM reception AM reception FM radio station
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 171
Features of your vehicle
1724
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-
er station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
JBM004 JBM005
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 172
4 173
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Operating the device while driv-
ing could lead to accidents due to
a lack of attention to external sur-
roundings. First park the vehicle
before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may lead
to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on.
A sudden output of extreme vol-
ume upon turning the device on
could lead to hearing impairment.
(Adjust the volume to a suitable
levels before turning off the
device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of pur-
chase or service maintenance
center. Technical expertise is
required to install or disassemble
the device.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen while
driving. Staring at the screen for
prolonged periods of time could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or
modify the audio system. Such
acts could result in accidents,
fire, or electric shock.
• Using the phone while driving may
lead to a lack of attention of traffic
conditions and increase the likeli-
hood of accidents. Use the
phone feature after parking the
vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water or
introduce foreign objects into the
device. Such acts could lead to
smoke, fire, or product malfunc-
tion.
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound can
be heard as these signs may indi-
cate product malfunction.
Continued use in such conditions
could lead to accidents(fires,
electric shock) or product mal-
functions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not touch the antenna during
thunder or lightening as such
acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-
restricted areas to operate the
product. Such acts could lead to
traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle
ignition turned on. Prolonged use
with the ignition turned off could
result in battery discharge.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 173
Features of your vehicle
1744
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and
use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials, chem-
ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as such
materials may damage the device
panel or cause color/quality dete-
rioration
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 174
4 175
Features of your vehicle
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate
before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges
or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert more
than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, con-
tinued use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that inabili-
ties to properly play a copy protected
CD may indicate that the CD is defec-
tive, not the CD player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to sequen-
tially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 175
Features of your vehicle
1764
USING YOUR USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connect-
ed when starting up the vehicle.
Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB flashdrives
are very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off while the external USB device is
connected, the external USB device
may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrec-
ognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
•
USB devices without USB I/F authentica-
tion may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with the
human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or discon-
nect the USB device in a short peri-
od of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged or may malfunction. Therefore,
disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of
the external USB device or the type of
the files stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for recogni-
tion of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes
other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not
supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause
trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the vehi-
cle’s audio system may not recog-
nize the USB device. In that case,
connect the USB device directly to
the multimedia terminal of the vehi-
cle.
• If the USB device is divided by logi-
cal drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized
by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can be
unrecognizable by standard USB I/F
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 176
4 177
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types that liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-stick
type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are
not recognizable.
✽✽
NOTICE - USB Jack Damage
• The data in the USB memory may be
lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on a
personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB memory prod-
ucts which can be used as key chains
or cellular phone accessories as they
could cause damage to the USB jack.
Please make certain only to use plug
type connector products as shown
below.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 177
Features of your vehicle
1784
■■
CD Player : AC110A2EE/AC100A2EE
❋No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 178
4 179
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA
➟ AM ➟ AMA.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB MP3, iPod, BT
MP3, AUX modes.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB, iPod,
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
(5) ,
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):
Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
(6) / knob
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume Knob: Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(7)
Changes to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA.
(8)
Changes to AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of AM
➟ AMA.
AM
FM
TRACKSEEK
PHONE
5
1
On
MEDIA
6
1
On
RADIO
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 179
Features of your vehicle
1804
(9)
~
(Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-
nels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
(10) ,
MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search
FM : RDS Program Type Search
(11)
Each time the button is pressed sets
screen Off
➟ Screen On ➟ Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any key
to turn the screen On again.
(12)
Radio Mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
CD, USB, iPod mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each
❈ Press the key (over 0.8
seconds) again to continue listening to
the current song (file).
(13)
Displays menus for the current mode.
(14)
Press the key : Moves to the
Display, Sound, Phone(Option), System
setting modes
❈ I
f the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is supported
(15) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right
CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs
(files) by turning the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus
SETUP
SETUP
MEMU
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
FOLDER
PTY
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 180
4 181
Features of your vehicle
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes
selection mode
• During On state, press the or
key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Scroll Text
[Scroll Text] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
• : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or
‘Album/Artist/Song’.
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
RDM
SETUP
Off
On
OffOn
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
SETUP
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 181
Features of your vehicle
1824
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and
Balance.
Select [Audio Settings] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound
tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader
and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Power Bass
This is a sound system feature that pro-
vides live bass.
Select [Power Bass] Set /
through TUNE knob
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically con-
trol the volume level according to the
speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Set in 4 levels [Off/
Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE
knob
Volume Dialogue
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set vol-
ume of
TUNE
knob
OffOn
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 182
4 183
Features of your vehicle
PHONE SETUP (if equipped)
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Pair Phone
To pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone, authentication
and connection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot pair
your mobile phone while driving the vehi-
cle. First park your vehicle before use.
Select [Pair Phone] Set through TUNE
knob
➀ Search for device names as displayed
on your mobile phone and connect.
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
❈ The device name and passkey will be
displayed on the screen for up to 3
minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone
pairing process will automatically be
canceled.
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connection.
❈ It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled
mobile phones.
3
SETUP
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 183
Features of your vehicle
1844
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones will
be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently
connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Connect Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not cur-
rently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile phone.
➂ Connection completion is displayed.
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to con-
nect.
Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected mobile
phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (priori-
ty) of automatic connection for the paired
mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Priority]
➀ Select [ Phone] in the [Setup]
➁ Select [Phone List]
➂ From the paired phones, select the
phone desired for No.1 priority.
Select [ Priority]
❈ Once the connection sequence (priori-
ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority
mobile phone will be connected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be con-
nected: Automatically attempts to con-
nect the most recently connected
phone.
- Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected:
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 184
4 185
Features of your vehicle
Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
❈ When attempting to delete a currently
connected phone, the phone is first
disconnected.
• When you delete a mobile phone, lt's
phone book will also be erased.
• For stable
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
communication, delete the mobile phone
from the audio and also delete the audio
from your mobile phone
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download a phone
book and call histories into the audio sys-
tem.
Select [Phone] Select [ History]
[ P.BOOK] through
TUNE
knob
•
The download feature may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
• If a different operation is performed while
a phone book is being downloaded,
downloading will be discontinued. The
phone book already downloaded will be
saved.
• When downloading a new phone book,
delete all previously saved phone book
before starting download.
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it is
possible to automatically download a
new phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled
mobile phone
can be played through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
•
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party while
on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-
ume through
TUNE
knob
Off
On
Off
On
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 185
Features of your vehicle
1864
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system.
Select [
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off] Set through TUNE
knob
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected phone
and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system off.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
when the system is currently off, follow
these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
through the Key
Press the key Screen Guidance
❈ Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be
used and displays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
through the Key
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
will be
displayed.
➁ On the screen, select to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and
display guidance.
❈ If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
con-
nection may become intermittently dis-
connected in some mobile phones. Follow
these next steps to try again.
1)
Turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
function within the mobile phone
ON/OFF and try to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power ON/OFF and
try to connect again.
3)
Completely remove the mobile phone
battery, reboot, and then try to connect
again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try to con-
nect again
5) Delete all paired devices in your mobile
phone and the audio system and pair
again for use.
YES
3
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
PHONE
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 186
4 187
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is supported
Press the key Select [
System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is not supported
Press the key Select [
System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed
on the left side while the total system
memory is displayed on the right side.
VRS Mode
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal and
Expert modes.
Select [VRS Mode] Set through
TUNE
knob
• Normal : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed instructions
during voice command operation.
• Expert : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When using
Expert mode, guidance instructions can
be heard through the [Help] or [Menu]
commands.
3
SETUP
4
SETUP
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 187
Features of your vehicle
1884
Language
This menu is used to set the display and
voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈ The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
❈ Language support by region
-
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 188
4 189
Features of your vehicle
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
Press the
(, )
key
to change the mode in order
: FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA
: FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
: AM
➟
AMA
•
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays the
change radio mode pop up screen.
While the pop up screen is displayed, you
can change the radio mode
through the
tune knob or ~ keys.
Adjust Volume
Turn the VOL knob left/right to adjust
the volume.
SEEK
Press the ( , )key
,
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches for
the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ( , ) key
~
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency saved in
the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Pressing and holding the
desired key from ~ will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the ( , ) key
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the cur-
rent broadcast frequency.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
TA/SCAN
AMFMRADIO
61
61
AMFMRADIO
TRACKSEEK
AMFMRADIO
51
AM
FM
RADIO
AMFMRADIO
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 189
Features of your vehicle
1904
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds): Set
/
TA
Traffic Announcement) mode.
PTY Up/Down
• Press the , key
when searching PTY in RDS
Broadcasting Program Type selection.
MENU
Within key are the AST, AF,
Region and News functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [ AST]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save fre-
quencies with superior reception to
presets
~
. If no frequencies
are received, then the most recently
received frequency will be broadcast.
❈ Saves only to the Preset memory
~ of FMA or AMA mode.
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the key Set [ AF]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Alternative Frequency option can be
turned On/Off.
Region
Press the key Set [ Region]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Region option can be turned On/Off.
News
Press the key Set [ News]
through TUNE knob or key.
The News option can be turned On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound volume
upon receiving News or Traffic information.
The info volume can be controlled by
turning the VOL knob left/right while a
news or traffic broadcast is playing.
❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio
menus.
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
61
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
FOLDER
PTY
OffOn
TA/SCAN
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 190
4 191
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod / My Music
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD➟USB(iPod)➟AUX
➟My Music➟BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on the
screen.
❈ The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Song Infomation
Press the key Select [ Display]
through the TUNE knob or key
Select [Song Info] Media Display
• [Song Info] : The screen display info
can be changed to Album/Artist/Song
name.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music
mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing
the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats
the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (Pressing and holding
the key (over 0.8 seconds)): repeats all
files within the current folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all songs in
random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files
within the current folder in random
order.
iPod mode: ALB RDM on screen
• Album Random (Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files
within albums of the current category in
random order.
MP3 CD, USB, iPod mode: ALL RDM on
screen
• All Random (pressing and holding the
key (over 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files in
random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
1
RPT
SETUP
MEDIA
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 191
Features of your vehicle
1924
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the current song from
the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 1 second, the previous song is
played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Fast forwards the song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-
onds starting from the next song.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in
iPod mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing (Folder
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing (Folder
Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
❈ In iPod mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE
knob : Searches for
songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-
ed song (file).
FOLDER
PTY
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 192
4 193
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder
Repeat, All Random, Information, and
Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 193
Features of your vehicle
1944
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
• This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the copied
Music in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while copying
is in progress, a pop up asking you
whether to cancel copying is dis-
played.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) while
copying is in progress, copying is can-
celed.
❈ Music will not be played while copying
is in progress.
MENU : iPod
In iPod mode, press the key to
set the Repeat, Album Random, All
Random, Information and Search fea-
tures.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Album Random
Press the key Set [ AlbRDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays albums within the currently playing
category in random order.
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 194
4 195
Features of your vehicle
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently play-
ing category in random order.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current song.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• Some iPod models may not support
communication protocol and files may
not properly play.
Supported iPod models:
- iPod Mini
®
- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic) genera-
tion
- iPod Nano
®
1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch
®
1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different from
the order searched in the audio system.
• If the iPod is disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:
Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
-interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capa-
bility (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ). The
device can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
• To use iPod features within the audio, use
the cable provided upon purchasing an
iPod device.
• Skipping or improper operation may occur
depending on the characteristics of your
iPod/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and
USB, the sound may not be properly
played. In your iPhone, select the Dock
connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound output
(source).
• When connecting iPod with the iPod
Power Cable, insert the connector to the
multimedia socket completely. If not
inserted completely, communications
between iPod and audio may be inter-
rupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of the
iPod and the audio system, the sound
effects of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer func-
tion of an iPod when adjusting the audio
system’s volume, and turn off the
equalizer of the audio system when
using the equaliz
er of an iPod.
• When not using iPod with car audio, detach
the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod
may remain in accessory mode, and may
not work properly.
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 195
Features of your vehicle
1964
MENU : My Music
In My Music mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information,
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently play-
ing folder in random order.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete will
delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select the
delete menu to delete the selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected and
deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the key
and select the delete menu.
MENU
6
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 196
4 197
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE FOR USING THE My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a maxi-
mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-
rently connected with the AUX terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start when
an external device is connected with the
AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected, you
can also press the key to change
to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected
to the AUX terminal.
❈ Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 197
Features of your vehicle
1984
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio
may not be supported depending on
the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio, you must first pair and
connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio
can be used only when the [Audio
Streaming] of Phone is turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the
key Select [Phone] through the tune
knob or key Select [Audio
Streaming] through the TUNE
knob Set
/
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD➟USB➟AUX➟My
Music➟BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio will start play-
ing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start play-
ing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The previous song / next song / play /
pause functions may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Press the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 1 second, the previous song is
played.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Press the key : Plays the
next song.
SEEK
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
MEDIA
OffOn
3
SETUP
On
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:45 PM Page 198
4 199
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-
nected, it is not possible to enter Phone
mode. Once a phone is paired or con-
nected, the guidance screen will be dis-
played.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone will be automatically
connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone
will be automatically connected once
you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection,
set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
to OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
remote controller
(1) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
(2) MUTE button : Mutes audio Volume
during a call.
(3) button : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
(4) button : Places and transfers
calls.
(5) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed
on the screen.
➂ Press the key again to connect a
call to the selected number.
Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The most recently called number is
redialed.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 199
Features of your vehicle
2004
Phone MENU
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone book, Phone
Setup).
Call History
Press the key Set [ History]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The call history is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history
is displayed. (The download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones)
Phone Book
Press the key Set [
P. Book
]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The Phone book is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved to
one contact, then a screen showing
the mobile phone number, house and
office number is displayed. Select the
desired number to make the call.
❈ If Phone book does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download Phone
book is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [ Setup]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to “Phone
Setup”.
3
PHONE
2
RDM
PHONE
1
RPT
PHONE
PHONE
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 200
4 201
Features of your vehicle
NOTE:
If you need more information about
Kia’s
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
.
Contact kia website “www.kia.com”
(OWNERS>General Info>
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
).
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology that
allows multiple devices to be connected
in a short range, low-powered devices
like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless
remote controller, etc. For more information,
visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures can be used only when the mobile
phone has been paired and connected
with the device. For more information
on pairing and connecting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology endbled mobile
phones, refer to the “Phone Setup” sec-
tion.
• When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone is connected,
a ( ) icon will appear at the top of the
screen. If a ( ) icon is not displayed,
this indicates that a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled device
has not been connected. Your must
connect the device before use. For
more information on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phones,
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology option
within your mobile phone has been
turned on. (Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ depending
on the mobile phone.)
• In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition while talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology handsfree call will
result in the call becoming disconnect-
ed. (Switch the call back to your mobile
phone when starting the ignition.)
• Some features may not be supported in
some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone and devices.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology func-
tions may operate unstably depending
on the communication state.
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
settings
(e.g. pairing a phone) while driving.
• Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
-
enabled phones may not be recognized
by the system or fully compatible with
the system.
• Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
related features of the audio
system, refer your phone’s User’s
Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
•
The phone must be paired to the audio
system to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
related features.
• You will not be able to use the hands-
free feature when your phone (in the
car) is outside of the cellular service
area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground,
in a mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 201
Features of your vehicle
2024
(continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the
vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may
be difficult to hear the other person’s
voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or inside
metallic objects, otherwise communica-
tions with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system or cellular service
stations can be disturbed.
• While a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
your
phone may discharge quicker than usual
for additional
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference noise or mal-
function to audio system. In this case,
store the device in a different location
may resolve the situation.
• Please save your phone name in
English, or your phone name may not
be displayed correctly.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle
ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be auto-
matically connected.
Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be auto-
matically connected once you are in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
• If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power off.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 202
4 203
Features of your vehicle
VOICE COMMAND (if equipped)
• The voice recognition feature of this
product supports recognition of the
commands listed within this user’s
manual.
• While using voice recognition, operating
the steering remote control or the device
will terminate voice recognition and allow
you to manually operate desired func-
tions.
• Position of the microphone is above the
head of the driver’s seat.
• Voice recognition may not function
properly due to outside noise. The fol-
lowing conditions can affect the per-
formance of Voice Recognition:
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the heating/cooling system is on
- When passing a tunnel
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
• After downloading
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone book, the system
requires some times to convert the
phone book into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition may
not operate properly.
• Upon inputting your phone book, spe-
cial symbols and numbers cannot be
recognized by voice. For example, “#
John Doe%&” will be recognized as
“John Doe”.
Starting Voice Command
• To start voice command, shortly press
the key on the steering wheel
remote controller.
• If voice command is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep”
❈ If voice command is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep-”
❈ Setting Voice command [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:
Press the key Select [ System]
through the TUNE knob or key
Select [Prompt Feedback] through the
TUNE knob Set [Normal Mode]/[Expert
Mode]
• Say the voice command.
• For proper voice recognition, say the
voice command after the guidance
message and the “Beep” sound.
4
SETUP
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 203
Features of your vehicle
2044
Skipping the Guidance Message
While the guidance message is being
stated, shortly press the key (under
0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance
message and sound the “beep”.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Ending Voice Command
• While using voice command, press and
hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) to
end voice command.
• While using voice command, pressing
the steering wheel remote controller or
a different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, shortly press
the key (under 0.8 seconds) to end
voice command.
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 204
4 205
Features of your vehicle
Monday Monday
Tuesday Tuesday
Wednesday Wednesday
Thursday Thursday
Friday Friday
Saturday Saturday
Sunday Sunday
Use tune knob Use tune knob
Volume Volume
Max Volume maxinmum
Min Volume mininmum
AST (Auto store) Automatically selects and saves
channels
No Media Empty media file in CD or USB
No File Empty media file in CD or USB
Empty File Empty media file in MY MUSIC
Info (Information) Information of playing files
Artist Artist name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Title Song name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Album Album name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Genres "Genres" is keyword for search-
ing mode of playlists for iPod
Composers "Composers" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
Playlists
"Playlists" is filtering keyword for
searching mode of playlists for iPod
Songs
"Songs" is filtering keyword for
searching mode of playlists for iPod
Audiobooks "Audiobooks" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
Podcasts "Podcasts" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
RPT (Repeat) Audio play mode of Reapeat
F.RPT (Folder Repeat)
Audio play mode of Folder
Reapeat
RDM (Random) Audio play mode of Random
F.RDM(Folder Random)
Audio play mode of Folder
Random
A.RDM (All Random)
Audio play mode of All Random
COPY Copy MP3 file to flash memory
for MY MUSIC
Cancel copy Cancel copy mode
File copied Completed File copy
Free Free size of memory
Copy failed Copy failed
Search Search files
Loading CD Loading CD
Reading CD Reading CD
Reading Error Reading Error
Mechanism Error Mechanism Error
Ejecting CD Ejecting CD
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 205
Features of your vehicle
2064
Audio CD Audio CD
Track Audio CD song order
Reading Media Reading Media
Not supported Not supported file format
Empty iPod Empty iPod, iPod don't have
playable data
Communication Error
Communication error between
audio and iPod or usb
Delete Delete the paired phone or files
in MY MUSIC
Del.All Delete all files
Del.Sel Select files to delete
Return Return menu
List List files or paired phones
Select Files Select Files
Memory is full, Memory is full, Delete
files
Over 6000 files. can Over 6000 files. can not be
copied
Over 1000 same files
Over 1000 same files can not
be copied
System will automati
System will automatically
switchoff after 1 hour with igni-
tion off
Battery discharge Battery discharge
Start the engine
Setup Setup
Display Setup display mode
Mode Pop up This function is used to select
popup menu on or off
Scroll text This function is used to display
characters longer than the LCD
text displays
Song Info Setup display information being
played
Folder/File Display Folder/file name, file
currently being played
Album/Artist/Song Display Album/Artist/Song
name, file currently being played
Sound Setup sound mode
Audio Settings Setup Audio settings that con-
sist BASS,Middle,Treble,Fader
and Balance
PowerBass This function is used to improve
bass sound quality
Speed Dependent Vol.
Automatically adjust the volume
according to the car speed
Volume Dialogue Adjust volume level of Dialogue
Bass Bass is sound of low frequency.
It can be adjusted sound by
user
Middle Middle is sound of middle fre-
quency. It can be adjusted
sound by user
Treble
Treble is sound of high frequency. It
can be adjusted sound by user
cally switchoff after 1
hour with ignition off
Delete files
not be copied
can not be copied
Start the engine
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 206
4 207
Features of your vehicle
System?
activated
Fader Fader is sound positon between
FRONT and REAR. It can be
adjusted sound by user
Balance Balance is sound positon
between Right and Left. It can
be adjusted sound by user
Default This function is used to initialize
setting value
System Setup system or system infor-
mation
Memory Information Display used memory size
VRS Mode Setup Voice command mode
Normal Normal mode. This function is
used to set default value of
voice recognition factor
Expert Expert mode. This function is
used to set exercised value of
voice recognition factor
Language This function is used to select
user language
Deutsch Deutsch
English(UK) English(UK)
Français French
Italiano Italian
Español Spanish
Nederlands dutch
Svenska swedish
Dansk Danish
Polish
Polski Russian
The system will be The system will be
rebooted
Please change language
Please change language when
ignition ON
Bluetooth not ready
You can use BT System for a
moment Because BT system is
being initialized
Add a new Bluetooth Add a new
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device from your phone
Processing Bluetooth
You can use BT System for a
moment Because BT system is
being initialized or processing
other command
Incoming Call Receivng phone
Call Ended Call Ended
Call Rejected When there is unwanted call,
You push the button on the
steering remote controller
Unknown "Unknown" mean Headunit or
phone don't have any informa-
tion about phone number
Call is not possible Call is not possible
MIC Mute Microphone mute
Activate
Bluetooth
Activate
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Bluetooth System
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system activated
when ignition ON
device from your phone
Please try later
Please wait
rebooted
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 207
Features of your vehicle
2084
No phone paired. Empty phone paired.
Pair a phone?
No connected phone.
No connected phone. Connect a
phone?
Phone book is empty.
Phone book is empty
Available only when This is a warning, Do not enter
the MENU about BT Setup.
When vehicle is moving
Listening... Listen to instruction of audio
Phone book Download
Downloading phone book from
phone paired to audio
Auto Download After pairing phone, audio sys-
tem automatically download
phone book
Audio Streaming
After pairing phone
, a
udio system
can support
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology streaming mode
Outgoing Volume Set outoging volume "0 ~ 5"
Bluetooth
System Off
Turn off
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Bluetooth
System ON
Turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Device :
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
device name
Passkey Passkey for pairing a phone
Pairing complete Pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone to the audio
Pairing failed Audio & Phone connection have
failed
Already 5 devices All 5 phones have already been
paired. Delete a previously
paired phone to pair new phone
Connection complete
Audio & Phone connection have
succeed
Connection failed. Audio & Phone connection have
failed
Priority changed Changed priority about the reg-
istered phones
Overwrite previous Overwrite previous phone book
information
Phone does not support
Phone does not support Phone
book download
No connected There are phone in the
connection list
Phone does not support
But it was actually not connect-
ed BT pairing
Downloading stopped
Downloading stopped
paired. Delete a
paired phone?
Phone book download
Bluetooth
audio
vehicle is stationary
Download?
Connect a phone?
Pair a phone?
phone book?
Retry?
Bluetooth
device
JD eng 4b(169~).qxp 7/19/2012 3:46 PM Page 208
4 209
Features of your vehicle
■■
CD Player : AC111A2EE
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 209
Features of your vehicle
2104
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Switches to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA
➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3)
Switches to Media mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod)
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
(4)
Switches to Phone mode.
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Press to turn power on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control vol-
ume.
(6)
When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes
: changes the track, Song(file)
When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the
current frequency
-
Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
(7)
RDS Radio mode : searches RDS pro-
gram types.
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches folders.
PTY
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 210
4 211
Features of your vehicle
(8)
Turns the monitor display on/off.
(9)
Set TA(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off
(10)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):
Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset
~
for 5 seconds each.
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.
(11)
Switches to Setup mode.
(12) TUNE knob
Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frequencies.
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/channels/files.
(13) RESET
Forced system termination and system
restart.
SETUP
61
SCAN
TA
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 211
Features of your vehicle
2124
Steering remote controller
(1) VOLUME
Used to control volume.
(2) MUTE
Mutes audio volume.
(3) SEEK
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast fre-
quencies saved to presets.
- Media (CD / USB / iPod / My Music / BT
Audio) modes : changes the track, file.
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches
broadcast frequencies and channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
song(file)
(4) MODE
Each time this key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA
➟
USB or iPod
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio
If the media is not connected or a disc is
not inserted, corresponding modes will
be disabled.
(5)
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice prompt,
stops the prompt and converts to voice
command waiting state
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
(6)
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree wait
mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree call,
switches call back to mobile phone
(Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
(7)
Ends phone call
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 212
4 213
Features of your vehicle
RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6]
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets
(5) Autostore
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
(6) RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu
(7) RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio Pop-
up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 213
Features of your vehicle
2144
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the frequency
saved to each button.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one of
the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
✽✽
NOTICE
While Auto Store is operating, pressing
the [Cancel] button again will cancel
Auto Store and restore the previous fre-
quency.
61
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:54 AM Page 214
4 215
Features of your vehicle
RDS Menu
Press the button to set the AF
(Alternative Frequency), Region and
News features.
✽✽
NOTICE
The RDS Menu is not supported within
AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
✽✽
NOTICE
Once scan is complete, the previous fre-
quency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing the
key will cancel the scan opera-
tion.
Program Type
Press the key to search for
the desired Program type.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired program type.
Once you find the desired program type,
press the TUNE knob.
After selecting the desired Program Type
and while the Program Type is blinking
(approximately 5 seconds), pressing the
key will allow you to select a
different Program Type broadcast.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the key to turn the TA
(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off.
TA
PTY
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 215
Features of your vehicle
2164
MEDIA MODE
Switching to Media Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of
CD
➟
USB(iPod)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 216
4 217
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track
(7
) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(9) List
Moves to the list screen
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 217
Features of your vehicle
2184
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are support-
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
track has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 218
4 219
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat
and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random
Press the button to play tracks
in random order.
Press the button again to turn the
Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired track
is displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:58 AM Page 219
Features of your vehicle
2204
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 220
4 221
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could take
more than 10 seconds and the list may
not be displayed or song searches may
not operate. Once loading is complete,
try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the file
has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 221
Features of your vehicle
2224
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random Folder
➟ Random All➟ Off.
• Random Folder : Plays all files within
the current folder in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in Random
order.
PTY
FOLDER
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 222
4 223
Features of your vehicle
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat ➟Repeat
Folder➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within
the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 223
Features of your vehicle
2244
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 224
4 225
Features of your vehicle
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional time if
there are many files and folders within
the USB and result in faulty list display
or file searching. Normal operations
will resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 225
Features of your vehicle
2264
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
Folder➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Folder : Plays the files in the
current folder in random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in random
order.
PTY
FOLDER
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 226
4 227
Features of your vehicle
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current
file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 227
Features of your vehicle
2284
iPod MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random, displays the
currently operating function
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(9) List
Moves to the list screen
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 228
4 229
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs
Once an iPod is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
iPods with unsupported communication
protocols may not properly operate in
the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to the
previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
song has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 229
Features of your vehicle
2304
Category Menu
Within the iPod Category menu, you
will have access to the , Home,
and features.
(1) : Displays the play screen
(2) Home : Moves to the iPod root catego-
ry screen
(3) : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod device.
iPod Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random, Repeat and
List features.
Random
Press the button to play songs
in random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
Album➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Album : Shuffle Album plays
album in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all songs in
Random order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 230
4 231
Features of your vehicle
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected to
play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders, car
VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-
icated cable.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is con-
nected with the AUX terminal, then
AUX mode will automatically operate.
Once the connector is disconnected,
the previous mode will be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an
external audio player (camcorder, car
VCR, etc.) has been connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to AUX
mode, but only output noise. When an
external device is not being used, also
remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power
connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
MEDIA
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 231
Features of your vehicle
2324
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7
) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 232
4 233
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 233
Features of your vehicle
2344
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information is
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order. Press the button again
to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individually
select the files you want to delete. Once
files are selected, the button and
buttons will be enabled.
(1) : Moves to the previous screen
(2) Sellect All: Selects all files
(3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected
files
(4) Delete: Deletes selected files
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 234
4 235
Features of your vehicle
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to delete
the selected files.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more
than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory
Information]
✽
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result in
pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may not
automatically restart in some mobile
phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making
an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
may result in audio interference.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will auto-
matically start.
While playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 235
Features of your vehicle
2364
✽✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate dif-
ferently depending on the mobile phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key [Phone] button to
display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone, con-
nect/disconnect and delete features from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly, check
whether the feature is turned off at
[Phone] [Audio stream-
ing]. If the feature is off, turn back on
and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 236
4 237
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
refers to a short-distance wireless
networking technology which uses a
2.45GHz frequency to connect vari-
ous devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones, PDAs, various
electronic devices, and automotive
environments,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
CAUTION
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car audio
system with a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology , carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
while driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be the
cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 237
Features of your vehicle
2384
✽✽
NOTICE - USING UPON
CONNECTING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology PHONE
• Before connecting the car audio system
with the mobile phone, check to see that
the mobile phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the phone will
not be found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hidden
state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
• If you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, try the following.
1. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your mobile
phone.
- For more information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features within
your mobile, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
2. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car audio
system, go to > [Phone] and
[turn off] the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
• Park the vehicle when connecting the
car audio system with your mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection may become intermittently
disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1. Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3 Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• The Handsfree call volume and quali-
ty may differ depending on the mobile
phone.
(Continued)
SETUP
(Continued)
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle are
as follows. Some features may not be
supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technologydevice.
- Answering and placing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection - Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected at
a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technologydevice
is already connected.
• When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is being connected, the connec-
tion process cannot be canceled.
(Continued)
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 238
4 239
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology wireless technology
Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
PHONE
PHONE
(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio related features will
operate within this system.
• Normal operation is possible only for
devices that support Handsfree or
audio features, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone or
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio device.
• Only one function can be used at a time
between the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio. (While
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio, streaming will end upon entering
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone screen.)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected for various reasons, such as
being out of range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and connected.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 239
Features of your vehicle
2404
(1) Device : Name of device as shown
when searching from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device
(2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering remote controller displays the
following screen. Press the [Pair] but-
ton to pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously pair
device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same as
the steps described in the “When No
Devices have been Paired” section.
SETUP
PHONE
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 240
4 241
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• The waiting period during phone pair-
ing will last for one minute. The pair-
ing process will fail if the device is not
paired within the given time. If the
pairing process fails, you must start
the process from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices will automatically
connect once pairing is complete.
However, some devices may require a
separate verification process to con-
nect. Check to see whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology has been proper-
ly connected within your mobile
phone.
• List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[Phone] [Paired Phone
List].
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
(1) Connected Phone : Device that is cur-
rently connected
(2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired
but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and press the
button.
SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 241
Features of your vehicle
2424
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
As a result, the “Change Priority’ fea-
ture is used to set the connection pri-
ority of paired phones. However, the
most recently connected phone will
always be set as the highest priority.
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to change to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu. The selected
device will be changed to the high-
est priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a differ-
ent device, the currently connected phone
will always be set as the highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and press the
button.
SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 242
4 243
Features of your vehicle
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press the
button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently connect-
ed device, the device will automatical-
ly be disconnected to proceed with the
deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and phone book
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
(1) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be dialed
to make calls
(2) Call History : Device that is currently
connected
(3) Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen
(4) Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] button
but there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history data.
• If you press the [Phone book] button
but there is no phone book data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download phone book data.
.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more infor-
mation on download support, refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual.
PHONE
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 243
Features of your vehicle
2444
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
(1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone num-
ber
(2) Call : If a number has been entered,
calls the number If no number has
been entered, switches to call history
screen
(3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
(4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
(1) Caller : Displays the other part’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
(3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
(4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the incoming call pop-up is dis-
played, most Audio and SETUP mode
features will not operate. Only the call
volume can be operated.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will auto-
matically convert to Private mode.
PHONE
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 244
4 245
Features of your vehicle
During a Handsfree Call
(1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is saved
within your phone book
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
(3) Call time : Displays the call time
(4) End : Ends call
(5) Private : Converts to Private mode
(6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party
(7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party will
not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to download
the call history.
(1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
(2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
✽✽
NOTICE
• The call history list will display up to
30 outgoing, incoming, and missed
calls.
• Upon downloading call histories, pre-
viously saved histories are deleted.
• Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Previously saved phone book entries
are stored even if a device is discon-
nected and re-connected.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 245
Features of your vehicle
2464
Phone Book
Press the key Select
[Phone book]
The list of saved phone book entries is
displayed. Press the [Download] button
to download the call history.
(1) Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone book
entries
- Connects call upon selection
(2) Download : Download phone book
entries
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted.
• Downloading is not possible if the
phone book download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also, some
devices may require device authoriza-
tion upon attempting to download. If
downloading cannot be normally con-
ducted, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device setting or the screen
state.
• Caller ID information will not be dis-
played for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:55 AM Page 246
4 247
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition fea-
ture, only commands listed within the
user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of
the voice recognition system, pressing
any key other than the key or
touching the screen will terminate
voice recognition mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and maintain
a proper position when saying com-
mands.
• Within the following situations, voice
recognition may not function properly
due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the wind of the cooling / heat-
ing device is strong
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can be
used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a name,
the corresponding contact must be
downloaded and stored within the
audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the phone
book data into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition
may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands natu-
rally and clearly as if in a normal con-
versation.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 247
Features of your vehicle
2484
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller .Say a
command
If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep~”
• If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep~”
• To change the Normal Mode/Expert
Mode setting, go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback].
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The command wait state is immediately
ended and the beep ton will sound. After
the “beep”, say the voice command.
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 248
4 249
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller (over 0.8
seconds)
✽✽
NOTICE
• While using voice command, pressing
a steering wheel remote control or a
different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering remote
controller to end voice command.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 249
Features of your vehicle
2504
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options relat-
ed to [Display], [Sound], [Phone] and
[System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
(1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
(2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
(3) Night: Always maintains the bright-
ness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Pop-up Mode]
This feature is used to display the Pop-up
Mode screen when entering radio and
media modes.
When this feature is turned on, pressing
the or key will display
the Pop-up Mode screen.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can be
displayed only when two or more media
modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 250
4 251
Features of your vehicle
Scroll Text
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Scroll text]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too long
to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeatedly
scrolled. When turned off, the text is
scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Song Info]
This feature is used to change the infor-
mation displayed within USB and MP3
CD modes.
(1) Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name
(2) Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Audio Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 251
Features of your vehicle
2524
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent
Vol.]
The volume level is controlled automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
SDVC can be set by selecting from
Off/Low/Mid/High.
Voice Recognition Setting
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Volume Dialogue]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Volume Dialog.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 252
4 253
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
can be paired with the audio system.
For more information, refer to the “Pairing
through Phone Setup” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with the
audio system. Upon selecting a paired
phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the “Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
(1) : Moves to the previous screen
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently select-
ed phone
(
4) Change Priority : Sets currently select-
ed phone to highest connection priority
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING PHONE BOOKS
• Only phone books within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone book
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The Phone book for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded. Before
downloading, check to see whether
your phone supports the download
feature.
SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 253
Features of your vehicle
2544
Downloading Phone books
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone book
Download]
The Phone book is downloaded from the
mobile phone and the download
progress is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
saved for each paired device.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted. However, Phone book
entries saved to other paired phones
are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
phone book entries and the communi-
cation state.
• When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book down-
load feature.
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on, you
can play music files saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
from the car.
SETUP SETUP SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 254
4 255
Features of your vehicle
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to [Phone] and
press “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be sup-
ported in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phones.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 255
Features of your vehicle
2564
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information related
to system memory.
(1) Using : Displays capacity currently in
use
(2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Voice Recognition Mode Setting
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Voice Recognition
System]
This feature is used to select the desired
prompt feedback option from Normal and
Expert.
(1) Normal : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
(2) Expert : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
✽✽
NOTICE
• Voice Recognition is depend on the
Audio System.
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the sys-
tem and voice recognition language.
If the language is changed, the system
will restart and apply the selected lan-
guage.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 256
4 257
Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under
0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book.
Please say the name of the phone book you
want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Ding~
Ding~
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Ding~
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 257
Features of your vehicle
2584
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number what
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟ FM2➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA)
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be support-
ed in special circumstances.)
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 258
4 259
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
•
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
•
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod Plays iPod music.
Search iPod Moves to the iPod file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 259
Features of your vehicle
2604
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used while
listening to FM, AM radio.
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used while
listening to Audio CD.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 260
4 261
Features of your vehicle
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used
while listening to music files saved in CD and USB.
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used while playing
iPod.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 261
Features of your vehicle
2624
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used while
playing My Music.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands that can be used while playing Phone Music.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
JD eng 4c(209~).qxp 8/27/2012 9:56 AM Page 262
Driving your vehicle
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• ISG system deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• ISG system malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Automatic transaxle/DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Automatic transaxle/DCT operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Active eco system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Electronic stability control (ESC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To increase cruise control set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . 5-53
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-54
• To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
30 km/h (20 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following . . 5-55
5
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 1
Speed limit control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Speed limit control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To set speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To turn off the speed limit control, do one of the
following . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . . 5-59
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• The LDWS does not operate when. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• The LDWS may not warn you even if the vehicle leaves
the lane, or may warn you even if the vehicle does not
leave the lane when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Snowy or Icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Change to “winter weight” oil if necessary . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system. 5-70
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
• Don’t let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-70
• Carry emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 2
53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate/trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 3
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, espe-
cially children, before putting a vehi-
cle into “D (Drive)” or “R (Reverse)”.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 4
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Driving while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more dan-
gerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
OGDE051055
ACC
ON
START
LOCK
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 5
Driving your vehicle
65
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving.This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
(if equipped) is not a substitute for
the parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in 1
st
gear
for the manual transaxle or P (Park)
for the automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 6
57
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
✽✽
NOTICE - Kick down mecha-
nism
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
Starting the gasoline engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle/DCT* - Place
the transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
❈ DCT: Double clutch transmission
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal, and clutch (if equipped).
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 7
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START posi-
tion and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and
then to the ON position, in order to pre-
heat again.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, run the
engine on idle condition about 1
minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
W-60
Glow indicator light
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:40 AM Page 8
59
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed. It will also go off immediately
when the theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop but-
ton will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft steering
column lock
The steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft.
It locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop-
erly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
OJD052001
White
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 9
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the OFF position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped
with anti-theft steering column lock) and
electrical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to pre-
vent battery discharge.
ON
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
while the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 sec-
onds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
Orange
Blue
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 10
511
Driving your vehicle
START/RUN
With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safe-
ty, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automat-
ic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF
➔
➔
ACC
➔➔
ON
➔➔
OFF or ACC
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock (if equipped) is not a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver's seat, always
make sure the shift lever is
engaged in P (Park), set the park-
ing brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Not illuminated
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 11
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine
✽✽
NOTICE - Kick down mecha-
nism (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
Starting the gasoline engine
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while starting the engine.
Automatic transaxle/DCT - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
5. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing the
accelerator.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 12
513
Driving your vehicle
3. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more while the engine is pre-heat-
ing, the engine may start.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, a message “Key is not in the
vehicle” will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indicator
or warning will turn off while the vehicle
is moving. Always have the smart key
with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or tur-
bocharger unit.
W-60
Glow indicator light
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 13
Driving your vehicle
145
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
The side with the lock button should
be contacted directly.
If you press the smart key directly to
the engine start/stop button, the engine
start/stop button and the smart key
right angle to the direction
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
cannot start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button for 10 seconds while
it is in the ACC position. The engine
can start without depressing the brake
pedal. But for your safety always
depress the brake pedal before start-
ing the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the engine start/stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
OJD052002
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion. If the traffic and road condi-
tions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving and
press the engine start/stop button
in an attempt to restart the engine.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 14
515
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel con-
sumption by automatically shutting down
the engine, when the vehicle is at a
standstill. (For example : red light, stop
sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as soon
as the starting conditions are met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system has
malfunctioned.
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
The engine will stop and the green AUTO
STOP( ) indicator on the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052026
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 15
Driving your vehicle
165
Also, a message "Auto Stop" will appear
on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
You must reach a speed of at least 10
km/h (6 mph) since last idle stop.
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you unfasten the seatbelt or open the
driver's door (or engine hood) in auto
stop mode, the following will happen:
• The ISG system will deactivate (the
light on the ISG OFF button will illu-
minate).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A message "Auto Start Deactivated
Start Manually" will appear on the
LCD display.
OJD052003 OJD052040/OJD052053
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052036/OJD052049
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 16
517
Driving your vehicle
Auto start
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
• Press the clutch pedal when the shift
lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
• A message "Press Clutch Pedal for
Auto Start" will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
• The engine will start and the green
AUTO STOP ( ) indicator on the
instrument cluster will go out.
The engine will also restart automati-
cally without the driver’s any actions
if the following occurs:
- The fan speed of manual climate con-
trol system is set above the 3rd position
when the air conditioning is on.
- The fan speed of automatic climate
control system is set above the 6th
position when the air conditioning is on.
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system
on.
- When the defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h
(3 mph).
The green AUTO STOP ( ) indicator
on the instrument cluster will blink for 5
seconds and a message “Auto Start” will
appear on the LCD display.
OJD052041/OJD052054
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052037/OJD052050
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 17
Driving your vehicle
185
Condition of ISG system opera-
tion
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and engine hood are
closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is ade-
quate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
-2°C to 35°C (28.4°F to 95°F).
- The engine coolant temperature is not
too low.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG system does not meet the
operation condition, the ISG system is
deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF
button will illuminate and a message
“Auto Stop Deactivated” will appear
on the LCD display.
• If the light or notice comes on contin-
uously, please check the operation
condition.
ISG system deactivation
• If you wish to deactivate the ISG sys-
tem, press the ISG OFF button. The
light on the ISG OFF button will illumi-
nate and a message “Auto Stop Off”
will appear on the LCD display.
• If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052003/OJD052038/OJD052051
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052003/OJD052039/OJD052052
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 18
519
Driving your vehicle
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate when:
The ISG related sensors or system error
occurs.
The following will happen:
• The yellow AUTO STOP ( ) indica-
tor on the instrument cluster will stay
on after blinking for 5 seconds.
• The light on the ISG OFF button will
illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF but-
ton again or if the ISG system continu-
ously does not work correctly, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
• When the ISG OFF button light comes
on, it may stop illuminating after driv-
ing your vehicle at approximately 80
km/h for a maximum of two hours and
setting the fan speed control knob
below the 2nd position. If the ISG OFF
button light continues to be illuminat-
ed in spite of the procedure, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
When the engine is in Idle Stop
mode, it's possible to restart the
engine without the driver taking
any action.
Before leaving the car or doing any-
thing in the engine room area, stop
the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position or
removing the ignition key.
OJD052003
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 19
Driving your vehicle
205
Manual transaxle operation
• The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully syn-
chronized in all forward gears so shift-
ing to either a higher or a lower gear is
easily accomplished.
• Depress the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-
tion lock switch, the engine will not
start when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• The shift lever must return to the neu-
tral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The button located immedi-
ately below the shift knob must be
pushed upward while moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
•
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052004
The button (1) must be pushed while
moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without
pushing the button (1).
CAUTION
• When downshifting from 5 (Fifth)
gear to 4 (Fourth) gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently move the shift lever side-
ways in such a manner that sec-
ond gear is engaged. Such a dras-
tic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine and transaxle
damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine and transaxle.
• When shifting between 5th and
6th gear, you should always push
the gear level all the way to the
right. You could otherwise shift
unintentionally into 3rd or 4th
gear and damage the transaxle.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 20
521
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1 (First) or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in neutral
position and release the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down, and then
shift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear
position.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be depressed all
the way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released while driving. Do
not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This can cause unneces-
sary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1 (First) gear when the vehi-
cle is parked on a level or uphill
grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill grade.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed in the
order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal while
the parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the neutral
position.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
depress the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don’t depress the clutch
pedal fully, the clutch may be dam-
aged or noise may occur.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 21
Driving your vehicle
225
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or while driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into R
(Reverse), depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three sec-
onds, then shift to the R (Reverse)
position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:41 AM Page 22
523
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle/DCT opera-
tion
The automatic transaxle/DCT has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.The
individual speeds are selected automati-
cally, depending on the position of the
shift lever.
❈ DCT: Double clutch transmission
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/DCT (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052005
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 23
Driving your vehicle
245
✽✽
NOTICE
• The double clutch transmission gives
the driving feel of a Manual
Transaxle, yet provides the ease of a
fully Automatic Transaxle. Unlike a
traditional Automatic Transaxle, the
gear shifting can be felt (and heard)
on the double clutch transmission
- Think of it as an automatically shift-
ing Manual Transaxle.
- Shift into Drive range and you get
great shifting feedback and sound,
but no shifting hassle.
• Dry-type clutch transfers driving
torque and also delivers direct driving
feel which can be felt different from
smooth Automatic Transaxle with slip
of torque converter. This might be
easily felt especially at launch & low
vehicle speed.
• Double clutch transmission adopts
dry-type double clutch, which is dif-
ferent from torque converter of
Automatic Transaxle, and shows bet-
ter acceleration performance during
driving. But, initial launch might be
little bit slower than Automatic
Transaxle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When rapidly accelerating at low
vehicle speed, engine could rev at high
rpm depending on vehicle drive con-
dition.
• For smooth launch at uphill, press
down the accelerator pedal properly
depending on the vehicle drive condi-
tion.
• If you release your foot from the accel-
erator pedal at low vehicle speed, you
may feel strong engine brake, which is
similar to manual transaxle.
• In case if you want to speed down at
downhill, you may use sport mode or
paddle shift to downshift, and also use
foot brake properly depending on
driving condition to get enough decel-
eration.
• When you turn the ignition on and off,
you may hear clicking sounds as the
transmission solenoids turn on and
off, cycling through a self test. This is
a normal sound for the Double Clutch
Transmission.
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 24
525
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
CAUTION - DCT
• If the vehicle is held by applying
accelerator pedal at the hill, the
transmission and clutch will be
damaged. To hold at the hill, use
the parking brake or foot brake.
• An overload of the clutch is indi-
cated by a longitudinal judder and
a blinking display. To exclude a
clutch-damage, the clutch is
opened and the torque flow inter-
rupted. If the clutch is opened,
apply the foot brake and wait
some minutes before driving
again.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
severe injuries and damage on
the car.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake has to be applied.
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorized Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe pro-
tection mode, the transaxle indi-
cator blinks with buzzer sound.
The buzzer beeps 3 times.
In this time, the LCD warning
about safe protection mode also
displays. In this condition, the
driving may not be smoothly. If
you ignore this warning, the driv-
ing condition is getting worse and
the system may have problem. To
return the normal driving condi-
tion, apply the foot brake and
stop the vehicle for few minutes
before driving off.
• While shifting the gear automati-
cally, you may feel a correspon-
ding shifting of gear. However, it
is not malfunction.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 25
Driving your vehicle
265
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator pedal fully (more than 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is in motion, except
as explained in “Rocking the vehi-
cle”, in this manual.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 26
527
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
DS mode (Drive Sporty) - DCT
DS mode supports the performance
mode for driver. To shift the DS mode,
shift the transaxle to DS mode which is
center of sports mode. If you shift [+] or
[–] gear, the mode is change to sports
mode. The transmission shift is automat-
ically changed at higher engine speeds
by engine load, your driving style, vehicle
condition.
In DS mode, while coasting downhill, the
engine does not support the vehicle to
slow down.
In DS mode, if you control the paddle
shifter, the gear will be changed to sports
mode. If the gear is changed to D (Drive),
the gear will be changed to D (Drive)
mode.
✽✽
NOTICE - DCT
While stopping the vehicle by applying
parking brake in D gear, even if you
release the parking brake, the vehicle
may not move. In this case, you can
drive the vehicle by applying the foot
brake and release, applying the acceler-
ator or shifting the lever (D
→
→
N
→
→
D).
OJD052006
Sports mode
or
DS mode
+
+
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 27
Driving your vehicle
285
✽✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road, push
the shift lever forward into the +(up)
position. This causes the transaxle to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better
for smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position, DS mode
or the sports mode.
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 10km/h.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used to sports mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 10km/h,
if you depress the accelerator pedal for
more than 7 seconds, if you shift the shift
lever from D to sport mode and shift it
from sports mode to D again or if you
hold the paddle shifter [+] lever over 1
second, the system will change from
sports mode to D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used.
With the shift lever in the sport mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift the gear.
• When you change the DS mode to
manual mode, if you want to use DS
mode again, shift the gear lever to D
and shift DS mode.
OJD052025
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 28
529
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
OJD052007
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 29
Driving your vehicle
305
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 30
531
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
Auto transaxle and DCT
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator pedal gradually while releas-
ing the service brakes.
Auto transaxle
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 31
Driving your vehicle
325
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine and transaxle.
But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the
driver's driving habits and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO but-
ton again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated :
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress the
accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance may
be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal condi-
tions when the active eco system is acti-
vated to improve fuel efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system will
be limited to gain power when driving
uphill because the engine torque is
restricted.
• When using sports mode: The system
will be limited according to the shift
location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
pressed for a few seconds: The system
will be limited, judging that the driver
wants to speed up.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052008
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 32
533
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to sefely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
(Continued)
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 33
Driving your vehicle
345
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 34
535
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake - Hand type
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-
tion it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly press the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while pressing the button.
OJD052011OJD052010
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
It could damage the vehicle sys-
tem and make endanger driving
safety.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 35
Driving your vehicle
365
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will illuminate when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever instead of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake AND
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in 1st (First)
gear or R (Reverse) for manual
transaxle equipped vehicles and
in P (Park) for automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WK-23
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 36
537
Driving your vehicle
Electric parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes on.
✽✽
NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer if the vehicle does not stand still,
do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more than
3 seconds.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the fol-
lowing condition:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
OJD052012
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
endanger driving safety.
OJD052013
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 37
Driving your vehicle
385
To release EPB (electric parking brake)
automatically:
• Manual transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine hood
and tailgate.
4. Depress the clutch pedal with the
gear engaged.
5. Depress the accelerator pedal while
releasing the clutch pedal.
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine hood
and tailgate.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal while
the shift lever is in R (Rear), D
(Drive).
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to
R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral)
to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
✽✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the ignition switch or
engine stop/start button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing up
the vehicle.
✽
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
A vehicle towing a trailer on a hill or on
an incline may slightly roll backwards
when starting the vehicle. To prevent the
situation follow the below instructions.
1. Depress the clutch pedal and select a
gear.
2. Keep pulling up the EPB switch.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and
slowly release the clutch pedal.
4. If the vehicle starts off with enough
driving power release the EPB switch.
Do not follow the above procedure when
driving on a flat level ground. The vehi-
cle may suddenly move forward.
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB
has been released, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with the
EPB applied. It may cause exces-
sive brake pad and brake rotor
wear.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 38
539
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB applied,
but doesn't release automatically, a
warning will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
and any door, the engine hood or tail-
gate is opened, a warning will sound
and a message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a
warning may sound and a message
may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress the
brake pedal and release EPB by pressing
the EPB switch.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OJD052035/OJD042195
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 39
Driving your vehicle
405
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is opera-
tion normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator remains
on, comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch or the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position, this indicates that the
EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but it does not indicate a mal-
function of the EPB.
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB,
but these conditions are normal
and indicate that the EPB is func-
tioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, depress it slowly.
OJD052014
CAUTION
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few
minutes. The warning light will go
off and the EPB switch will oper-
ate normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does not
go off, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 40
541
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake pedal
while driving, emergency braking is pos-
sible by pulling up and holding the EPB
switch. Braking is possible only while you
are holding the EPB switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the EPB,
the parking brake warning light will
illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) does not release
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer by loading the
vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
WARNING
Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
`Control) may be longer than for
those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 41
Driving your vehicle
425
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 42
543
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS.We recom-
mend that you contact an author-
ized Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your
vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. We recommend
that you contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
W-78
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 43
Driving your vehicle
445
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehi-
cle during cornering maneuvers. ESC
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESC
applies the brakes at individual wheels
and intervenes with engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic stability control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic stability
control (ESC) System is functioning
properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OJD052009
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 44
545
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not increase even if you
press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the
stability and traction of the
vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel the engine man-
agement system of ESC,
press the ESC OFF button for
less than 3 seconds (ESC
OFF indicator light illumi-
nates). The brake control
function still operates.
• To cancel the engine man-
agement and brake control
function of ESC, press the
ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds (ESC OFF
indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
-
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 45
Driving your vehicle
465
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off by pressing the ESC OFF
button for more than 3 seconds (ESC
OFF light illuminated). If the ESC is
left on, it may prevent the vehicle
speed from increasing, and result in
false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 46
547
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when brak-
ing.
VSM operation
When the VSM is operating:
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ( )
light will blink.
• The steering wheel may be controlled.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS (Electronic Power Steering) indi-
cator light remains on the instrument
cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illumi-
nates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system or VSM system. If the
ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with the VSM
installed. Always follow all the
normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions –
including driving in inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 47
Driving your vehicle
485
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 1~2 seconds. The brakes
are released when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or after about 1~2 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking the
stop light when the vehicle is braked rap-
idly and severely.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops (vehicle
speed is over 55km/h and the vehicle
deceleration at greater than 7 m/s
2
)
• The ABS is activating
When the vehicle speed is under 40 km/h
and the ABS deactivates or the sudden
stop situation is over, the stop light blink-
ing will stop. Instead, the hazard warning
flasher will turn on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn off
when vehicle speed is over 10km/h after
the vehicle has stopped. Also, it will turn
off when the vehicle is driven at low
speed for some time. You can turn it off
manually by pushing the hazard warning
flasher switch.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
1~2 seconds, so when the vehicle
is starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
system will not work if the hazard
warning flasher is already on.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 48
549
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and we
recommend that you call an authorized
Kia dealer.
• Do not coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead while
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, do not let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid creep-
ing forward, keep your foot firmly on
the brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 49
Driving your vehicle
505
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift
lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in
first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the vehi-
cle cannot roll. Then release the park-
ing brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 50
551
Driving your vehicle
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activated
or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position
or starting the engine. This is to check
if the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in nor-
mal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(cruise indicator light is illuminat-
ed), the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
OJD052015/OJD052048
■ Supervision
■ Normal vision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:42 AM Page 51
Driving your vehicle
525
Cruise control switch
O: Cancels cruise control operation.
: Turns cruise control system on or
off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control
speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Move the lever down ( ) on the
steering wheel, to turn the system on.
The cruise indicator light will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (20 mph).
✽
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at least
once to set the cruise control after start-
ing the engine.
3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
cruise set indicator light will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
OJD052016 OJD052017 OJD052018
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 52
553
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2 km/h (1 mph)
each time you move the lever up (to
RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1 mph)
each time you move the lever down (to
SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
OJD052019 OJD052018
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 53
Driving your vehicle
545
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if equipped
with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with
an automatic transaxle.
• Press the O (Cancel) button located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 20 km/h (12
mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the
cruise set
indicator
light will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume cruise
control operation, move up the lever (to
RES+) located on your steering wheel.
You will return to your previously preset
speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph):
If any method other than the button
was used to cancel cruising speed and
the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically
resume when the +RES switch is
pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
30 km/h (20 mph).
OJD052020 OJD052019
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 54
555
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Move the lever down ( ).
• Move the lever up ( ). (If you move
the lever up, the speed limit system will
turn on)
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 55
Driving your vehicle
565
You can set the speed limit when you do
not want to drive over a specific speed.
If you drive over the preset speed limit,
the warning system operates (set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound) until
the vehicle speed returns within the
speed limit.
✽✽
NOTICE
While speed limit control is in opera-
tion, the cruise control system cannot be
activated.
Speed limit control switch
O: Cancels set speed limit.
: Turns speed limit control system on
or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit con-
trol speed.
To set speed limit :
1. Move the lever up ( ) on the steer-
ing wheel, to turn the system on.
SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052021OJD052016
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 56
557
Driving your vehicle
The speed limit indicator light will illumi-
nate.
2. Move the lever down (to SET-).
3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(to SET-), and release it at the desired
speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or
down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed
will increase or decrease by 5 km/h (3
mph).
Move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(SET-) and release it immediately. The
speed will increase or decrease by 1
km/h.
The set speed limit will display on the
instrument cluster.
The set speed limit will be displayed.
OJD052031/OJD0520343
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052022
OJD052032/OJD052044
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 57
Driving your vehicle
585
To drive over the preset speed limit you
must depress hard on the accelerator
pedal (more than approximately 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise. Then the set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound until
you return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Depressing the accelerator pedal less
than approximately 50%, the vehicle
will not speed over the preset speed
limit but maintain the vehicle speed
within the speed limit.
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
• Move the lever up ( ).
• Move the lever down ( ). (If you
move the lever down, the cruise sys-
tem will turn on)
• Turn the ignition off.
If you press the O (CANCEL) button
once, the set speed limit will cancel, but
it will not turn the system off. If you wish
to reset the speed limit, move the lever
up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) on your
steering wheel to your desired speed.
CAUTION
The “---” indicator will blink if there
is a problem with speed limit con-
trol system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OJD052023
OJD052033/OJD052046
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 58
559
Driving your vehicle
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windshield and warns
you when your vehicle leaves the lane.
To operate the LDWS, press the switch
with the ignition in the ON position. The
indicator illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the switch
again.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• The LDWS does not make the vehi-
cle change lanes. It is the driver's
responsibility to always check the
road conditions.
• Do not turn the steering wheel sud-
denly, when the LDWS warns you
that your vehicle is leaving the lane.
• If the sensor can not detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 60km/h, the LDWS won't
warn you even though the vehicle
leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Do not let water or any kind of liq-
uid come in contact with the LDWS
sensor.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts and
do not affect the sensor by a strong
impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• Always check road conditions
because you may not hear the
warning chime because of audio
and external conditions.
OJD052030
OJD052029
OJD042178
OJD052028
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:43 AM Page 59
Driving your vehicle
605
If your vehicle leaves the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle speed
exceeds 60km/h, the warning operates
as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you leave
on the LCD display blinks yellow with 0.8
second of interval.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning sound
operates with 0.8 second of interval.
If you change the display mode of trip
computer while the LDWS is ON, the
symbol of the LDWS will display like a
picture.
The color of symbol will change depend
on the condition of LDWS system.
- White color : It means the sensor does
not detect the lane line.
- Green color : It means the sensor detects
the lane line.
OJD042180
OJD042179
OJD042181/OJD042182
• When the sensor detects the lane line
• When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OJD052057
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 60
561
Driving your vehicle
Warning indicator
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator
comes on (yellow indicator), the LDWS is
not working properly. We recommend
that the system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal to
change lane.
But, when the hazard warning flasher
is operating, the LDWS operates nor-
mally.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽
NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn signal
switch, then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you even
if the vehicle leaves the lane, or
may warn you even if the vehicle
does not leave the lane when:
• The lane is not visible due to snow, rain,
stain, a puddle or many other things.
• The brightness of the outside changes
suddenly.
• Not turning on the headlight even at
night or in the tunnel.
• Difficult to distinguish the color of the
lane from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road.
• The lens or windshield is stained with
foreign matter.
• The sensor can not detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or heavy
snow.
• The surrounding temperature of the
inside rear view mirror is high due to a
direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead hides
the lane line.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or decreas-
es or the lane lines are crossing com-
plicatedly.
• Putting something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane line is more than two in either
side (Left/Right).
OJD052056
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 61
Driving your vehicle
625
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a
liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-
cle as economically as possible, use the
following driving suggestions to help
save money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Do not make "jack-rabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain
a steady cruising speed. Do not race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you do not have
to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-
essary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel con-
sumption.
• Do not "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-
cle in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule. If you drive your vehi-
cle in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required.
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 62
563
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. We recommend in general that the
vehicle be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock (if equipped)
resulting in loss of vehicle steering
which could cause serious injury
or death.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 63
Driving your vehicle
645
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1 (First) and
R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a
manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 64
565
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 65
Driving your vehicle
665
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks of
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to section
8, “Tires and wheels”.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to section
7, “Tires and wheels”.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 66
567
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimize the problems of winter
driving, you should follow these sugges-
tions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 67
Driving your vehicle
685
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mount-
ing. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
• If your vehicle has 225/45R17 size
tires do not use tire chain; they
can damage your vehicle (wheel,
suspension and body).
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 68
569
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure that
its freezing point is sufficient for the tem-
peratures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 69
Driving your vehicle
705
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized Kia dealer
and most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the paint
finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tire chains, tow
straps or chains, flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-
alls, blanket, etc.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 70
571
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for tow-
ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-
cles or apparatus may differ. We recom-
mend that you ask an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE - For Europe
• The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 100
km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of catego-
ry M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehi-
cle of category N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is tow-
ing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling device
may cause the tire maximum load rat-
ings to be exceeded, but not by more
than 15 %. In this case, do not exceed
100 km/h (62.1 mph) and increase the
tire inflation pressure by at least 0.2
bar.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also considerably adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling require-
ments.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combi-
nation weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer tongue load are all with-
in the limits.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 71
Driving your vehicle
725
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• A Kia accessory trailer hitch is avail-
able at an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-
ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
OJD052024
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 72
573
Driving your vehicle
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is prop-
erly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-
mum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Do not tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 73
Driving your vehicle
745
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist you
in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat.
If the needle of the coolant tem-
perature gauge moves across the
dial towards “130/H (HOT)”, pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 74
575
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unex-
pectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here is how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break loose.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 75
Driving your vehicle
765
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it is a good idea to
review these sections before you start
your trip.
Do not forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 76
577
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer on additional requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:
Engine
Item
Gasoline 1.4L Gasoline 1.6L MPI Gasoline 1.6L GDI Diesel 1.4L Diesel 1.6L
M/T M/T A/T M/T A/T (DCT) M/T M/T A/T
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
650
(1,433)
650
(1,433)
650
(1,433)
With brake
System
1,200
(2,646)
1,300
(2,866)
1200
(2,646)
1,400
(3,086)
1,300
(2,866)
1,500
(3,307)
1,500
(3,307)
1,300
(2,866)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Recommended distance from rear
wheel center to coupling point
mm (inch)
5 Door : 859 (33.8)
Wagon : 1,055 (41.54)
For Europe
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 77
Driving your vehicle
785
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more than
the maximum trailer weight with trailer
brakes. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer tongue load. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 78
579
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
With increasing altitude the engine per-
formance decreases. From 1.000 m
above sea level and for every 1.000 m
thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer weight
(trailer weighter + gross vehicle weight)
must be deducted.
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 79
Driving your vehicle
805
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rat-
ing)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
JD eng 5.qxp 7/17/2012 10:44 AM Page 80
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly. . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire). . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Wheel nut tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . . 6-17
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Components of the Tire Mobility Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Producing the tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit. . . . . . 6-21
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-23
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Towing service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Removable towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Triangle reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Tire pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 1
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Press the flasher switch with the ignition
switch in any position. The flasher switch
is located in the center facia switch
panel. All turn signal lights will flash
simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• The hazard warning flasher should
always be on while the vehicle is being
towed.
OJD042089
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 2
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(Second) or 3(Third)
gear and then turning the starter with-
out depressing the clutch pedal.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down while
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle does not start, we recommend
that you consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 3
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position, check all connectors at
ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an author-
ized Kia dealer.
WARNING
If the engine does not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter (if equipped) to
be overloaded and create a fire haz-
ard.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 4
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
■ Engine compartment
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 5
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
✽✽
NOTICE
If the battery is discharged, the engine
can be started using a battery of anoth-
er vehicle and two jumper cables. Only
use jumper cables with fully insulated
clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked. Make
sure that there is no contact between
the bodywork of the two vehicles; oth-
erwise, there is the danger of short cir-
cuits.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable from
the negative terminal of the booster
battery to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to overheat
and crack, releasing battery acid.
CAUTION - AGM battery
(if equipped)
• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-
teries are maintenance-free and
we recommend that the AGM bat-
teries be serviced by an author-
ized Kia dealer. For charging your
AGM battery, use only fully auto-
matic battery chargers that are
specially developed for AGM bat-
teries.
• When replacing the AGM battery,
we recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on
top of the battery. This may cause
leaks of internal electrolyte that
could result in severe injury.
• If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG func-
tion, the battery sensor needs to
be calibrated for approximately 4
hours with the ignition off.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 6
67
What to do in an emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery. If the
first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making
another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem. Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started. Follow
the directions in this section for jump-
starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 7
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the hood, stop the engine. Do not
open the hood until the coolant has
stopped running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss of
engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we recom-
mend that you call an authorized Kia
dealer.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, we recom-
mend that you call an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to blow out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 8
69
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly and fasten the jack screw
fully.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OJD062001
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
(Continued)
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 9
What to do in an emergency
106
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt (1)
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OGD061004
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OED066033
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 10
611
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OJD062003
OJD062004
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 11
What to do in an emergency
126
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OJD062002 OJD062005
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 12
613
What to do in an emergency
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING
• Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle
them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury.
• Before putting the wheel into
place, be sure that there is
nothing on the hub or wheel
(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the
hub. If there is, remove it. If
the contact of the mounting
surface between the wheel
and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
losing control of the vehicle.
This may cause serious injury
or death.
OGD061013
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 13
What to do in an emergency
146
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” in
section 8.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 14
615
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare tire
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough to avoid all hazards. Any
road hazard, such as a pothole or
debris, could seriously damage the
compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at the speed
over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
original tire should be repaired
or replaced as soon as possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 15
What to do in an emergency
166
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 16
617
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
Please read the instructions before
using the Tire Mobility Kit.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
Introduction
With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tire
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tire caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tire. After you ensure that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a vehicle
or tire dealer to have the tire
replaced.
It is possible that some tires, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely. Air pressure loss in the
tire may adversely affect tire per-
formance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use. The Tire Mobility Kit is not
designed or intended as a perma-
nent tire repair method and is to be
used for one tire only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably. Read
the section "Notes on the safe use of
the Tire Mobility Kit".
OJD062011
OYN069018
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 17
What to do in an emergency
186
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
WARNING
Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
a tire is severely damaged by
driving run flat or with insuffi-
cient air pressure. Only punc-
tured areas located within the
tread region of the tire can be
sealed using the Tire Mobility Kit.
Damage to the sidewall must
not be repaired due to safety
reasons.
Components of the Tire Mobility Kit
OAM060015L
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 18
619
What to do in an emergency
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tire inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tire inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Using the Tire Mobility Kit
1. Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
1) Shake the sealant bottle.
2) Screw connection hose 9 onto the
connector of the sealant bottle.
3) Ensure that button 8 on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4) Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5) Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor so that
the bottle is upright.
6) Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
8) With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it
run for approximately 3 minutes to fill
the sealant. The inflation pressure of
the tire after filling is unimportant.
OYN069018
WARNING
Before using the Tire Mobility Kit,
follow the instructions on the
sealant bottle.
Remove the label with the speed
restriction from the sealant bottle
and apply it to the steering wheel.
Please note the expiry date on the
sealant bottle.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 19
What to do in an emergency
206
9) Switch off the compressor.
10) Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tire valve.
Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
age location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approximately 3
km (2 miles) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tire.
Producing the tire inflation pres-
sure
1) After driving approximately 3 km
(2 miles), stop at a suitable loca-
tion.
2) Connect connection hose 9 of the
compressor directly to the tire
valve.
3) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
4) Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
220 kPa (32 psi). With the ignition
switched on, proceed as follows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if the
engine is left running in a poorly
ventilated or unventilated loca-
tion (such as inside a building).
WARNING
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a speed of 80
km/h (50 mph). If possible, do
not fall below a speed of 20
km/h (12 mph).
While driving, if you experience
any unusual vibration, ride dis-
turbance or noise, reduce your
speed and drive with caution
until you can safely pull off of
the side of the road.
Call for road side service or tow-
ing.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 20
621
What to do in an emergency
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
Notes on the safe use of the Tire
Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tire Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic. Place your warning triangle
in a prominent place to make pass-
ing vehicles aware of your location.
• To be sure your vehicle won't
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tires. Do not use on motorcycles,
bicycles or any other type of tires.
• Do not remove any foreign objects-
such as nails or screws -that have
penetrated the tire.
• Before using the Tire Mobility Kit,
read the precautionary advice
printed on the sealant bottle!
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
unattended while it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
30°C (-22°F).
• Do not use the sealing compound
after its expiration date which can
be found on the label of the bottle.
• Keep away from children.
WARNING
The tire inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
CAUTION
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then
repeat steps 1 to 4.
Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may
be ineffectual for tire damage
larger than approximately 4 mm
(0.16 in). We recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia
dealer if the tire cannot be made
roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
WARNING
Have your tire repaired as soon
as possible. The tire may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the TMK.
CAUTION
The Tire Mobility Kit is a tempo-
rary fix to the tire and we rec-
ommend that the tire be inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 21
What to do in an emergency
226
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size (for 15´´, 16´´ wheel)
Compressor: 170 x 150 x 60 mm
(6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.)
Sealant bottle: 85 x 77 ø mm
(3.3 x 3.0 ø in.)
Compressor weight:
0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
Sealant volume:
200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)
Size (for 17´´ wheel)
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
❈ Sealing compound and spare
parts can be obtained and
replaced at an authorized vehicle
or tire dealer. Empty sealing com-
pound bottles may be disposed of
at home. Liquid residue from the
sealing compound should be dis-
posed of by your vehicle or tire
dealer or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulations.
CAUTION -TPMS
(if equipped)
When using Tire Mobility Kit, the
tire sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. After using the
Tire Mobility Kit, we recommend
that the tire pressure sensor be
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 22
623
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the instrument panel
display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the TPMS malfunction
indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intend-
ed.
OJD062006
OJD042144
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 23
What to do in an emergency
246
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator do
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
Low tire pressure posi-
tion telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tire pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with a
spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replaceing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, one of the follow-
ing will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tire equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
while driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tire equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
JD eng 6.QXP 7/26/2012 5:57 PM Page 24
625
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer to
determine the cause of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 25
What to do in an emergency
266
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replaceing the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, one of the follow-
ing will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tire equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
while driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tire equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by Kia.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 26
627
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by Kia if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
The liquid sealant can damage
the tire pressure sensors.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 27
What to do in an emergency
286
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck
service. Proper lifting and towing proce-
dures are necessary to prevent damage
to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend taking your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer by loading the
vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OED066011
OED066012
dolly
OED066014
OED066013
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:47 AM Page 28
629
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate/trunk, and remove
the towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OJD062008
■ Rear (5door)
OJD062012
■ Rear (wagon)
■ Front
OJD062009
OJD062010
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:48 AM Page 29
What to do in an emergency
306
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-
ditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should com-
municate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. We recommend
that you contact an authorized
Kia dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:48 AM Page 30
631
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
OXM069009
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:48 AM Page 31
What to do in an emergency
326
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the follow-
ing steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured per-
son.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emer-
gencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any prob-
lems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-to-
day use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of nor-
mal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pres-
sure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the speci-
fied pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
JD eng 6.QXP 7/17/2012 10:48 AM Page 32
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Engine compartment precautions (Diesel engine). . . 7-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• For Europe, Except Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Except Russia, for Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-32
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Parking brake - hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fuel filter (for Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Draining water from fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Extracting air from the fuel filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Battery capacity label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . . 7-53
• Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 1
• Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
• Headlight and front fog light aiming (for Europe) . . 7-87
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-96
• License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
• Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
7
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 2
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OJD072001/OJD072002
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
3. Positive battery terminal
4. Negative battery terminal
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
■■
Gasoline engine - GDI
■■
Gasoline engine - MPI
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 3
Maintenance
47
OJD072003
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
3. Positive battery terminal
4. Negative battery terminal
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
11. Fuel filter
■■
Diesel engine
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 4
75
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend in general that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer. You should retain documents
that show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule.You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport. Repairs and
adjustments required as a result of
improper maintenance or a lack of
required maintenance are not covered
when your vehicle is covered by warranty.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 5
Maintenance
67
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
• The injector operates at high voltage
(maximum 200v). Therefore, the follow-
ing accidents may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from the
operating injector may cause the arti-
ficial heart pacemaker to malfunction.
• Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room while the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
while the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
while the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine while the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 6
77
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
We recommend that the following lists
are vehicle checks and inspections that
should be performed by the owner or an
authorized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe, depend-
able operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recommend
that you consult an authorized Kia deal-
er.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
• Check the radiator and condenser.
Check if the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked
with leaves, dirt or insects etc.
If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, we recommend that you contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle/double
clutch transmission P (Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning
system during or after use is normal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 7
Maintenance
87
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 8
79
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 9
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe mainte-
nance schedule.
*
3
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil
and engine oil filter every 20,000 km or 12 months.
*
4
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil
and filter every 15,000 km for MPI engine and replace
engine oil and filter every 10,000 km for GDI engine.
*
5
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and main-
tained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
*
6
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and we recommanded that you consult an authorized
Kia dealer for details.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately
regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommanded
that you consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*
8
: Manual transaxle and double clutch transmission fluid
should be changed anytime they have been submerged in
water.
*
9
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if
necessary correct or replace.
*
10
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
11
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. We recommended that the system
should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
*
12
: If good quality gasolines that meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 10
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 11
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline - Nickel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 12
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Gasoline) *
11
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 13
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline - Nickel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 14
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 60 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 60 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Replace spark plug (Gasoline - Iridium)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 15
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 144 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Gasoline) *
11
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline - Nickel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 16
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 168 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Replace coolant *
10
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 17
Maintenance
187
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 192 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
(240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline) *
1
*
4
*
5
(240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline - Nickel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Replace coolant *
10
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 18
719
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K, L
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
C, E
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Double clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Gasoline *
1
Diesel *
2
*
1
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 7,500 km or 6 months for MPI engine and 5,000 km or 6
months for GDI engine.
*
2
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 10,000 km or 6 months.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 19
Maintenance
207
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or
in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather
above 32 °C (90 °F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving in very cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Disc brakes and pads,
calipers and rotors
I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake (Hand type) I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, G, H
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
C, E, G
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 20
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and
if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and main-
tained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
*
4
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently.
If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of main-
tenance schedule and we recommand that you consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. We recommended that the system
should be checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommand
that you consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
9
: If good quality gasolines that meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 21
Maintenance
227
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 22
723
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 23
Maintenance
247
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 24
725
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical systems
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filler cap (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Replace spark plug (Gasoline - Nickel)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 25
Maintenance
267
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 26
727
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
6
(Every 95,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months *
5
)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 27
Maintenance
287
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 28
729
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Gasoline) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filler cap (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Gasoline, Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap (Gasoline)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Gasoline, if equipped)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Gasoline - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter (Gasoline) *
7
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Replace spark plug (Gasoline - Nickel)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gasoline - Iridium) *
5
(Every 160,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120months)
❑ Replace coolant *
8
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months *
5
)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Gasoline) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 29
Maintenance
307
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
Gasoline
- MPI
Except Middle
East
R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
For Middle East R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Gasoline - GDI R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
Diesel
For Russia R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Except Russia R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 30
731
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle tow-
ing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
L : Driving in very cold weather
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake (Hand type) I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E, G
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 31
Maintenance
327
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,
cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation
and replace if necessary. Drive belts
should be checked periodically for proper
tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. We recommend that
the fuel filter be replaced by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. We
recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses
and connections be replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move more than 30cm closer to
the ECU or wiring harness within
the engine room while engine is
running, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 32
733
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner filter
be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for gasoline engine)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
We recommend that the valve clearance
be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Double clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the double clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, we recommend
that the system be serviced by an author-
ized Kia dealer in accordance to the
maintenance schedule.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 33
Maintenance
347
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the Kia
web site.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the EPB actuator, wiring
and connectors.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 34
735
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
OGDE071003
■ Gasoline engine
OGD071004
■ Diesel engine
OGD071005
■ Gasoline engine
OGD071006
■ Diesel engine
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 35
Maintenance
367
Changing the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil and
filter be replaced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 36
737
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least once
a year, at the beginning of the winter sea-
son, and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 37
Maintenance
387
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level
to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent
coolant refill is required, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
OGD071007
■ Gasoline engine
OGD071008
■ Diesel engine
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 38
739
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
OMD072005K-1
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 39
Maintenance
407
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OGD071009
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 40
741
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid is
not available. However, use washer sol-
vent with antifreeze characteristics in
cold climates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
OGD071010
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windshield washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
PARKING BRAKE - HAND TYPE
OJD052010
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 41
Maintenance
427
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
we recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Extracting air from the fuel filter
If you drive until you have no fuel left or if
you replace the fuel filter, be sure to
extract air from the fuel system as it
makes it difficult to start the engine.
1. Pump up and down(1) approximately
50 times until the pump is hard.
2. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
3. Pump up and down(1) approximately
15 times.
4. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
5. Pump up and down(1) approximately 5
times.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Use cloths when you extract air so that
the fuel is not sprayed around.
• Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or
the injection pump before starting the
engine to prevent fire.
• Finally, check each part if the fuel is
leaking.
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
OGDE071011
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:56 AM Page 42
743
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OMD070011
OMD070010 OMD070012
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 43
Maintenance
447
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized Kia dealer.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 44
745
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the main-
tenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
2. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
OJD072013OJD072012
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 45
Maintenance
467
3. Remove the cover while pressing the
lock on both side of the cover and
remove the climate control air filter.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OVG079016OJD072014
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 46
747
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 47
Maintenance
487
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift up
the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
OHM078059
OSBL071001
OSBL071003
OSBL071002
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 48
749
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OGD071041
OGD071042
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 49
Maintenance
507
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
OGD071015
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Pb
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 50
751
Maintenance
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
(see the example)
1. CMF65L-BCI : The Kia model name of
battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in amperes
by EN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
(Continued)
The battery contains lead.
Do not dispose of it after
use. Please return the bat-
tery to an authorized Kia
dealer to be recycled.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unauthorized
devices.
OJD072039
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
(Continued)
Example
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 51
Maintenance
527
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery termi-
nal.
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 52
753
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OJD082005
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 53
Maintenance
547
WARNING - Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 54
755
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You can not tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling, loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire. Kia
recommends that you check
the spare every time you
check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 55
Maintenance
567
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
■ Without a spare tire
■ With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
■ Directional tires (if equipped)
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 56
757
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Replacing
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 57
Maintenance
587
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 58
759
Maintenance
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
195/65R15 91H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
195 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 59
Maintenance
607
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX15
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designa-
tion on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
3. Checking tire life
(TIN : Tire Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1612 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2012.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 60
761
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 61
Maintenance
627
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 62
763
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
others in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and we recommend
that you consult an authorized Kia deal-
er.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse type for higher amperage
ratings.
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse type
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
ORB072110/ODM072020
Normal
Blown
■ Battery fuse terminal
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 63
Maintenance
647
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights, fog lights, turn signal
lights, position lights or interior lights do
not work and there is nothing wrong with
the bulbs, we recommend that you con-
sult with an authorized Kia dealer.
OJD072016
OGD071017
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult with an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:57 AM Page 64
765
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF posi-
tion, some items such as audio and digi-
tal clock must be reset and transmitter
(or smart key) may not work properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for pro-
longed periods more than 1 month,
move the fuse switch to the OFF position
to prevent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-
ing the tap and pulling up.
OGD071019
OGD071021
Diesel only
OJD072017
CAUTION
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be worn out.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 65
Maintenance
667
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse or main fuse is blown,
we recommend that you consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
OJD072018
OGD071020
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 66
767
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inner fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
✽
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OJD072019
OJD072020
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 67
Maintenance
687
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
1 30A
DRV
P/SEAT DRV
4WAY : Driver Lumbar Support Switch
6WAY : Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
2 25A H/LP WASHER ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay)
3 25A
RH
P/WDW RH
Power Window Relay RH, Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module,
Rear Safety Power Window Module RH
4 10A T/GATE OPEN Tail Gate Relay
5 25A
LH
P/WDW LH
Power Window Relay LH, Driver/Passenger Safety Power
Window Module, Rear Safety Power Window Module LH
6 20A DR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Dead Lock Relay
7 20A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
8 20A
POWER
OUTLET2
POWER
OUTLET 2
Cigarette Lighter, Rear Power Outlet
9 20A
PASS
P/SEAT ASS Passenger Lumbar Support Switch
10 15A
RR
RR WIPER ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor
11 7.5A
MODULE
3
MODULE 3 Auto Light & Photo Sensor, AT lever (Shift Lock), Hazard Switch
12 15A
FRT
S/HEATER FRT Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
13 10A
ACC
ACC
A/V & Navigation Head Unit (W/O ISG), Audio (W/O ISG), DC-DC Convertor (With ISG),
Digital Clock, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Outside Mirror Switch, Outside Mirror
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 68
769
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
14 7.5A A/CON Cluster Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Blower Relay, PTC Relay
15 7.5A
IG2
IG2
ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay), Rain Sensor, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Panorama Sunroof, Smart, Key Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
Driver Seat Warmer Module
16 10A HTD MIRR Driver/Passenger Outside Mirror, ECU, A/C Control Module
17 7.5A
INTERIOR
LAMP
Glove Box Lamp, Luggage Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp,
Overhead Console Lamp
18 7.5A
2
PDM 2 Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
19 7.5A B/HORN ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
20 20A SUNROOF Panorama Sunroof
21 10A
MODULE
2
MODULE 2
Electric Parking Brake Module, DC-DC Convertor (With ISG),
Head Lamp Leveling Device Switch, A/C Control Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor,
Smart Parking Assist Control Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, ATM Shift Lever IND.,
Center Facia Switch, Crash Pad Lower Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
Driver IMS Module
22 15A HTD STRG Steering Wheel Heater
23 20A
IG1
IG1 E/R Fuse & Relay Box (ECU4, B/UP LAMP, ABS3, TCU2 FUSE)
24 25A
FRT
WIPER Wiper Relay , ICM Relay Box (Rain Sensor Relay), Front Wiper Motor
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 69
Maintenance
707
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
25 7.5A
MEMOR
Y
2
MEMORY 2 Immobilizer Module (W/O Smart Key)
26 7.5A
MEMOR
Y
1
MEMORY 1
Driver/Passenger Outside Mirror (Folding), Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle,
Driver IMS Module, Center Facia Switch, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module,
BCM, A/C Control Module, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay),
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Rear Parking Assist Switch,
Data Link Connector, Buzzer
27 10A
BRAKE
SWITCH
BRAKE
SWITCH
Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
28 7.5A
CLUSTER
CLUSTER Instrument Cluster, Digital Clock
29 7.5A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
30 7.5A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
31 7.5A START
Start Relay, ECU, Ignition Lock Switch, Transaxle Range Switch,
TCU, Smart Key Control Module
32 15A
MULTI
MEDIA
MULTI MEDIA
A/V & Navigation Head Unit (W/O ISG), Audio (W/O ISG),
DC-DC Convertor (With ISG), Digital Clock
33 10A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
34 25A
1
PDM 1 Smart Key Control Module
35 15A
POWER
OUTLET1
P/OUTLET 1 Front Power Outlet
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 70
771
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
36 7.5A
IND
A/BAG IND Instrument Cluster
37 10A
MODULE
1
MODULE 1
BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, AT Lever,
Audio, Adaptive Front Lighting Module, LDWS Unit
38 15A A/BAG SRS Control Module
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 71
Maintenance
727
Engine compartment fuse panel
(for gasoline engine)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OGD071023
OJD072021
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 72
773
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(for diesel engine)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OGD071023
OJD072022
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 73
Maintenance
747
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
80A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
60A
B+1
B+1
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS1 (H/LAMP HI LH,H/LAMP LOW LH, FRT TURN LH,
POSITION LAMP LH), IPS2 (STATIC BENDING LAMP LH/RH, DRL LH/RH)
40A
1
ABS1 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module
40A
2
ABS2 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A
IG2
IG2
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, START RELAY
With Smart Key : IG2 RELAY, START RELAY
60A
PTC
PTC PTC Relay
60A
B+2
B+2
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS3 (H/LAMP HI RH,H/LAMP LOW RH, FRT TURN RH,POSITION
LAMP RH), IPS4 (FRT FOG LAMP LH/RH, REAR TURN LH/RH), IPS5 (REAR FOG LAMP,
INT TAIL LAMP)
FUSE
40A
RR
HTD
RR HTD RR HTD RELAY , RR HTD
40A
IG1
IG1
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : IG1 RELAY, ACC RELAY,
INNER FUSE PANEL (FUSE No. - 8/13/21/23/28/29/35/36/37/38)
40A
DCT2
DCT2 TCU (DCT)
30A
1
EPB1 Electric Parking Brake Module
30A
2
EPB2 Electric Parking Brake Module
40A C/FAN C/FAN LO RELAY, C/FAN HI RELAY
Engine compartment main fuse panel (for gasoline engine)
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 74
775
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
15A DEICER ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
15A
STOP
LAMP
STOP LAMP Stop Signal Electronic Relay , HAC RELAY
20A
5
TCU1 TCU
40A
DCT1
DCT1 TCU (DCT)
40A
7
EMS EMS Box (FUSE No. - 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9)
50A
B+3
B+3 Inner Fuse Panel (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse No. - 6/19/20/17/32/26/25)
50A BLOWER BLOWER RELAY
10A A/CON A/C Control Module
10A WIPER FRT ECU, Rain Sensor
10A
B/UP
LAMP
B/UP LP M/T : Back-up Lamp Switch, A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
15A
4
ECU4 Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module, ECU
10A
3
ABS3 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Yaw Rate Sensor, HAC, ESS RELAY
15A
6
TCU2 Transaxle Range Switch, TCU, Stop Lamp Switch
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 75
Maintenance
767
Symbol Relay Name Type
LO
COOLING FAN LOW RELAY PLUG MICRO
HI
COOLING FAN HIGH RELAY PLUG MICRO
ESS
ESS RELAY PLUG MICRO
BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO
RR
HTD
REAR DEFOGGER RELAY PLUG MICRO
4 (IG2)
IG2 RELAY PLUG MICRO
FRT WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO
3 (IG1)
IG1 RELAY PLUG MICRO
1
START RELAY PLUG MICRO
2 (ACC)
ACC RELAY PLUG MICRO
PTC
PTC RELAY PLUG MINI
HAC
HAC RELAY PLUG MICRO
Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Relay Name
15A
F/PUM
P
F/PUMP FUEL PUMP RELAY
15A
3
ECU3 ECU
15A HORN Horn Relay
10A
INJECTO
R
INJECTOR
INJECTOR, ECU,
FUEL PUMP RELAY
10A
2
ECU2 ECU
20A
IGN
COIL
IGN COIL
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4,
Condenser
10A
2
SENSOR2
E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(COOLING LOW RELAY),
Oil Control Valve #1/#2
20A
1
ECU1 ECU
10A
8
SENSOR1
Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN),
Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 76
777
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
80A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
60A
B+1
B+1
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS1 (H/LAMP HI LH,H/LAMP LOW LH, FRT TURN LH, POSITION LAMP LH),
IPS2 (STATIC BENDING LAMP LH/RH, DRL LH/RH)
40A
1
ABS1 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module
40A
2
ABS2 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A
IG2
IG2
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, START RELAY
With Smart Key
: IG2 RELAY, START RELAY, INNER FUSE PANEL (
Fuse No. -
14/24/22/15/10)
60A
B+2
B+2
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS3 (H/LAMP HI RH,H/LAMP LOW RH, FRT TURN RH,
POSITION LAMP RH), IPS4 (FRT FOG LAMP LH/RH, REAR TURN LH/RH),
IPS5 (REAR FOG LAMP, INT TAIL LAMP)
FUSE
40A
RR
HTD
RR HTD RR HTD RELAY , RR HTD
40A
IG1
IG1
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : IG1 RELAY, ACC RELAY, INNER FUSE PANEL (Fuse No. - 38/36/21/37/
23/29/28, Fuse No. - 13/8/35)
30A
1
EPB1 Electric Parking Brake Module
30A
2
EPB2 Electric Parking Brake Module
50A C/FAN C/FAN LO RELAY, C/FAN HI RELAY
15A DEICER ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
15A
STOP
LAMP
STOP LAMP Stop Signal Electronic Relay, HAC RELAY
Engine compartment main fuse panel (for diesel engine)
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 77
Maintenance
787
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
20A
5
TCU1 TCU
40A
FUEL
HEATER
FUEL HEATER RELAY
40A
7
EMS EMS BOX (Fuse No. - 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9)
50A
B+3
B+3 Inner Fuse Panel (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse No. - 6/19/20/17/32/26/25)
50A BLOWER BLOWER RELAY
10A A/CON A/C Control Module
10A WIPER FRT ECU, Rain Sensor
10A
B/UP
LAMP
B/UP LP M/T : Back-up Lamp Switch, A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
15A
4
ECU4
Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module, ECU, Air Flow Sensor,
Fuel Water Sensor
10A
3
ABS3 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Yaw Rate Sensor, HAC, ESS RELAY
15A
6
TCU2 Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 78
779
Maintenance
Symbol Relay Name Type
LO
COOLING FAN LOW RELAY PLUG MICRO
HI
COOLING FAN HIGH RELAY PLUG MICRO
ESS
ESS RELAY PLUG MICRO
BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO
RR
HTD
REAR DEFOGGER RELAY PLUG MICRO
4 (IG2)
IG2 RELAY PLUG MICRO
FRT WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO
3 (IG1)
IG1 RELAY PLUG MICRO
1
START RELAY PLUG MICRO
2 (ACC)
ACC RELAY PLUG MICRO
FUEL HEATER RELAY PLUG MINI
HAC
HAC RELAY PLUG MICRO
Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Relay Name
15A
SPARE
SPARE -
15A HORN HORN RELAY
10A
2
ECU2
Oil Level Sensor, Fuel
Pressure Control Valve
20A
SPARE
SPARE -
10A
9
SENSOR2
E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(COOLING FAN LOW RELAY),
Lambda Sensor (D4FB),
Stop Lamp Switch
20A
1
ECU1 ECU
10A
8
SENSOR1
DSL Box (PTC1 RELAY,
GLOW RELAY),
VGT Control Sensor,
Camshaft Position Sensor,
Electrical EGR Valve
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:58 AM Page 79
Maintenance
807
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Diesel engine only)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
80A Glow Relay
PTC 1 50A PTC 1 Relay
PTC 2 50A PTC 2 Relay
PTC 3 50A PTC 3 Relay
OGDE071059
OGD071024
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 80
781
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
After driving in heavy rain or washing
the vehicle, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear foggy. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle during
rain and does not indicate a problem
with your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position (smart key:
turn off the engine) and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or getting an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you do not have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
we recommend that you consult an
authorized Kia dealer. In many
cases, it is difficult to replace vehi-
cle light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb. This
is especially true if you have to
remove the headlight assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 81
Maintenance
827
Front light replacement
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Static bending light (if equipped)
(4) Position light
(5) Position light / Daytime running light
(DRL, LED Type) (if equipped)
(6) Headlight (High)
(7) Daytime running light (DRL, Bulb type)
(if equipped)
(8) Front fog light (if equipped)
1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Disconnect the power connector front
the back of the headlight assembly.
If you can reach the bulb without remov-
ing the headlight assembly, you do not
need to do step 4 to 7.
4. Loosen the retaining bolts on the front
bumper .
- Front bumper upper board : 4 EA
- Front bumper cover : 1 EA
OJD072052
OJD072026
■ Type A
■ Type B
OJD072053
OJD072054
Diesel only
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 82
783
Maintenance
5. Pull out the front bumper cover.
6. Loosen the retaining bolt .
7. Pull out the headlight assembly from
the body of the vehicle.
Headlight (High, 1) and static bending
light (2, if equipped)
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
section.
8. Remove the cover by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
9. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
10. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward.
11. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
12. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
OJD072041
OJD072055
OJD072062
OJD072056
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 83
Maintenance
847
13. Connect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
14. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
15. Connect the power connector to the
back of the headlight assembly.
Position light (3, bulb type)
Follow the steps 1 to 9 from the previous
page.
10. Pull out the socket from the assembly.
11. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
12. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
13. Install the socket into the assembly.
14. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlight (Low, Non-HID Type)
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
page.
8. Remove the cover by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
9. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
10. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
11. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
12. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
13. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
OJD072042
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 84
785
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Headlight (Low, HID type),
Position light/DRL (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance
vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are esti-
mated by the manufacturer to last twice
as long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replacement
at some point in the life of the vehicle.
Cycling the headlamps on and off more
than typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent lamps.
If a headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced.
HID lighting components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen bulbs
thus have higher replacement cost.
❈❈
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is asym-
metric. If you go abroad to a country with
opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric
part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To
prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb)
due to electric shock danger. If the
low beam (XENON bulb) is not
working, we recommend that the
system be checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 85
Maintenance
867
Turn signal light
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
page.
8. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
9. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
10. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
11. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be operated
only when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb is damaged or cracked,
replace it immediately and carefully
dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OJD072044
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 86
787
Maintenance
Front fog light, Daytime running light
(if equipped)
1. Pull the wheel guard down by rotating
the screws.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
Headlight and front fog light aim-
ing (for Europe)
Headlight aiming
Without AFLS
1. Inflate the tires to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tire,
and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
ters) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through center of head
lamps) on the screen.
OJD072027
OJD072050
■ Fog light
■ Fog light+DRL
■ DRL
OJD072061/OJD072059/OJD072060
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 87
Maintenance
887
4. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low beam up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
To aim the high beam up or down, turn
the driver (3) clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
With AFLS
1. Turn off the engine
2. Turn the light switch to the low beam
position.
3. Position the tires straight ahead with
the steering wheel.
4. Turn on the engine.
5. Inflate the tires to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tire,
and tools.
6. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
7. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
ters) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through center of head
lamps) on the screen.
8. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
9. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low beam up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise or
counterclockwise. To aim the high
beam up or down, turn the driver (3)
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Front fog light aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as the
same manner of the head lamps aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery nor-
mal condition, aim the front fog lamps. To
aim the front fog lamp up or down, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
OJD072028
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 10:59 AM Page 88
789
Maintenance
Vehicle
condition
H1
H2
H3
W1
W2
W3
Without
AFLS
With AFLS With DRL
Without
DRL
Without
AFLS
With AFLS With DRL
Without
DRL
Without
driver
689
(27.1)
687
(27.0)
646
(25.4)
340
(13.4)
342
(13.5)
1,300
(51.2)
1,299
(51.1)
1,049
(41.3)
1,316
(51.8)
1,306
(51.4)
With driver
680
(26.8)
678
(26.7)
637
(25.1)
331
(13.0)
333
(13.1)
Unit: mm (in)
Aiming point
OJD072051
< Ground Height >
< Distance between lamps >
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fo
g
lam
p
bulbs centers
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 89
Maintenance
907
OMD051054L
Head lamp low beam (driver’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
■ Based on 10m screen
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 90
791
Maintenance
OMD051055L
Head lamp low beam (front passenger’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
■ Based on 10m screen
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 91
Maintenance
927
OGDE071056-JD
Front fog light
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
■ Based on 10m screen
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 92
793
Maintenance
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Rear turn signal light
(2) Stop/tail light
(3) Back-up light (for 5Door)
(4) Tail light or stop/tail light (for LED type)
(5) Rear fog light (for 5Door)
Rear fog light (Driver’s side) or
back-up light (Passenger’s side),
(for wagon)
❈ The actual rear combination lamp shape in
the vehicle may differ from illustration.
Outside light
Rear turn signal light and stop/tail light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
OJD072045OJD072029
OJD072030
OJD072063
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD eng 7.QXP 7/21/2012 1:20 PM Page 93
Maintenance
947
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Stop and tail light or tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Inside light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
OJD072047
OJD072057
OJD072064
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Turn signal light
Stop/taillight
Turn signal light
Stop/tail light
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 94
795
Maintenance
❈ These below steps (4~6) only for the 5 Door
vehicle.
4. Loosen the retaining nuts.
5. Disconnect the power connector.
6. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
❈ Rear fog light is located only on the driver’s
side (for wagon)
Tail light or tail and stop light (Bulb type)
7. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
8. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
9. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
10. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
11. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OJD072048
OJD072058
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Rear fog light
Back up light
Stop light
OJD072065
RR
RR
ee
ee
aa
aa
rr
rr
ff
ff
oo
oo
gg
gg
//
//
BB
BB
aa
aa
cc
cc
kk
kk
uu
uu
pp
pp
ll
ll
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
TT
TT
aa
aa
ii
ii
ll
ll
ll
ll
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 95
Maintenance
967
Back-up light and rear fog light
(if equipped)
7. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
8. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
10. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots on the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
11. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle
❈ Rear fog light is located only on the
driver’s side. (for wagon)
Tail light or stop and tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the bulb assembly by press-
ing the tabs.
3. Remove the socket by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb assembly securely
with the retaining screws.
OJD072037 OGD071046
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:00 AM Page 96
797
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp, vanity mirror lamp,
room lamp, luggage room lamp
and glove box lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
■ Map lamp
■ Glove box lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Luggage room lamp
■ Room lamp
OGD071039/OTD079035/OJD072043/OJD072038/OGDE071057/OGD071038
--
--
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
--
--
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
WARNING
Prior to working on the interior
lights, ensure that the light is off to
avoid burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirt or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 97
Maintenance
987
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Ensure
drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors and rocker panels are kept clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted sur-
faces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 98
799
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 99
Maintenance
1007
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 100
7 101
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-
nance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produce cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 101
Maintenance
1027
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 102
7 103
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 103
Maintenance
1047
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized Kia dealer in accordance with the
maintenance schedule.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 104
7 105
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge or fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electric
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions following to
avoid CO poisoning.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 105
Maintenance
1067
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the cat-
alytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-
tem removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driv-
ing condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automati-
cally removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off.
Keep away from the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic, you may get
burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 106
7 107
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light contin-
ues to be blinked in spite of the proce-
dure, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you continue to drive with the malfunc-
tion indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam-
aged and white smoke can be emit-
ted.
JD eng 7.QXP 7/17/2012 11:01 AM Page 107
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Weight and volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 1
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS
Item
mm (in)
5 Door Wagon
Overall length 4,310 (169.7) 4,505 (177.4)
Overall width 1,780 (70.1) 1,780 (70.1)
Overall height
Except Russia 1,470 (57.9) 1,485 (58.5)
For Russia 1,480 (58.3) 1,495 (58.9)
Front tread
195/65R15 Steel wheel 1,563 (61.5) 1,563 (61.5)
205/55R16
Steel wheel 1,553 (61.1) 1,553 (61.1)
Aluminum wheel 1,555 (61.2) 1,555 (61.2)
225/45R17 Aluminum wheel 1,549 (61.0) 1,549 (61.0)
Rear tread
195/65R15 Steel wheel 1,571 (61.9) 1,571 (61.9)
205/55R16
Steel wheel 1,561 (61.5) 1,561 (61.5)
Aluminum wheel 1,563 (61.5) 1,563 (61.5)
225/45R17 Aluminum wheel 1,557 (61.3) 1,557 (61.3)
Wheelbase 2,650 (104.3)
ENGINE
Item Gasoline 1.4 Gasoline 1.6 Diesel 1.4
Diesel 1.6
Displacement cc
(cu. in)
1,396 (85.19) 1,591 (97.09) 1,396 (85.12) 1,582 (96.53)
Bore x Stroke mm
(in.)
77x74.99
(3.03x2.95)
77x85.44
(3.03x3.36)
75x79
(2.95x3.11)
77.2x84.5
(3.03x3.32)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
4, In-line
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 2
83
Specifications & Consumer information
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH R-1234yf)
WEIGHT AND VOLUME
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
Min. : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max. : Behind front seat to roof.
DCT : Double clutch transmission
Item
Weight or
Volume
Classification
Refrigerant 500±25g R-1234yf
Compressor lubricant 150±10cc PAG (FD46XG)
For vehicles equipped with R-1234yf * For vehicles equipped with R-134a *
Item
Weight or
Volume
Classification
Refrigerant 500±25g R-134a
Compressor lubricant 150±10cc PAG (FD46XG)
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied your vehicle at the label inside of hood. Refer to section 8 for more
detail location of air conditioning refrigerant label.
Item Gasoline 1.4L Gasoline 1.6L Diesel 1.4L Diesel 1.6L
Gross vehicle
weight
kg (lbs.)
M/T
5 Door 1,820 (4,012) 1,820 (4,012) 1,910 (4,211) 1,920 (4,211)
Wagon 1,820 (4,012) 1,820 (4,012) 1,910 (4,211) 1,920 (4,211)
A/T
5 Door - 1,850 (4,079) - 1,940 (4,277)
Wagon - 1,850 (4,079) - 1,940 (4,277)
DCT
5 Door - 1,840 (4,057) - -
Wagon - 1,850 (4,079) - -
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
5Door - Min. : 380 (13.42), Max. 1,318 (46.54)
Wagon - Min : 528 (18.65), Max. 1,642 (57.99)
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 3
Specifications & Consumer information
48
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
5 Door Wagon
Wattage Bulb type Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlights
Low
55 or 35
(AFLS with HID)
H7LL or D1S*
55 or 35
(AFLS with HID)
H7LL or D1S*
High 55 H7LL 55 H7LL
Static bending light* 55 H7LL 55 H7LL
Daytime running light 21/LED P21/5WXL/LED 21/LED P21/5WXL/LED
Front turn signal lights 21 PY21WLL 21 PY21WLL
Position lights 5/LED W5WLL/LED 5/LED W5WLL/LED
Side repeater lights 5 5W 5 5W
Front fog lights 35 H8L 21 P21WL
Rear
Rear fog light 21 P21WL 21 P21WL
Stop and tail lights 21/5 or LED P21/5WL or LED 21/5 or LED P21/5WL or LED
Rear turn signal lights 21 P21WL 21 P21WL
Tail light 5 or LED P21/5WL or LED 5 or LED P21WL or LED
Back-up lights 16 W16W 21 P21WL
High mounted stop light LED LED LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Room lamps 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON 5 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON 5 FESTOON
HID : High Intensity Discharge
AFLS : Adaptive Front-Lighting System
* : if equipped
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 4
85
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
*
1
: Load Index
*
2
: Speed Symbol
*
3
: For eco dynamics trim
Item Tire size
Wheel
size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure bar(psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut
torque Kgf·m
(lb·ft, N·m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI *
1
Kg SS *
2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size
tire
195/65R15*
3
6.0J×15 91 615 H 210
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
9~11 (65~79,
88~107)
195/65R15 6.0J×15 91 615 H 210
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
205/55R16 6.5J×16 91 615 H 210
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
225/45R17 7.0J×17 91 615 V 240
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
Compact
spare tire
T125/80D15 4.0T×15 95 690 M 130
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
T125/80D16 4.0T×16 97 730 M 130
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 5
Specifications & Consumer information
68
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Gasoline
Engine
1.4 MPI
3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)
For Europe
API Service SL or SM, ACEA A5 or above
Except Europe
API Service SM, ILSAC GF-4 or above
1.6 MPI
1.6 GDI
Diesel
Engine
with DPF *
3
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
ACEA C2 or C3
without DPF *
3
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
ACEA B4
Manual
transaxle fluid
Gasoline Engine
1.8 l ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~ 2.01US qt.)
HK MTF(SK),
HD MTF(H.K.SHELL),
Kia Genuine transaxle fluid (API GL-4, SAE 75W/85),
Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
Diesel
Engine
High
1.8 l ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~ 2.01US qt.)
Low
1.9 l ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
Automatic
transaxle fluid
Gasoline Engine
7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV
SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV
Kia genuine ATF SP-IV
Diesel Engine
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
Double clutch
transmission fluid
Gasoline Engine
1.9 l ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
HK SYN MTF(SK),
HD SYN MTF(H.K.SHELL),
GS PAO MTF (GS CALTEX),
Kia Genuine transaxle fluid (API GL-4, SAE 75W/85),
Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 6
87
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommends Engine oil (For Europe)
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
Gasoline Engine
5.7~5.8 l
(6.0~6.1 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Diesel Engine
6.7~6.9 l
(7.1~7.3 US qt.)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
53 l (14.0 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on 8-8 page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
Diesel Particulate Filter
Supplier
Product
Gasoline Engine Diesel Engine
Shell
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 7
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil
(For Europe)
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0W-40, 5W-20 *
1
,5W-30, 5W-40
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
2
(Except Europe)
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20*
3
, 5W-30
*
1
: If you use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20, replace engine oil and filter after
driving 15,000 km or 12 month with MPI engine (10,000 km or 6 month with GDI engine) in
normal condition and replace engine oil and engine oil filter after driving 7,500 km or 6 month
with MPI engine (5,000 km or 6 month with GDI engine) in severe condition.
*
2
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20,5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF 4 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
3
: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
Diesel Engine Oil
5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
0W-30
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 8
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehi-
cle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check the
number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
OJD082002
■ Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OBH088005N
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OJD082003
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 9
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
OJD082005
■ Gasoline engine
■ Diesel engine
OGDE081006
OGD081005
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:53 PM Page 10
811
Specifications & Consumer information
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part num-
ber, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
The refrigerant label is located on the
underside of the hood.
OHC081001
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
REFRIGERANT LABEL
OJD082001
JD eng 8.QXP 7/18/2012 12:54 PM Page 11
Index
I
I
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 1
Index
2
I
Active ECO system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-117
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Passenger’s front air bag ON indicator . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch . . . . . . . 3-50
Side impact air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Aming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Appearance care
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Armrest (Rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Auto defogging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Auto light/AFLS position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . 4-137
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Automatic transaxle / DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
DS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Sports mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Aux, USB and iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Barrier net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Battery replacement (Remote keyless entry) . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
A
B
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 2
I
3
Index
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Parking brakes (Hand type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle stability management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button . . . . . 5-9
Calender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Camera (Rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Capacities (Lubricants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Care
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Tire care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Chains
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134, 146, 7-45
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Compact spare tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Crankcase emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
C
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 3
Index
4
I
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Dashboard, see instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . 4-46
Dashboard, see instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . 4-59
Daytime running light (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Deadlocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Defogging (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Defroster (Rear window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Defrosting (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Displays, see instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . 4-46
Displays, see instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . 4-59
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Deadlocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Double clutch transmission shift indicator
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Double clutch transmission shift indicator
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Drinks holders, see cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Driver position memory system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
DS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Economical operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
E
D
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 4
I
5
Index
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine compartment panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine temperature gauge (Normal vision). . . . . . . 4-54
Engine temperature gauge (Super vision) . . . . . . . . 4-67
Engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Exhaust emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-32
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Exterior features
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Exterior overview(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Flat tire (with spare tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changing tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Fluid
Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fog light (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Fog light (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Fuel gauge (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Fuel gauge (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Engine compartment panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Inner panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Multi fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
F
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 5
Index
6
I
Gauge (Normal vision)
Engine temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Gauge (Super vision)
Engine temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Headrest(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Hight adjustment (seat belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Hill-start assist control (HAC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Icy road warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster . . . . . . . 1-6
Indicators and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Instrument cluster
LCD display information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Warning and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Instrument cluster (Normal vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator . . . . . 4-49
Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . 4-49
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Manual transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speed limiter indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
G
H
I
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 6
I
7
Index
Instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator . . . . . 4-62
Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . 4-62
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Manual transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speed limiter indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Inner panel fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Instrument panel illumination (Normal vision). . . . 4-47
Instrument panel illumination (Super vision) . . . . . 4-60
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Aux, USB and iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Barrier net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Cargo security screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Cup holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ISG (Idle stop and go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
K
J
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 7
Index
8
I
Label
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lane Departure Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Lane Departure Warning System Mode. . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
LCD display warnings and indicators
(instrument panel display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Calender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Icy road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Outside ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) . . . . . . . 5-59
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System). . . . . . . 4-117
Auto light/AFLS position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Daytime running light (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function. . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Position light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Rear fog light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Luggage side tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Lumbar support (Automatic Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar support (Manual seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-32
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
M
L
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 8
I
9
Index
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Manual transaxle shift indicator (Normal vision). . 4-48
Manual transaxle shift indicator (Super vision) . . . 4-61
Map lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Inside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Odometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Odometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Outside ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Parking brake-Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Passenger’s front air bag ON indicator . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch . . . . . . . . 3-50
Position light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
O
P
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 9
Index
10
I
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-93
Rear parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Rear window wiper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-53
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Recommends Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Remote keyless entry
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Replacement light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rocking the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Hight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Seat warmer(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Headrest(rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lumbar support (Automatic Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
R
S
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 10
I
11
Index
Lumbar support (Manual seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat warmer(front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Service mode (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Service mode (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Shopping bag holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart parking assist system (SPAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Spare tire
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Compact spare tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
SPAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Rocking the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Speed limit control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Speed limiter indicator (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speed limiter indicator (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speedometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Speedometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Sports mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start . . . . . . . 6-4
Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Luggage side tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Sunroof, see panorama sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 11
Index
12
I
Tachometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tachometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Theft-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 6-23
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53, 8-5
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Compact spare tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . 7-53
Tire care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Transaxle
Automatic transaxle/DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Double clutch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Trip computer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Trip computer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Lane Departure Warning System Mode . . . . . . . . 4-67
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
User Settings (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
User Settings (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Vehicle break-in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle stability management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
U
V
T
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 12
I
13
Index
Warning and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Weight/volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Wheel alignment and tire balance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Windshield defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Auto defogging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Windshield wipers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Front indshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Front windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
W
JD eng Index.qxp 7/21/2012 11:45 AM Page 13
kia, tthe ccompany
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturing company focused on building high-
quality vehicles at value prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with Service above your expectation and delight customer experience.
In our Kia dealerships you will experience our “Family-like Care”
promise, that creates feelings of warmth, hospitality and trust –
feelings of being looked after by people who care.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be
carried out.
This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you
may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your
specific Kia vehicle.
Enjoy your vehicle & experience Kia “Family-like Care” !
JD RHD FOREWORD.QXP 3/21/2012 4:53 PM Page 1
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty and Maintenance book that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle. Kia urges you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure
enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equip-
ment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obliga-
tion. If you have questions, we recommend to contact your authorised Kia dealer.
Kia assures you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2012 Kia Motors Slovakia s.r.o.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by
any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written author-
ization from Kia Motors Slovakia s.r.o..
FFoorreewwoorrdd
JD RHD FOREWORD.QXP 3/21/2012 4:53 PM Page 2
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications & Consumer information
Index
table of contents
JD RHD FOREWORD.QXP 3/21/2012 4:53 PM Page 3
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Petrol engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Petrol containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Use of MTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Biodiesel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster . . . . 1-6
1
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. Use the
index when looking for a specific area or
subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all
information in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGS, CAU-
TIONS, and NOTICES in this manual.
These were prepared to enhance your
personal safety.You should carefully read
and follow ALL procedures and recom-
mendations provided in these WARN-
INGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
Petrol engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded petrol
which complies with EN 228 and has an
octane rating of RON (Research Octane
Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91
or higher. You may use unleaded petrol
with an octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI
87-90 but it may result in slight perform-
ance reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 /
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 2
13
Introduction
Petrol containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol
(also known as grain alcohol), and petrol
or gasohol containing methanol (also
known as wood alcohol) are being mar-
keted along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded petrol.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
Use of MTBE
Kia recommends avoiding fuels contain-
ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)
over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%
weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapour lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control sys-
tem’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. We recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 3
Introduction
41
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good qual-
ity petrols meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality petrols including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/ 5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorised Kia dealer along
with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-
tives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limi-
tation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following tem-
perature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very care-
fully : If the engine stops through fuel fail-
ure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 4
15
Introduction
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-
els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding
7% with biodiesel will cause increased
wear or damage to the engine and fuel
system. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use of
non approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
CAUTION
Do not let any petrol or water enter
the tank. This would make it neces-
sary to drain it out and to bleed the
lines to avoid jamming the injection
pump and damaging the engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur) and
unspecified additives, it can cause
the DPF system to be damaged and
white smoke can be emitted.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petro-
leum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recom-
mended or approved by the vehi-
cle manufacturer.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 5
Introduction
61
* : if equipped
❈ For more detailed explanations, refer
to section 4, “Instrument cluster”.
Charging system warning light
Glow indicator (Diesel only)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel only)
Engine coolant temperature
warning light
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Light on indicator
Turn signal indicator
ABS warning light
Air bag warning light
Low fuel level warning light
Electronic stability control (ESC)
indicator
Electronic stability control
(ESC) OFF indicator
Immobiliser indicator
Low beam indicator*
Tailgate open warning light
Electronic power steering (EPS)
system warning light
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFLS) malfunction indicator*
AFLS
Front fog light indicator*
Rear fog light indicator*
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Electric parking brake (EPB)
malfunction indicator*
EPB
Active ECO indicator*
ECO
Auto stop for ISG system
indicator*
Cruise control indicator*
Cruise SET indicator*
Engine oil pressure warning
light
Malfunction indicator
Engine oil level warning light*
(Diesel only)
Low tyre pressure telltale*/
TPMS malfunction indicator*
Low windscreen washer fluid
level warning light*
JD RHD 1.QXP 3/21/2012 4:55 PM Page 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (FRONT)
1. Front removable towing hook .................6-29
2. Front windscreen wiper ........................4-118
3. Outside rearview mirror ..........................4-43
4. Door lock ................................................4-17
5. Head lamp ............................................4-111
6. Front fog lamp.......................................4-115
7. Bonnet ...................................................4-28
8. Tyre and wheel .......................................7-53
OJD012001R
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 2
23
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (REAR)
1. Roof antenna........................................4-169
2. Rear window defroster..........................4-126
3. Rear wiper ............................................4-121
4. Rear parking assist system ....................4-90
5. Child-protector rear door lock.................4-21
6. Fuel filler.................................................4-30
7. Rear towing hook....................................6-29
8. Rear combination lamp
9. Tailgate handle switch ...........................4-22
10. High mounted stop lamp
11. Rearview camera................................4-109
OJD012002
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Seat..........................................................3-2
2. Inside door handle ................................4-18
3. Power window switch ............................4-24
4. Power window lock switch......................4-26
5. Bonnet release lever ..............................4-28
6. Outside rearview mirror folding..............4-44
7. Outside rearview mirror control..............4-44
8. Headlight levelling device ....................4-116
9. Instrument panel illumination control
system..............................................4-47, 60
10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button ....5-15
11. Active ECO button ..............................5-32
12. Lane departure warning system button..5-59
13. Heated steering wheel button..............4-38
14. Light control/Turn signals ..................4-110
15. Steering wheel ....................................4-37
16. Wiper/Washer ....................................4-118
17. Manual transaxle shift lever
Automatic transaxle shift lever ....5-20/5-23
18. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ..4-38
19. Fuse box ..............................................7-63
OJD012003R
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 4
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OJD012004R
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Instrument cluster ........................4-46, 59
2. Horn ...................................................4-39
3. Steering wheel audio control............4-170
4. Cruise control switch /
Speed limiter switch...................5-51/5-56
5. Driver’s air bag ...................................3-48
6. Ignition switch or
ENGINE START/STOP button .......5-5/5-9
7. Hazard warning switch .....................4-109
8. Audio ................................................4-171
9. Seat warmer.......................................3-12
10. Central door lock switch ...................4-18
11. ESC OFF button...............................5-44
12. Climate control system ........4-127/4-136
13. Cigar lighter....................................4-154
14. Aux, USB and iPod port .................4-158
15. Power outlet ...................................4-157
16. Front passenger’s air bag ................3-48
17. Glove box .......................................4-152
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 5
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OJD072001R/OJD072002R
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-35
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-40
3. Positive battery terminal ....................7-50
4. Negative battery terminal ..................7-50
5. Fuse box............................................7-65
6. Air cleaner ........................................7-43
7. Radiator cap ......................................7-39
8. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-38
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-35
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-41
■■
Petrol engine - GDI
■■
Petrol engine - MPI
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:58 PM Page 6
27
Your vehicle at a glance
OJD072003R
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap ............................7-35
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ................7-40
3. Positive battery terminal ....................7-50
4. Negative battery terminal ..................7-50
5. Fuse box............................................7-65
6. Air cleaner ........................................7-43
7. Radiator cap ......................................7-39
8. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-38
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-35
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir ..7-41
11. Fuel filter ........................................7-42
■■
Diesel engine
JD RHD 2.QXP 7/21/2012 12:59 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
• Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Airbag-supplemental restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
• Air bag warning and indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
• SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Side impact air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Additional safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
3
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:04 PM Page 1
Safety system of your vehicle
23
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Lumbar support*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest adjustment
Front passenger seat
(7) Seat adjustment, forward/backward
(8) Seatback recliner
(9) Seat adjustment, height*
(10) Lumbar support*
(11) Seat warmer*
(12) Headrest adjustment
Rear seat
(13) Armrest*
(14) Headrest adjustment
(15) Split folding rear seat
* : if equipped
SEAT
OJD032001R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 2
33
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust seat
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
whilst maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. It is recom-
mended that your chest is at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for front seat pas-
senger
Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
front seat is reclined during an
accident, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of the
seat belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the front
passenger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 3
Safety system of your vehicle
43
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up
and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks whilst the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly whilst riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and backwards.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or backward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
whilst the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
OJD032002/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 4
35
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
Turn the control knob forward or rearward
to move the seatback to the desired
angle.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever upwards or downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push down
the lever several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull up the
lever several times.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OJD032003/H OJD032004/H
OJD032055/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 5
Safety system of your vehicle
63
Automatic adjustment (if equipped)
The driver’s seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on the
outside of the seat cushion. Before driv-
ing, adjust the seat to the proper position
so as to easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instrument
panel.
Forward and rearward
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary whilst the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control switches at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
OJD032005/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 6
37
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback angle
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward to move the seatback to the
desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat cushion height (if equipped)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower the
front part of the seat cushion. Pull the
rear portion of the control switch up to
raise or down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
pressing the lumbar support switch on
the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the switch to
increase support, or the rear portion of
the switch, to decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the
desired position.
OJD032006/H OJD032007/H OJD032008/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 7
Safety system of your vehicle
83
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for automatic seat)
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver seat
position with a simple button operation.
By saving the desired position into the
system memory, different drivers can
reposition the driver seat based upon
their driving preference. If the battery is
disconnected, the position memory will
be erased and the driving position should
be restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory using
the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) or Neutral (for
manual transaxle) whilst the engine
start/stop button is ON or ignition
switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat comfortable for
the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system whilst the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OJD032054R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 8
39
Safety system of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N (for
Automatic transaxle) or Neutral (for
manual transaxle) whilst the engine
start/stop button is ON or ignition
switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memory,
press the desired memory button (1 or
2). The system will beep once, then the
driver’s seat will automatically adjust to
the stored position.
Adjusting the control switch for the dri-
ver’s seat whilst the system is recalling
the stored position will cause the move-
ment to stop and move in the direction
that the control switch is moved.
Easy access function (if equipped)
The system will move the driver's seat
automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the ignition key is removed and
front driver’s door is opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the ignition key is inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rearward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the OFF position and front
driver’s door is opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat forward
when the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ACC or START posi-
tion.
You can activate or deactivate this feature.
Refer to "User settings" in section 4.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory whilst sitting
in the vehicle. Push the seat posi-
tion control switch to the desired
position immediately if the seat
moves too far in any direction.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 9
Safety system of your vehicle
103
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps protect the head and neck in
the event of a collision.
Forward and rearward adjustment
(if equipped)
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
4 different positions by pulling the head-
rest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rear-
wards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
OPA039052
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the centre of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the centre of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
OJD032009
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 10
311
Safety system of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
whilst pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes whilst press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
OJD032010 OJD032011
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly
protect the occupants.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 11
Safety system of your vehicle
123
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
"OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat will
change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OJD032012R
OFF → HIGH ( ) → MID ( )
LOW ( )
→
→
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
and petrol. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers on the seats whilst
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 12
313
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
Rear seat
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
in all the seating positions for the occu-
pant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
OJD032013
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OPA039053
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the centre of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the centre of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:05 PM Page 13
Safety system of your vehicle
143
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) whilst pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes whilst press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Armrest (if equipped)
To use the armrest, pull it forward from
the seatback.
OJD032014 OJD032015
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
OJD032016
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 14
315
Safety system of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks (or cushions) may be
folded to facilitate carrying long items or
to increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold the rear seat cushion and back
1. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
2. Lift the front portion of the seat cush-
ion up.
3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cush-
ion. Stand the rear seat cushion verti-
cally.
4. Pull the lock release lever (red visible).
OJD032018
OJD032019
OJD032017
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks (or cushions) is to allow
you to carry longer objects than
could otherwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
whilst the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 15
Safety system of your vehicle
163
5. Remove the headrest from the rear
seatback.
6. Stow the headrest by inserting the
headrest poles into the holder on the
bottom of the seat cushion.
7. Fold the rear seatback forward and
down firmly.
8. To use the rear seat, reposition the
headrest on the seatback and adjust it
to the desired position.
9. Lift and push the seatback backward
firmly until it clicks into place. Make
sure the seatback is locked in place
(red invisible).
OJD032020 OJD032021 OJD032022
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 16
317
Safety system of your vehicle
10. Return the seat cushion to the origi-
nal position by pushing down the rear
side of the seat cushion first. Make
sure the seat cushion is locked in
place.
11. Return the rear seat belt to the prop-
er position.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care should be taken of
objects placed in the rear seats,
since those may hit the front seat
occupants in a frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in R
(Reverse) or 1st, and the parking
brake is securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo. Failure
to take these steps may allow the
vehicle to move if the shift lever is
inadvertently moved to another
position.
OJD032023
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 17
Safety system of your vehicle
183
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt web-
bing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
(Continued)
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children
to ride in the front passenger seat.
If a child over 12 must be seated in
the front seat, he/she must be
properly belted and the seat
should be moved as far back as
possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-
ticularly battery acid.
Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing
becomes frayed, contaminated or
damaged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact even
if damage to the assembly is not
obvious. Belts should not be worn
with straps twisted. Each belt
assembly must only be used by one
occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 18
319
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt warning
Driver’s seat belt warning (1)
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds each time you turn the
ignition switch ON regardless of belt fas-
tening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light illuminates until the belt is
fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9km/h, the illuminated
warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6km/h. (if equipped)
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20km/h the seat belt
warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 100 seconds and the correspon-
ding warning light will blink. (if equipped)
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly whilst driv-
ing. This could result in loss of
control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
OJD032056R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 19
Safety system of your vehicle
203
Front passenger’s seat belt warning (2)
As a reminder to the front passenger, the
front passenger’s seat belt warning lights
will illuminate for approximately 6 sec-
onds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the ignition switch is
turned ON or if it is disconnected after
the ignition switch is turned ON, the cor-
responding seat belt warning light will
illuminate until the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9km/h, the illuminated
warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20km/h the seat belt
warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 100 seconds and the correspon-
ding warning light will blink.
✽✽
NOTICE
• You can find the front passenger’s
seat belt warning light on the centre
fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink or illuminate for 6 sec-
onds.
• The front passenger's seat belt warn-
ing may operate when luggage is
placed on the front passenger seat.
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning (3,4,5)
If the ignition switch is turned ON(engine
is not running) when the rear passen-
ger's lap/shoulder belt is not fastened,
the corresponding seat belt warning light
will illuminate until the belt is fastened.
And then, the rear corresponding seat
belt warning light will illuminate for
approximately 35 seconds, if any of fol-
lowing occurs;
- You start the engine when the rear belt
is not fastened.
- You drive over 9km/h when the rear belt
is not fastened.
- The rear belt is disconnected when
driving under 20km/h.
OJD032024R OJD032025R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 20
321
Safety system of your vehicle
If the rear seat belt is fastened, the warn-
ing light will turn off immediately.
If the rear seat belt is disconnected when
you drive over the 20km/h, the corre-
sponding seat belt warning light will blink
and warning chime will sound for 35 sec-
onds.
But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoulder
belt is/are connected and disconnected
twice within 9 seconds after the belt is
fastened, the corresponding seat belt
warning light will not operate.
Lap/shoulder belt
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck. You
will not be getting the most effective pro-
tection. The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder near the
door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
OLM039026
■ Front seat
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 21
Safety system of your vehicle
223
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF/H
1
2
OJD032026
■ Rear centre seat belt (if equipped)
CAUTION
When using the rear centre seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
B200A01NF/H
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm near the door.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 22
323
Safety system of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (A) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
B210A01NF/H
A
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
OED030300/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 23
Safety system of your vehicle
243
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustra-
tion:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not haz-
ardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manu-
al.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts prop-
erly.
8KMB3311/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 24
325
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt precautions
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light will illuminate even if
there is no malfunction of the SRS
air bag. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occu-
pant seat contained in this manual.
(Continued)
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. We recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorised Kia dealer.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inadvertent
activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehi-
cle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 25
Safety system of your vehicle
263
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened and snugged on the hips
and as low as possible. Check if the belt
fits periodically. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children are
afforded the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system in the rear seat.
If a larger child (over age 12) must be
seated in the front seat, the child should
be securely restrained by the available
lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position. Children
age 12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a
child age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 26
327
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protec-
tion if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face whilst the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:06 PM Page 27
Safety system of your vehicle
283
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or dam-
age of any kind. Any damaged parts
should be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. We recommend that you con-
sult an authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be care-
ful not to damage the seat belt web-
bing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a colli-
sion or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury. If the webbing or
buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 28
329
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
manoeuvre. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be prop-
erly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country. Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats
by the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX
anchors.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in case of a sudden stop
or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 29
Safety system of your vehicle
303
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always prop-
erly position and secure children
in the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floorboard of
a moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicles interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear left seat.
WARNING
To reduce a risk of serious or fatal
injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the instructions for
installation and use of the child
restraint maker.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 30
331
Safety system of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manu-
facturer's instructions. For safety reasons,
we recommend that the child restraint sys-
tem be used in the rear seats.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the vehicle and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the instruc-
tions provided with the child
restraint system could increase
the chance and/or severity of
injury in an accident.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
CRS09
OJD032027
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 31
Safety system of your vehicle
323
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installa-
tion of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passen-
ger emergency locking usage condition.
OEN036101 OEN036104E2MS103005
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 32
333
Safety system of your vehicle
Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt
- For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
Age Group
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear outboard
Rear centre
(if equipped)
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
XUU
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
XUU
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
XUU
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
XUU
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passen-
ger's air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position. To ensure the
safety of your child, the front pas-
senger’s air bag must be deactivat-
ed when it should be necessary to
install a child restraint seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 33
Safety system of your vehicle
343
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system (if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the transverse trim behind the rear
seats (5 Door) or the floor behind the
rear seats (Wagon).
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrest,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over
the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
OJD032029
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
OJD032028
OGDE032020L
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 34
335
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-
ting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and posi-
tive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific or universal approval
in accordance with the requirements of
ECE-R 44.
❈ ISOFIX: International Standards Origanisation FIX
OVI039060
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
WARNING
Do not install a child restraint seat
at the centre of the rear seat using
the tether anchors. The tether
anchors are only provided for the
left and right outboard rear seating
positions.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
tether anchor attachments may not
be strong enough to secure the
child restraint seat properly in the
centre of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 35
Safety system of your vehicle
363
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the floor behind the rear seats
(wagon) or the shelf behind the rear
seats (sedan). The ISOFIX anchorages
are located between seat cushion and
backrest, marked with the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the correspon-
ding top tether anchorage point on the
floor behind the rear seats (wagon) or the
shelf behind the rear seats (sedan).
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
ISOFIX anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the ISOFIX anchors.
OJD032030
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 36
337
Safety system of your vehicle
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-
ous page.)
(Continued)
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the centre of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating posi-
tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the cen-
tre of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 37
Safety system of your vehicle
383
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe
F ISO/L1 - X X -
G ISO/L2 - X X -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
E ISO/R1 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
D ISO/R2 - IL IL -
C ISO/R3 - IL IL -
B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -
B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -
A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Front Passenger
FixtureSize ClassMass Group
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Centre
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the
"specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 38
339
Safety system of your vehicle
Recommended child restraint systems – For Europe
CRS Manufacturer information
Britax Römer http://www.britax.com
Mass Group Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
Group 0+
(0-13kg)
Baby Safe Plus II Britax Römer Rearward facing with ISOFIX adapter E1 04301146
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Duo Plus Britax Römer
Forward facing with vehicle
ISOFIX lower anchorage + Top Tether
E1 04301133
Forward facing with vehicle
3-point seat belt
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 39
Safety system of your vehicle
403
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch
* : if equipped
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD032031R/OJD032032R
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 40
341
Safety system of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side impact air bag or
curtain air bag) in order to help protect
the occupants from serious physical
injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining, factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of extremely
short time in which a collision occurs
and the need to get the air bag
between the occupant and the vehicle
structures before the occupant impacts
those structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe collision
and is thus a necessary part of air bag
design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steer-
ing wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible
(at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away).The front passenger should
always move their seat as far
back as possible and sit back in
their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of a collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
a proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 41
Safety system of your vehicle
423
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc.). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if the
symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat is forbidden when
the air bag is active
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
If your vehicle is equipped with the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch,
you can activate or deactivate the front
passenger’s air bag when necessary.
For more details, please refer to 3-50 page.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage areas
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 42
343
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag warning and indicator
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it
would cause serious or fatal
injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of vehicle
equipped with curtain air bags,
be sure to install the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
securely lock the child restraint
system in position.
Inflation of curtain air bags could
cause serious injury or death to
an infant or child.
W7-147
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 43
Safety system of your vehicle
443
Passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor illuminates for approximately 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
The passenger's front air bag ON indica-
tor also comes on when the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the
ON position and goes off after approxi-
mately 60 seconds.
Passenger’s front air bag
OFF indicator
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator also comes on when the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch is set
to the OFF position and goes off when
the passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the ON position.
CAUTION
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the
passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator will not illuminate (The pas-
senger's front air bag ON indicator
comes on and goes off after
approximately 60 seconds) and the
passenger’s front air bag will inflate
in a frontal impact even if the pas-
senger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch is set to the OFF position.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag
system be inspected by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
OJD032033R OJD032034R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 44
345
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors*
10. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
indicator
11. Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-
ments whilst the ignition switch is ON to
determine if a frontal, near-frontal impact
or side impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
air bag warning light should go out.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. We recommend that the
system be inspected by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminat-
ing for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
OJD032053R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 45
Safety system of your vehicle
463
The air bag modules are located both in
the centre of the steering wheel and in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box. When the SRSCM detects a
sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B02L/H B240B03L/H
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L/H
Driver’s front air bag (1)
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 46
347
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition key is in the ON posi-
tion. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on after illumi-
nating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition key is turned to the
ON position, or after the engine is
started, comes on whilst driving,
the SRS is not working properly.
If this occurs, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorised Kia dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS air bag warn-
ing light to illuminate.
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L/H
Passenger’s front air bag
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 47
Safety system of your vehicle
483
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with
considerable force and in the blink
of an eye. Seat belts help keep
occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the
air bag. Even with air bags, improp-
erly and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precau-
tions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side impact air bags
can injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
(Continued)
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the centre of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
OJD032036R
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OJD032035R
■ Driver’s front air bag
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 48
349
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated whilst the
vehicle is being driven, we rec-
ommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia
dealer.
• Air bags can only be used once –
we recommend that the system
be replaced by an authorised Kia
dealer.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
whilst still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passen-
gers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
centre console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 49
Safety system of your vehicle
503
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch (if equipped)
The passenger’s front air bag can be
deactivated by the passenger’s front air
bag ON/OFF switch if a child restraint is
installed on the front passenger's seat or
if the front passenger's seat is unoccu-
pied by a person.
To ensure the safety of your child, the
passenger’s front air bag must be deacti-
vated when it should be necessary to
install a rearward facing child seat on the
front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances.
OJD032037R
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag whilst
the vehicle is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:07 PM Page 50
351
Safety system of your vehicle
To deactivate or reactivate the passen-
ger’s front air bag:
To deactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the mechanical key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the OFF position.
The passenger’s front air bag OFF indi-
cator ( ) will illuminate and stay on until
the passenger’s front air bag is reactivat-
ed.
To reactivate the passenger’s front air
bag, insert the mechanical key into the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch
and turn it to the ON position. The pas-
senger’s front air bag OFF indicator will
go out and the passenger’s front air bag
ON indicator ( ) will illuminate for
approximately 60 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position,
the passenger’s front air bag is activated
and child or infant seat should not be
installed on the front passenger seat.
• When the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF posi-
tion, the passenger’s front air bag is
deactivated.
CAUTION
• If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is not working
properly, the air bag warning light
()
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
And, the passenger's front air bag
OFF indicator
()
will not illumi-
nate (The passenger's front air
bag ON indicator comes on and
goes off after approximately 60
seconds), the SRS Control
Module reactivates the passen-
ger’s front air bag and the pas-
senger’s front air bag will inflate
in frontal impact crashes even if
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF
position.
(Continued)
WARNING
On some models, the front air bag
ON/OFF switch could turn by using
a similar small rigid device. Always
check the status of the front air bag
ON/OFF switch and passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF indicator.
OJD032033R
OJD032034R
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 51
Safety system of your vehicle
523
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the passenger's
front air bag ON/OFF switch, do
not install a child restraint sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
Children who are too large for
child restraint systems should
always occupy the rear seat and
use the available lap/shoulder
belts. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an
accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat.
• As soon as the child seat is no
longer needed on the front pas-
senger's seat, reactivate the front
passenger's air bag.
WARNING
• The driver is responsible for the
proper position of the passen-
ger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch.
• Deactivate the passenger's front
air bag only when the ignition
switch is switched off, or the mal-
function may occur in the SRS
Control Module.
And there may be a danger that
the driver's and/or front passen-
ger’s and/or side and curtain air
bag may fail to trigger, or not trig-
ger correctly during a collision.
• Never install a rearward facing
child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat unless the passenger's
front air bag has been deactivat-
ed. The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be inspected by an
authorised Kia dealer.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
blinks or does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or if it illumi-
nates whilst the vehicle is being
driven, we recommend that the
system be inspected by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 52
353
Safety system of your vehicle
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side air bags are not designed to deploy
in all side impact situations.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. The air bags
deploy only in certain side impact
conditions severe enough to
cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
OJD032038
OJD032040
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 53
Safety system of your vehicle
543
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact colli-
sions, depending on the crash severity,
angle, speed and point of impact. The
curtain air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations, colli-
sions from the front or rear of the vehicle
or in most rollover situations.
OJD032039
OJD032041
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition key is
on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 54
355
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
injury or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
WARNING
• In order for side impact and cur-
tain air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat occu-
pants and both outboard rear
occupants should sit in an
upright position with the seat
belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system.
Make sure to put the child
restraint system as far away from
the door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint system
in a locked position.
(Continued)
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 55
Safety system of your vehicle
563
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)
OJD032042R/OJD032043/H/OJD032044/H/OJD032045
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 56
357
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air bag
or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. We recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B pillar and
C pillars where side collision sen-
sors are installed. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicles collision and air
bag deployment performance.
OED036096/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 57
Safety system of your vehicle
583
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side air bags (side
impact and/or curtain air bags) are
designed to inflate only in side impact
collisions, but they may inflate in other
collisions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads
or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on sur-
faces not designed for vehicle traffic to
prevent unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
OED036099/H
OJD032048
OGDE031045
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 58
359
Safety system of your vehicle
• Air bags are not designed to inflate in
rear collisions, because occupants are
moved backward by the force of the
impact. In this case, inflated air bags
would not be able to provide any addi-
tional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
• However, if equipped with side impact
and curtain air bags, the air bags may
inflate depending on the intensity, vehi-
cle speed and angles of impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
OED036102OJD032048OED036100/H
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 59
Safety system of your vehicle
603
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly replaced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because the vehicle can not
detect rollover accident.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over following (or after) side impact col-
lision.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
OED036103 OED036104 OJD032050
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 60
361
Safety system of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, we recom-
mend that the system be replaced
by an authorised Kia dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorised Kia
dealer knows these precautions
and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow
these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of
personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on floor-
ing, you shouldn't try to start the
engine; we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 61
Safety system of your vehicle
623
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats whilst the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side impact air bag covers could inter-
fere with the proper operation of the air
bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modify-
ing your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tred on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 62
363
Safety system of your vehicle
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
OJD032051
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
OJD032052
Air bag warning label (if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk
of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings focus on the risk of children. We also want
you to be aware of the risks adults are exposed to which have been described in
previous pages.
JD RHD 3.QXP 7/21/2012 1:08 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Remote keyless entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation. . . . . . 4-13
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Theft-alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• From outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• From inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Deadlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Door lock/unlock features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Opening the tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
• Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
• Power windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Closing the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Sliding the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
• Resetting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Tilt & telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Flex steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-49
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-49
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 1
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• LCD display informations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
• Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Manual transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
• Automatic transaxle shift position indicator. . . . . . 4-62
• Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . . 4-62
• Speed limiter indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
• Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
• LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
• Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
LCD display warnings and indicators
(instrument panel display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
• Non-operational conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Smart Parking Assist System(SPAS) . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Non-operating condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• How the system works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Additional instructions(messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
• System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
• High - beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Headlight levelling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-117
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Windscreen wipers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• Windscreen washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Interior lamp AUTO cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Luggage room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
4
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 2
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Puddle lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Windscreen defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Centre console storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Sliding armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Luggage tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Luggage side tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
• Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Aux, USB and iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Barrier net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Audio remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• How car audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
4
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 3
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code number is
stamped on the bar
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you lose
your keys, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorised Kia
dealer. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record the
code number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
Immobiliser system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobiliser system to
reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle
use.
Your immobiliser system is comprised of
a small transponder in the key and elec-
tronic devices inside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key system
With the immobiliser system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobiliser system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-
der and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobiliser system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobiliser system activates auto-
matically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
KEYS
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition. Children copy adults and
they could place the key in the igni-
tion. The ignition key would enable
children to operate power windows
or other controls, or even make the
vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even death.
Never leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children.
WARNING
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorised
Kia dealer. If an aftermarket key is
used, the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will continue
to operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire due
to excessive current in the wiring.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 4
45
Features of your vehicle
Vehicles with smart key system
Whenever the engine start/stop button is
changed to the ON position, the immo-
biliser system checks and verifies if the
key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will not
start.
To deactivate the immobiliser system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the ON position.
To activate the immobiliser system
Change the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobiliser sys-
tem activates automatically. Without a
valid smart key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobiliser keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfuntioin.
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, we recommend that you consult an
authorised Kia dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobiliser system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid expo-
sure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobiliser
system malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobiliser system because it
could cause the immobiliser sys-
tem to malfunction. We recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the immobiliser system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle. Your immo-
biliser password is a customer
unique password and should be
kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from nor-
mally transmitting.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
64
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automat-
ically.
• To fold the key, fold the key manually
whilst pressing the release button.
Type B
• To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button and
remove the mechanical key.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
Lock (1)
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042002
■ Type B
OAM049096L
■ Type A
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without press-
ing the release button. This may
damage the key.
OJD042001
■ Type B
OXM049003
■ Type A
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 6
47
Features of your vehicle
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine bonnet and tailgate
must be closed). Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically fold if
the outside rearview mirror folding
switch (Type B) is in the AUTO posi-
tion (if equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will blink
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. Also, the outside rearview
mirror will automatically unfold if the
outside rearview mirror folding switch
(Type B) is in the AUTO position (if
equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors will
lock and the outside rearview mirror
will unfold if the outside rearview mir-
ror folding switch (Type B) is in the
AUTO position (if equipped) unless a
door is opened within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlock (3)
1. Press the tailgate unlock button for
more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the tailgate is
unlocked.
✽✽
NOTICE
• After unlocking the tailgate, the tail-
gate will lock automatically unless it is
opened within 30 seconds.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
84
Transmitter precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with the
ignition key. If you have a problem with
the transmitter, we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er vehicle warranty.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 8
49
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years,
but if the transmitter or smart key is not
working properly, try replacing the bat-
tery with a new one. If you are unsure
how to use or replace the battery, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorised
Kia dealer.
Type A
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover (1).
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the illustra-
tion.
3. Install the rear cover.
Type B
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the cover.
OJD042003OED039003A
■ Type A ■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:03 PM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
104
2. Pull the smart key module out.
3. Turn the smart key module over.
4. Push the battery out from the battery
holder.
5. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position as indi-
cated in the illustration.
6. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For transmitter or smart key replace-
ment, we recommend that you contact
an authorised Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key is
designed to give you years of
trouble-free use, however it can
malfunction if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the
battery, we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to use
the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter or smart key, don't drop it, get
it wet, or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
■ Type B
OJD042004
■ Type A
OJD042005
OJD042006
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 10
411
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Smart key function
1.Door lock
2.Door unlock
3.Tailgate unlock
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door and tailgate and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of the buttons on a smart
key are similar to the remote keyless
entry. Refer to the “Remote keyless
entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock and
unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
Locking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside door
handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will blink
once (the engine bonnet and tailgate
must be closed). Also, the outside
rearview mirror will automatically fold
if the outside rearview mirror folding
switch (Type B) is in the AUTO posi-
tion (if equipped).
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for 3
seconds if any of following occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the tailgate is
opened.
OJD042001 OJD042008/H
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
124
Unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2.Press the button of the front outside
door handle.
3.All doors will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink twice. Also, the
outside rearview mirror will automati-
cally unfold if the outside rearview mir-
ror folding switch (Type B) is in the
AUTO position (if equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from the
front outside door handle, other peo-
ple can also open the doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock and the outside rearview
mirror will unfold if the outside
rearview mirror folding switch (Type
B) is in the AUTO position (if
equipped) unless a door is opened
within 30 seconds.
Tailgate unlocking
1.Carry the smart key.
2.Press the tailgate handle switch.
3.The tailgate will unlock.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate will lock automati-
cally.
• The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the tailgate handle.
OJD042016
OJD042241
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 12
413
Features of your vehicle
Smart key precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend that
you contact an authorised Kia dealer.
• The smart key will not work if any of
the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile two-
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, we rec-
ommend that you contact an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or
sending/receiving emails. Avoid plac-
ing the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
Door lock/unlock in an emer-
gency situation
If the smart key does not operate normal-
ly, you can lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key.
1.Press and hold the release button (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
2.Insert the key into the hole of the out-
side door handle. Turn the key toward
the rear of the vehicle to unlock and
toward the front of the vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a
click sound is heard.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
OJD042002
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
144
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm sys-
tem will have a label attached to the vehi-
cle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorised entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors, the engine
bonnet and tailgate are closed and
latched.
3.• Lock the doors by pressing the button
of the front outside door handle with
the smart key in your possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine bonnet
remains opened, the hazard warning
lights will not operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if the tailgate
and engine bonnet are closed, the
hazard warning lights will blink once
and the theft-alarm will arm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
OJC040170
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 14
415
Features of your vehicle
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will operate
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine bonnet
remains opened, the hazard warning
lights will not operate and theft-alarm
will not arm. After this, if the tailgate
and engine bonnet are closed, the
hazard warning lights will blink once
and the theft-alarm will arm.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the engine
bonnet and tailgate are closed and
latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If the tailgate or engine bonnet remains
opened, the hazard warning lights will
not operate and theft-alarm will not
arm. After this, if the tailgate and
engine bonnet are closed, the hazard
warning lights will blink once and the
theft-alarm will arm.
• Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed whilst a passen-
ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the
alarm may be activated when the
remaining passenger(s) leave the
vehicle. If any door, tailgate or
engine bonnet is opened within 30
seconds after entering the armed
stage, the system is disarmed to
prevent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs whilst the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using transmitter or smart key.
• The tailgate is opened without using
transmitter or smart key.
• The engine bonnet is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
27 seconds, unless the system is dis-
armed. To turn off the system, unlock the
doors with the transmitter or smart key.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
164
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door is
pressed whilst carrying the smart key.
- The engine is started.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Without smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• With smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with the
smart key, open the door with the
mechanical key and start the engine.
Then the system will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend
that you consult an authorised Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction and we recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 16
417
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked with
the transmitter or smart key.
• Doors can be locked and unlocked by
pressing the button of the outside door
handle with the smart key in your pos-
session. (vehicles equipped with smart
key system)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
Mechanical key
• If the transmitter or smart key does not
operate normally, you can lock or
unlock the doors by the mechanical
key.
Insert the key into the key hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock
and toward the front of the vehicle to
lock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key whilst the power door lock switch
does not operate normally, only the dri-
ver’s door will lock/unlock.
• Once the door is unlocked, it may be
opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING
• If you don't close the door secure-
ly, the door may open again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
OAM04097L/OJD042001
OJD042010R
■ Type A ■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
184
In case of an emergency
If the power door lock switch does not
operate electrically, the only way to lock
the door(s) is with the mechanical key
from the outside key hole.
You can lock the doors without the out-
side key hole as follows:
1. Open the door.
2. Insert the key into the emergency door
lock hole and turn the key horizontally
to lock.
3. Close the door securely.
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door handle
Driver’s door and front passanger’s door
(if equipped)
If the inner door handle is pulled when
the door is locked, the door will unlock
and open.
Rear door (if equipped)
If the inner door handle is pulled once
when the door is locked, the door will
unlock.
If the inner door handle is pulled once
more, the door will open.
With central door lock/unlock switch
It is operated by pressing the door lock/
unlock switch.
• When you press the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock and
the indicator light on the switch will illu-
minate.
• If any door is opened when the switch
is pressed, all doors will not lock.
• If any door is unlocked, the indicator of
the central door lock switch will go off.
• When you press the central door
unlock switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
OJD042012
L
L
LL
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
OJD042013R OJD042014R
U
U
UU
nn
nn
ll
ll
oo
oo
cc
cc
kk
kk
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 18
419
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors can-
not be unlocked with the central door
lock/unlock switch.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked whilst the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows down.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle whilst you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function whilst you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the follow-
ing:
• Operate the other door locks and
handles.
• Lower the driver’s window and
use the key to unlock the door
from outside.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 19
Features of your vehicle
204
Deadlocks (if equipped)
Some vehicles are equipped with a
deadlock system. Deadlocks prevent
opening of a door from either inside or
outside the vehicle once the deadlocks
have been activated providing an addi-
tional measure of vehicle security.
To lock the vehicle using the deadlock
function, the doors must be locked by
using the transmitter or smart key. To
unlock the vehicle, the transmitter or
smart key must be used again.
Door lock/unlock features
Impact sensing door unlock system
All doors will automatically unlock when
an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically lock after the
vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
Engine off door unlock system
(if equipped)
All doors will automatically unlock:
Without smart key system
When the key is removed from the igni-
tion switch.
With smart key system
When the engine start/stop button is in
the OFF position.
Shift lever door lock/unlock system
• All doors will automatically lock when
the shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
• All doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into P
(Park).
You can activate or deactivate the auto
door lock/unlock features in the vehicle.
Refer to "User setting" in this section.
WARNING
Do not lock the doors with the
transmitter or the smart key with
anybody left in the vehicle. The pas-
senger in the vehicle cannot unlock
the doors with the door lock button.
For example, if the door is locked
with the transmitter, the passenger
in the vehicle cannot unlock the
door without the transmitter.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 20
421
Features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole (1) and turn it to the “lock( )”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the lock position, the rear door will
not open even though the inner door
handle (3) is pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (2).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (3) until rear door child
safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors whilst the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To pre-
vent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used when-
ever children are in the vehicle.
OJD042015
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
224
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter, smart key or
central door lock/unlock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-
gate unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key is pressed for approximately
1 second or the tailgate handle switch
is pressed with the smart key in your
possession.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it up.
• Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed, the tailgate locks automatically.
(All doors must be locked.)
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Closing the tailgate
Lower and push down the tailgate firmly.
Make sure that the tailgate is securely
latched.
TAILGATE
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
OJD042087
OJD042016
OJD042241
■ 5Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:04 PM Page 22
423
Features of your vehicle
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment. The tailgate can
be opened by doing as follows:
1. Input the machanical key into the hole.
2. Push the machanical key to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
opened, keep the air vents and all
windows open so that additional
outside air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
OJD042017
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tail-
gate if you are accidentally locked
in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tail-
gate latch and striker whilst closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tail-
gate's latch.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
244
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (right) power window
switch*
(4) Rear door (left) power window
switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch*
*: if equipped
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OJD042018R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 24
425
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door’s window. The dri-
ver’s door has a master power window
switch that controls all the windows in the
vehicle. Also, the driver has a power win-
dow lock switch which can block the
operation of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the igni-
tion key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the front
doors are opened, the power windows
cannot be operated even within the 30
seconds period.
✽✽
NOTICE
Whilst driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experi-
ence the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
Window opening and closing
Type A
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
Type B - Auto up/down window
(if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window
switch momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers or lifts the
window even when the switch is released.
To stop the window at the desired position
whilst the window is in operation, pull up
or press down and release the switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power window
system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up the power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window
is completely closed.
OJD042020ROJD042019R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
264
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
whilst the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “auto up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not oper-
ate if the window is raised using the
halfway position on the power window
switch.
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
The driver can disable the power window
switches on rear passenger doors by
pressing the power window lock button
located on the driver’s door to the LOCK
position (pressed).
OUN026013/H OJD042021R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 26
427
Features of your vehicle
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to the
power window system, do not open
or close two windows or more at
the same time.This will also ensure
the longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(pressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side the window whilst driving.
OED036088/H
WARNING
When opening or closing the win-
dows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely
out of the way.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the bonnet
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
bonnet. The bonnet should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
bonnet slightly, push the secondary
latch inside of the bonnet centre and
lift the bonnet.
3.Pull out the support rod.
4.Hold the bonnet opened with the sup-
port rod.
BONNET
OJD042022R
WARNING
Open the bonnet after turning off
the engine on a flat surface, shift-
ing the shift lever to the P(Park)
position for automatic transaxle
and to the 1(First) gear or
R(Reverse) for manual transaxle,
and setting the parking brake.
WARNING - Hot parts
Be very careful not to touch the
support rod when the engine and
parts are hot. You could get burned
or get seriously injured.
OJD042023 OJD042024
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 28
429
Features of your vehicle
Closing the bonnet
1. Before closing the bonnet, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the bonnet until it is about 30
cm (1 ft.) above the closed position
and let it drop. Make sure that it locks
into place.
WARNING - Bonnet
• Before closing the bonnet,
ensure that all obstructions are
removed from the bonnet open-
ing. Closing the bonnet with an
obstruction present in the bonnet
opening may result in property
damage or severe personal
injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the bonnet is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the bonnet could fly
open whilst the vehicle is being
driven, causing a total loss of vis-
ibility, which might result in an
accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole whenev-
er you inspect the engine com-
partment. This will prevent the
bonnet from falling and possibly
injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
bonnet raised. The view will be
blocked and the bonnet could fall
or be damaged.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
304
Opening the fuel filler lid
1. To open the lid, press the centre edge
of the lid when all doors are unlocked.
✽✽
NOTICE
The lid will open and close only when all
doors are unlocked.
2. Fully open the lid (1).
3. To open the cap, turn it counterclock-
wise (2).
4. Refuel as needed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid does not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-
tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. To close the lid, press the edge of the
lid. Make sure it is securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
OJD042025
OJD042026
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 30
431
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapours resulting
in rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other petrol
source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapours
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning post-
ed at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Petrol Shut-Off,
if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
324
(Continued)
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry and
store petrol.
• Do not use cellular phones whilst
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel
vapours causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and filler
door are securely closed, before
starting the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle whilst at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment. Follow any safety instruc-
tions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make sure
that you use parts designed for
replacement in your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system. For more detailed infor-
mation, we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 32
433
Features of your vehicle
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a rain-
storm, be sure to wipe off any water that
is on the sunroof before operating it.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the sun-
roof is not fully closed, the warning chime
will sound for approximately 7 seconds
and a warning message will appear on
the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving
your vehicle.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION - Sunroof control
lever
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is fully opened, closed, or tilted.
Damage to the motor or system
components could occur.
OJD042027 OJD042078/OJD042215
■ Supervision■ Normal vision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:05 PM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
344
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, press the sun-
shade control switch(1).
• To close the sunshade when the sun-
roof glass is closed.
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).
- Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down.
To stop the sliding at any point, press the
sunshade control switch momentarily.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunshade will slide all the way
open then the sunroof glass will slide all
the way open. To stop the sunroof move-
ment at any point, pull or push the sun-
roof control lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward, the sunroof glass will slide all the
way open. To stop the sunroof movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof con-
trol lever momentarily.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all the
way open then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OJD042029
OJD042030OJD042028
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 34
435
Features of your vehicle
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with the
sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward or
full it down.
The sunroof glass will close.
Then to close sunshade
- Press the sunshade control switch(2).
- Push the sunroof control lever forward
or full it down
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detect-
ed whilst the sunroof glass or sunshade
is closing automatically, it will reverse the
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass or sunshade and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passen-
gers and objects are away from the sun-
roof before closing it.
OYF049215
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s head,
hands and body are not trapped by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside through an
opened sunroof whilst driving.
• Make sure your hands and face are
safely out of the way before clos-
ing a sunroof.
• A panorama sunroof is made of
glass, therefore it may break in an
accident. If you do not have your
seat belt on, you may stick out of
the broken glass and get injured or
killed. For all passengers safety,
have an appropriate protection on.
(ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing
or when the sunroof is covered
with snow or ice, the glass or the
motor could be damaged.
• If you drive with the sunroof opened
right after a car wash or rain, water
may get inside the vehicle.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
364
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1.Turn the engine on and close the sun-
roof glass and sunshade completely.
2.Release the control lever.
3. Push the sunroof control lever forward in
the direction of close (about 10 seconds)
until the sunroof operates as follows;
SUNSHADE OPEN → TILT OPEN
Then, release the control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sun-
roof operates as follows;
SUNSHADE & SLIDE OPEN SIMUL-
TANEOUSLY → SLIDE CLOSE →
SUNSHADE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more detailed information, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorised Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 36
437
Features of your vehicle
Electronic power steering
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is con-
trolled by the power steering control unit
which senses the steering wheel torque
and vehicle speed to command the
motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for better control of the steer-
ing wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur dur-
ing normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illu-
minate.
• The steering effort is high immediately
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condi-
tion.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK/OFF posi-
tion.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously
when the vehicle is not in motion.
However, after a few minutes, it will
return to its normal conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If an error is detected in the electric
power steering system, EPS will stop
assisting driver in steering the vehicle
to prevent accidents and the warning
light on the cluster will illuminate or
blink. We recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised Kia deal-
er.
• When you operate the steering wheel in
low temperature, abnormal noise could
occur. If temperature rises, the noise
will disappear. This is a normal condi-
tion.
• When the vehicle is stationary, if you
turn the steering wheel all the way to
the left or right continuously, the
steering wheel becomes heavier from
the end. This is not a system malfunc-
tion but for your safety. As time pass-
es, the steering wheel returns to its
normal condition.
• When the charging system warning
light comes on or the voltage is low
(When the alternator (or battery) does
not operate normally or it malfunc-
tions), the steering wheel may get
heavy and become difficult to control
operate abnormally.
STEERING WHEEL
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
384
Tilt & telescopic steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust
the steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
whilst permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust the
steering wheel to the desired angle (2)
and height (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering wheel in
place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel
to the desired position before driving.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion, pressing the heated steering wheel
button warms the steering wheel.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn off
automatically approximately 30 minutes
after the heated steering wheel is turned
on.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and height
of steering wheel whilst driving.
You may lose your steering con-
trol and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
OJD042031R OJD042083R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 38
439
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
OJD042032
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
OJD042165/OJD042166/OJD042189/OJD042190
The indicator on the button will illuminate and notify you on the LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on
the button will turn off and notify you on the LCD display.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to
the heated steering wheel system.
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
404
Flex steering wheel (if equipped)
The flex steering wheel controls steering
effort as driver's preference or road con-
dition.
You can select the desired steering mode
by pressing the steering mode button.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode will
appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode will
change as above pictures.
If the steering wheel mode button is not
pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD dis-
play will change to the previous screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium steer-
ing effort.
OJD042161
OJD042239
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042167
OJD042192
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
OJD042170
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 40
441
Features of your vehicle
Comfort mode
The steering wheel becomes lighter. The
comfort mode is usually used when driv-
ing in downtown or parking the vehicle.
Also, the comfort mode helps weak peo-
ple to drive easily.
Sport mode
The steering wheel becomes heavier.
The sport mode is usually used when
driving in highway.
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button whilst oper-
ating the steering wheel, the LCD
display will change, but the steer-
ing effort will not change immedi-
ately. After operating the steering
wheel, the steering effort will
change automatically to the
selected mode.
• Be careful when changing the
steering mode whilst driving.
• When the electronic power steer-
ing is not working properly, the
flex steering wheel will not work.
OJD042169
OJD042191
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
OJD042168
OJD042193
■ Normal vision
■
■
Super
Super
vision
vision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
424
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
centre view through the rear window is
seen. Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and whilst the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatical-
ly controls the glare from the headlights
of the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automati-
cally controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehi-
cle.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out the
rear window.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liq-
uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-
ing.
WARNING
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
whilst the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident which could cause
death, serious injury or property
damage.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
OMD040031
D
D
DD
aa
aa
yy
yy
NN
NN
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 42
443
Features of your vehicle
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
OMD040032
Indicator
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mir-
ror are closer than they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
444
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to
select the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding point
on the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left or
right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neu-
tral (centre) position to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate whilst the switch is
pressed. Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
OJD042033R
OJD042034/H
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 44
445
Features of your vehicle
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be fold-
ed or unfolded by pressing the switch as
below.
Up (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Down (2) : The mirror will fold.
Centre (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold automatical-
ly as follows:
• Without smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
transmitter.
• With smart key system
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the
smart key.
- The mirror will fold or unfold when the
door is locked or unlocked by the but-
ton on the outside door handle.
- The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors closed
and locked) with a smart key in pos-
session.
OJD042035R
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside
rearview mirror, don’t fold it by
hand. It could cause motor failure.
CAUTION
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tion. However, to prevent unneces-
sary battery discharge, do not
adjust the mirrors longer than nec-
essary whilst the engine is not run-
ning.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:06 PM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
464
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (NORMAL VISION)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
5. Turn signal indicators
6. LCD display
OJD042036R
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the
following pages.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 46
447
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity
can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the
switch
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
OJD042047R
OJD042044/OJD042045
OJD042040
OJD042041
■ Diesel Engine■ Petrol Engine
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
484
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning
light may come on earlier than usual
due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired whilst driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
You can turn off the indicator. Refer to
“User setting” in this section.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“O (Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OJD042046
OJD042231/OJD042232
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 48
449
Features of your vehicle
Automatic transaxle shift position
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Double clutch transmission (DS
mode) shift indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which Double clutch
transmission shift lever is selected.
In DS mode, the “SPORTS” indicator dis-
plays in cluster. For more detailed informa-
tion about DS mode, refer to the chapter 5.
OJD042233 OJD042234
* DCT : Double clutch transmission
CAUTION - DCT
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorised Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe protec-
tion mode, the transaxle indicator
blinks with buzzer sound. The
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,
the LCD warning about safe pro-
tection mode also displays. In this
condition, the driving may not be
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-
ing, the driving condition is get-
ting worse and the system may
have problem. To return the nor-
mal driving condition, apply the
foot brake and stop the vehicle for
few minutes before driving off.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
504
Speed limiter indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the speed
limit control system is enabled by move
the lever up on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes off when the lever
up again to deactivate the system.
If there is a problem with the speed limit
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to “Speed limit
control system” in section 5.
The speed limiter indicators illuminates
on the LCD display.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
OJD052031R
OJD042051N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 50
451
Features of your vehicle
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. All stored driving information
(except odometer, distance to empty and
instant fuel economy) resets if the battery
is disconnected.
Press the ▲ or ▼ button for less than 1
second to select any mode as follows:
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Tripmeter B
Instant fuel consumption*
Tripmeter A
Distance to empty*
Average fuel consumption*
Engine coolant temperature gauge
* : if equipped
Elapsed time*
Average speed*
↔↔
↔↔↔↔↔↔
Service*
↔
User setting*
↔
OJD042050
OJD042052N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
524
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will
be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
Average fuel economy (if equipped)
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average fuel
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
To clear the average fuel economy to
zero (--.-), do as follow;
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consump-
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel
consumption to zero (--.-).
OJD042053N OJD042054N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 52
453
Features of your vehicle
Instant fuel economy (if equipped)
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel con-
sumption during the last few seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-
cle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty is an estimate
of the available driving distance. This
value may differ from the actual driv-
ing distance.
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going whilst the
engine is running.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is dis-
played, clears the average speed to zero
(---).
OJD042055N OJD042056N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
544
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going whilst the
engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“130°C”, it indicates overheating
that may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OJD042057 OJD042058
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 54
455
Features of your vehicle
Service mode
This mode calculates when you need a
scheduled maintenance service (mileage
or days)
If you want to see the service mode when
other modes are displayed, press the ▲
or ▼ button less than 1 second.
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the scheduled maintenance
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-
play will show the elapsed mileage or
days.
If you want to reset the maintenance
schedule, when the service required mes-
sage is displayed :
- Press the button more than 5 sec-
onds.
- " : Reset" will be shown on the LCD
display.
- Press the button again more than 1
second.
If you do not press the button within 5
seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.
If you want to change the interval of the
maintenance service schedule, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorised
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,
when the displayed service schedule
has not elapsed or elapsed without
actual vehicle service, the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
might not be match the actual service
schedule anymore.
You should comply with the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
for the maintenance of your vehicle.
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the displayed service sched-
ule might not match the actual service
schedule.
OJD042061R
OJD042059N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
564
If service mode is not activated, the LCD
display shows, like the above picture.
In this case, we recommend that you
consult an authorised Kia dealer.
User Settings
In this mode there are 3 kinds of the sub-
menu.
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position or engine
running.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button until the User
setting mode is displayed.
3. With the User setting mode displayed,
press the button until the screen
is changed.
4. You can change the item by pressing
the ▲ or ▼ button and select an item
by pressing the button.
OJD042063
OJD042064
OJD042060
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 56
457
Features of your vehicle
Door Menu
• Auto Door Lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park)
position to the R(Reverse),
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-
tion. (for automatic transaxle
shift lever)
• Auto Door Unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is in the OFF
position).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position. (for auto-
matic transaxle shift lever)
Lamp Menu
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)
If the headlamp delay function is checked :
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp
Welcome function will be activated.
• Welcome Light (if equipped)
If the welcome light function is checked :
The welcome light function of puddle
lamp will activate.
• Auto Triple Turn
(One-touch triple turn signal)
If the auto triple turn function is checked :
The lane change signals will blink 3 times
when the turn signal lever is moved
slightly.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
584
Settings Menu
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position
Memory System equipped vehicle)
(if equipped)
If the seat easy access function is
checked :
The driver's seat will automatically move
forward or rearward for the driver to enter
or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Steering position (if equipped)
If the steering position function is
checked:
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play when the steering wheel is not
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP
button in the ON position.
• Shift indicator (for manual transaxle)
If the shift indicator function is checked :
The shift indicator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Manual
transaxle shift indicator” in this section.
• AVG fuel ECO Reset
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refuel-
ing.
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-
my will not reset auto-
matically when you drive
after refueling. You can
reset the average fuel
economy by pressing
the button for more
than 1 second when the
average fuel economy is
displayed.
• Language
Choose the language you prefer within
the LCD display.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 58
459
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (SUPERVISION)
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
5. Turn signal indicators
6. LCD display
OJD042038R
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to "Gauges" in the
following pages.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
604
Instrument panel illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity
can be adjusted as follows:
• Ignition switch in the ON position
• Pressing the upper or lower part of the
switch
The illumination intensity is shown on the
instrument cluster LCD display.
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle
speed.
The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-
ters per hour and/or miles per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
OJD042047R
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
OJD042044/OJD042045
■ Diesel Engine■ Petrol Engine
OJD042042
OJD042043
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 60
461
Features of your vehicle
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel tank is nearly
empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning
light may come on earlier than usual
due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
Manual transaxle shift indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired whilst driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th or 5th gear).
You can turn off the indicator. Refer to
“User setting” in this section.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
“O (Empty)” level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
OJD042046
OJD042236R/OJD042237R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:07 PM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
624
Automatic transaxle shift position
indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift lever is selected.
Double clutch transmission (DS
mode) shift indicator (if equipped)
The indicator displays which Double
clutch transmission shift lever is selected.
In DS mode, the “S” indicator displays
with “SPORTS” indicator in cluster. For
more detailed information about DS
mode, refer to the chapter 5.
OJD042235R OJD042238R
CAUTION - DCT
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorised Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe protec-
tion mode, the transaxle indicator
blinks with buzzer sound. The
buzzer beeps 3 times. In this time,
the LCD warning about safe pro-
tection mode also displays. In this
condition, the driving may not be
smoothly. If you ignore this warn-
ing, the driving condition is get-
ting worse and the system may
have problem. To return the nor-
mal driving condition, apply the
foot brake and stop the vehicle for
few minutes before driving off.
* DCT : Double clutch transmission
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 62
463
Features of your vehicle
Speed limiter indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the speed
limit control system is enabled by move
the lever up on the steering wheel.
The indicator goes off when the lever
up again to deactivate the system.
If there is a problem with the speed limit
control system, the “---” indicator will blink.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to “Speed limit
control system” in section 5.
The speed limiter indicators illuminates
on the LCD display.
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
OJD052043N
OJD042173N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
644
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Press the button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select any group as follows :
OJD042172
Engine coolant temperature gauge
User setting mode
Service mode
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING
SYSTEM*
Trip mode
* : if equipped
Trip mode A
Trip mode B
Driving information mode
Press the
▼
button for less than 1
second to select in Trip mode group
as follows :
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 64
465
Features of your vehicle
Driving information mode
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving
Information.
All stored driving information (except
odometer, distance to empty and instant
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-
connected.
1. Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel. When the remaining dis-
tance is below 50 km (30 miles), “---” will
be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
2. Average fuel economy
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average fuel
economy reset. The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
To clear the average fuel economy to
zero (--.-), do as follow;
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Auto Reset”
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueling more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (---).
• When the “AVG Fuel Economy” of
“User Setting” is in the “Manual Reset”
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consump-
tion is displayed, clears the average fuel
consumption to zero (--.-).
3. Instant fuel economy
(L/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption during the last few sec-
onds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving habits,
and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty is an estimate
of the available driving distance. This
value may differ from the actual driv-
ing distance.
OJD042175N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
664
Trip mode (A, B)
This mode indicates 3 kinds of driving
Information.
All stored driving information (except
odometer, distance to empty and instant
fuel economy) resets if the battery is dis-
connected.
1. Tripmeter (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
2. Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going whilst the
engine is running.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is dis-
played, clears the average speed to zero
(---).
3. Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going whilst the
engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(0:00).
OJD042174N
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 66
467
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to “Lane departure
warning system” in section 5.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“130°C” position, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OJD042176R OJD042180
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
684
Service mode
This mode calculates when you need a
scheduled maintenance service (mileage
or days)
If you want to see the service mode when
other modes are displayed, press the
button less than 1 second.
If you do not have your vehicle serviced
according to the scheduled maintenance
service on the LCD display, this LCD dis-
play will show the elapsed mileage or days.
If you want to reset the maintenance
schedule, when the service required mes-
sage is displayed :
- Press the button more than 5 sec-
onds.
- " : Reset" will be shown on the LCD
display.
- Press the button again more than 1
second.
If you do not press the button within
5 seconds, " : Reset" will disappear.
If you want to change the interval of the
maintenance service schedule, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorised
Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you reset the maintenance schedule,
when the displayed service schedule
has not elapsed or elapsed without
actual vehicle service, the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
might not be match the actual service
schedule anymore.
You should comply with the displayed
service schedule on the LCD display
for the maintenance of your vehicle.
• If the battery is disconnected or dis-
charged, the displayed service sched-
ule might not match the actual service
schedule.
OJD042184ROJD042186R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 68
469
Features of your vehicle
If service mode is not activated, the LCD
display shows, like the above picture.
In this case, we recommend that you
consult an authorised Kia dealer.
User Settings
1. Stop the vehicle with the ignition
switch in the ON position or engine
running.
2. Press the button until the User set-
ting mode is displayed.
3. You can change the item by pressing
the
▼
button and select an item by
pressing the button.
Door Menu
• Auto Door Lock
Off - The auto door lock operation will be
canceled.
Speed - All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally locked if the shift lever
is shifted from the P(Park)
position to the R(Reverse),
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) posi-
tion. (for automatic transaxle
shift lever)
• Auto Door Unlock
Off - The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
Key Out - All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key
is removed from ignition switch
(or smart key is in the OFF
position).
Shift Lever - All doors will be automati-
cally unlocked if the shift
lever is shifted to the
P(Park) position. (for auto-
matic transaxle shift lever)
OJD042187OJD042185
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
704
Lamp Menu
• Headlamp delay (if equipped)
If the headlamp delay function is checked :
The Headlamp delay and Headlamp
Welcome function will be activated.
• Auto Triple Turn
(One-touch triple turn signal)
If the auto triple turn function is checked :
The lane change signals will blink 3 times
when the turn signal lever is moved
slightly.
• Welcome Light (if equipped)
If the welcome light function is checked :
The welcome light function of puddle
lamp will activate.
Settings Menu
• Seat Easy Access (for Driver Position
Memory System equipped vehicle)
(if equipped)
If the seat easy access function is
checked:
The driver's seat will automatically move
forward or rearward for the driver to enter
or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Welcome Sound
If the welcome sound function is checked :
The Welcome Sound function will be acti-
vated.
• Steering Position (if equipped)
If the steering position function is
checked:
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play when the steering wheel is not
aligned with the ENGINE STRAT/STOP
button in the ON position.
• Shift Indicator (for manual transaxle)
If the shift indicator function is checked :
The shift indicator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Manual
transaxle shift indicator” in this section.
• AVG fuel ECO Reset
Auto Reset - The average fuel economy
will reset automatically
when you drive after refuel-
ing.
Manual Reset - The average fuel econo-
my will not reset auto-
matically when you drive
after refueling. You can
reset the average fuel
economy by pressing
the button for more
than 1 second when the
average fuel economy is
displayed.
• Speed Gauge Scale
- 100% : The size of the numbers on
speed gauge is normal state.
- 110% : The size of the numbers on
speed gauge will increase.
• Unit
You can choose the displayed unit in the
instrument cluster “km” or “mile”.
• Language
Choose the language you prefer within
the LCD display.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 70
471
Features of your vehicle
LCD display information
Sunroof open
If driver removes the ignition key (Smart
key : turns off the engine) and opens the
driver-side door when the sunroof is not
fully closed, warning message will appear
on the LCD display. Also, the warning
chime sounds for approximately 7 sec-
onds.
Illumination intensity
The illumination intensity of the instru-
ment panel is shown when adjusting it
with the illumination control switch.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
panel illumination” in section 4.
Turn on fuse switch (mode switch)
The notice appears to inform the driver to
turn on the fuse switch in the instrument
panel under the steering wheel.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in sec-
tion 7.
OJD042078/OJD042215
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042079/OJD042214
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042240/OJD042188
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:08 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
724
Parking assist warning (if equipped)
Displays the area an obstacle is detected
whilst moving forward or rearward.
For more details, refer to “Parking assist
system” in section 4.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
If you start the engine when the steering
wheel is turned 90 degrees to the left (or
right) after a couple of seconds, “Align
steering wheel” illuminates on the LCD
display for 5 seconds.
Turn the steering wheel to the right (or left)
and make it turned to the left (or right) less
than 30 degrees.
For vehicle’s equipped with smart
key system
Key is not in vehicle
If the smart key is not in the vehicle and
if any door is opened or closed with the
engine start/stop button in the ACC, ON,
or START position, the warning illumi-
nates on the LCD display. Also, the chime
sounds for 5 seconds when the smart
key is not in the vehicle and the door is
closed.
Always have the smart key with you.
OJD042163/OJD042196
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042164/OJD042211
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042073/OJD042205
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 72
473
Features of your vehicle
Key is not detected
If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is
not detected and you press the engine
start/stop button, the warning illuminates
on the LCD display for 10 seconds. Also,
the immobiliser indicator blinks for 10
seconds.
Press start with smart key
If you press the engine start/stop button
whilst the warning “Key is not detected”
illuminates the warning “Press the start
button with smart key” illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
immobiliser indicator blinks for 10 sec-
onds.
Low key battery
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the OFF position when the smart key in
the vehicle discharges, the warning illu-
minates on the LCD display for about 10
seconds. Also, the warning chime
sounds once.
Replace the battery with a new one.
OJD042072/OJD042204
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042075/OJD042207
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042066/OJD042198
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
744
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for automatic transaxle)
If the engine start/stop button changes to
the ACC position twice by pressing the
button repeatedly without depressing the
brake pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
brake pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(for manual transaxle)
If the engine start/stop button turns to the
ACC position twice by pressing the but-
ton repeatedly without depressing the
clutch pedal, the warning illuminates on
the LCD display for about 10 seconds to
indicate that you should depress the
clutch pedal to start the engine.
Shift to "P" position (for Auto transaxle)
If you try to turn off the engine without the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will turn to the
ACC position. If the button is pressed
once more it will turn to the ON position.
The warning illuminates on the LCD dis-
play for about 10 seconds to indicate that
you should press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position to turn off the engine.
Also, the warning chime sounds for about
10 seconds. (if equipped)
OJD042070/OJD042202
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042071/OJD042203
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042065/OJD042197
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 74
475
Features of your vehicle
Press start button again
If you can not operate the engine
start/stop button when there is a problem
with the engine start/stop button system,
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds
and the chime sounds continuously to
indicate that you could start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
once more.
The chime will stop if the engine
start/stop button system works normally
or the theft alarm system is armed.
If the warning illuminates each time you
press the engine start/stop button, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine
If you try to start the engine with the shift
lever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)
position, the warning illuminates for
about 10 seconds on the LCD display.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in the N(Neutral) position, but
for your safety start the engine with the
shift lever in the P(Park) position.
Press start button whilst turn steering
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
is pressed, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display. Also, the
warning chime sounds once and the
engine start/stop button light blinks for 10
seconds.
When you are warned, press the engine
start/stop button whilst turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left.
OJD042074/OJD042206
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042077/OJD042209
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042067/OJD042199
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
764
Check steering wheel lock system
(if equipped)
If the steering wheel does not lock nor-
mally when the engine start/stop button
changes to the OFF position, the warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD
display. Also, the warning chime sounds
for 3 seconds and the engine start/stop
button light blinks for 10 seconds.
Check brake switch fuse
When the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected, the warning illuminates for 10
seconds on the LCD display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds in ACC.
OJD042069/OJD042201
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD042076/OJD042208
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 76
477
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
(Instrument cluster)
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). If any light that does not illumi-
nate, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention.
The following warning and indicators are
introduced in the previous pages.
• Automatic transaxle/Double clutch trans-
mission shift lever indicator
• Manual transaxle shift indicator
• Parking assist warning (LCD display)
Active ECO indicator
(if equipped)
When the active ECO is operating the
ECO indicator illuminates green. For
more detailed information, refer to
"Active ECO" in chapter 5.
Seat belt warning and
chime light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For more details, refer to the “Seat belt”
in section 3.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the SRS
is not working properly. If the air bag
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turn the igni-
tion switch to the ON position or started
the engine, or if it comes on whilst driv-
ing, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia dealer.
ECO
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
784
Immobiliser indicator
Without smart key system
This indicator illuminates when the
immobiliser key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
indicator goes out after the engine is run-
ning.
If this indicator blinks when the ignition
switch is in the ON position before start-
ing the engine, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
With smart key system
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immo-
biliser indicator illuminates, blinks or
goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC or ON position, the indicator will
illuminate for approximately 30 sec-
onds to indicate that you are able to
start the engine. However, when the
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
engine start/stop button is pressed, the
indicator will blink for a few seconds to
indicate that you are not be able to
start the engine.
• If the indicator illuminates only for 2
seconds and goes out when the
engine start/stop button is turned to
ON position with the smart key in the
vehicle, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is pressed, the indi-
cator will blink and you are not able to
start the engine. However, you are able
to start the engine by pressing the
engine start/stop button directly with
the smart key. Also, if the smart key
system related parts have a problem,
the indicator will blink.
Tailgate open warning light
This warning light illuminates when the
tailgate is not closed securely.
Low fuel level warning
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “O/E” can
cause the engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter (if equipped).
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 78
479
Features of your vehicle
EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some problems. If it comes on whilst
driving, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
Turn signal indicator lights
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
Light on indicator
The indicator illuminates when the tail
lights or headlights are ON.
Low Beam Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights are on.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
804
AFLS (Adaptive Front
Lighting System)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
If the AFLS malfunction indicator illumi-
nates, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator illuminates when the front
fog lights are ON.
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly. We
recommend that you contact an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
AFLS
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 80
481
Features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-
nal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
whilst you are driving, shift to a lower
gear for additional engine braking and
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
EPB (Electric Parking
Brake) malfunction indica-
tor (if equipped)
The EPB malfunction indicator will illumi-
nate when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approximate-
ly 3 seconds. If the warning light does not
come on, or continuously remains on we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
Also, the EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but if this occurs, it does not
indicate the EPB has malfunctioned.
For more details, refer to "EPB" in sec-
tion 5.
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on whilst driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the
ABS.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer. The normal braking system will
still be operational, but without the assis-
tance of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by
an authorised Kia dealer.
EPB
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
824
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time whilst driving, your vehicle’s
ABS and EBD system may have mal-
functioned.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. We rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorised Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS warning
light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease. In this
case, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the ESC indicator will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. We
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
ESC OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
WARNING
If both ABS and Brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work
normally. So you may experience
an unexpected and dangerous situ-
ation during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 82
483
Features of your vehicle
Auto stop indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator will illuminate when the
engine enters the Idle Stop mode of the
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system.
When the automatic starting occurrs, the
auto stop indicator on the cluster will
blink for 5 seconds.
For more details, refer to the ISG (Idle
Stop and Go) system in section 5.
For vehicles equipped with instrument
cluster type B, the indicator illuminates
on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system is
malfunctioning.
Cruise indicator (if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON-OFF button on the steer-
ing wheel is pushed.
The indicator goes off when the cruise
control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator illuminates when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator in the instru-
ment cluster illuminats when the cruise
control switch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.
The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-
nate when the cruise control cancel but-
ton O is pushed or the system is disen-
gaged.
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on whilst the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. We recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
SET
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
844
TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System) indicator (if equipped)
Low tyre pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator
The low tyre pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
The low tyre pressure and position tell-
tales illuminates when one or more of
your tyres is significantly underinflated.
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximately
one minute when there is a problem with
the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
For more details, refer to the TPMS in
section 6.
The low tyre pressure position telltale
illuminates on the LCD display.
Engine oil pressure warn-
ing
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-
ommend that you call an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instabili-
ty, immediately take your foot off
the accelerator pedal, apply the
brakes gradually and with light
force, and slowly move to a safe
position off the road.
CAUTION
If the engine does not stop immedi-
ately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 84
485
Features of your vehicle
Engine oil level warning
light (if equipped, for diesel)
The engine oil level warning light illumi-
nates when the engine oil level should be
checked.
If the warning light comes on, check the
engine oil level as soon as possible and
add engine oil as required.
Slowly pour the recommended oil little by
little into a funnel. (Oil refill capacity :
approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 l)
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to "Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities" in section 8.)
Do not overfill the engine oil to ensure
the oil level is not above F mark on the
dipstick.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you travel approximately 50
km~100 km after the engine warms
up, after adding the engine oil, the
warning light will go off.
• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3
times within 10 seconds, the warning
light will go off immediately. However,
when you turn off the warning light
without adding the engine oil, the light
will come on again after travelling
approximately 50 km ~ 100 km after
the engine warms up.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on whilst the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on whilst the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as soon
as it is safe to do so, turn off the
engine and check the oil level. If the
oil level is low, fill the engine oil to
the proper level and start the engine
again. If the light stays on with the
engine running, turn the engine off
immediately. In any instance where
the oil light stays on when the
engine is running, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
CAUTION
If the light comes on continuously
after adding the engine oil and trav-
elling approximately 50 km~100 km
after the engine warms up, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
Even if this light doesn't come on
after the engine has started, the
engine oil should be checked and
supplied periodically.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
864
Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL) (check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates whilst driving, it indi-
cates that a potential problem has been
detected somewhere in the emission
control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
whilst driving, or does not illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to the ON
position, we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Prolonged driving with the Emission
Control System Malfunction
Indicator Light illuminated may
cause damage to the emission con-
trol systems which could effect dri-
vability and/or fuel economy.
CAUTION -
Petrol engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power. We
recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia
dealer.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to blink in spite of the
procedure, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can worsen.
CAUTION -
Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. We recommend that the
system be inspected by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:09 PM Page 86
487
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant tempera-
ture warning light
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the tem-
perature of the engine coolant is above
120±3°C (248±5.4°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warn-
ing light illuminates, it indicates over-
heating that may damage the engine.
Glow indicator
(Diesel engine)
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-
tion. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-
minating time varies with the water tem-
perature, air temperature and battery
condition.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK/OFF position for 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up whilst the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light contin-
ues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
whilst driving, we recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light
illuminates, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehi-
cle's engine parts and injection sys-
tem of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
884
LCD DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS (INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY)
Calendar / Clock / Outside ambi-
ent Temperature (if equipped)
The monitor will display the outside ambi-
ent temperature, date and time.
To change the date, time or temperature
unit(°C ↔ °F), press the SET (2) button
for more than 1 seconds.
Then you will enter the set-up mode and
mode changes in the following order as
you press the SET (2) button less than 1
second.
HOUR → MINUTE → YEAR → MONTH
→ DAY → 12H/24H → TEMPERATURE
UNIT CHANGE → Escape set-up mode
Press the SET (2) button less than 1 sec-
ond to select the mode and set the data
using the UP (1, ) and DOWN (1, )
button whilst the selected setting mode
blinks.
To cancel the SET UP mode, do one of
the following :
- Press the SET button less than 1 sec-
ond in set-up temperature unit change
mode
- Press the SET button more than 1 sec-
ond in any set-up mode
- After 15 seconds without any key press
- Ignition is On or OFF in Set-up mode
- Battery is disconnected
Door and tailgate open display
The monitor will display the correspon-
ding door or tailgate that is not closed
securely.
OJD042142R
OJD042145R
OJD042143R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 88
489
Features of your vehicle
TPMS (if equipped)
The monitor will display the correspon-
ding tyre that is low with pressure.
For details, see Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System on chapter 6.
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy when:
• Ignition ON
• Temperature range: approximately below
4°C (39.2°F).
The warning light will blink for 10 sec-
onds and then illuminate. Also, the warn-
ing chime will sound.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
whilst driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-
den braking or sharp turning, etc.
OJD042144R OJD042146R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
904
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intend-
ed to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the indi-
cator on the rear parking assist OFF
button is not illuminated.
If you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the rear
parking assist OFF button again. (The
indicator on the button will illuminate.)
To turn the system on, press the button
again. (The indicator on the button will
go off.)
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not be
activated correctly.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
whilst backing up.
OJD042080R
OJD042084
OJD042242
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Sensors
Sensors
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 90
491
Features of your vehicle
• The sensing distance whilst the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 61 cm (47
in. to 23.6 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently
• When an object is 60 cm to 31 cm
(23.6 in. to 12.2 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more frequent-
ly
• When an object is within 30 cm (11.8
in.) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Type of the warning indicator
(if equipped)
*1: It indicates the range of sensed object
by each sensor. (Left, Centre, Right)
❈ In case the object is between or close
to the sensors, the indicator could be
different.
Distance from
object
Warning indicator
61cm ~ 120 cm
(24 in. ~ 47 in.)
31cm ~ 60 cm
(12.2 in. ~ 23.6 in.)
Less than 30 cm
(11.8 in.)
*
1
*
1
*
1
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
924
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the sensor.
7. Trailer towing.
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) and narrower than 14 cm (6 in.)
in diameter.
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 30 cm (11.8 in.) from the sen-
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 92
493
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the vehi-
cle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
944
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle by
chiming or displaying the area an obsta-
cle is detected on the instrument cluster
if any object is sensed within the distance
of 60 cm (24 in.) (Type A) or 100 cm
(39.4 in.) (Type B) in front and 120 cm
(47 in.) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limited.
Whenever moving pay as much attention
to what is in front and behind of you as
you would in a vehicle without a parking
assist system.
Operation of the parking assist
system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the park-
ing assist system button is pressed
with the ignition switch ON.
Type A
The indicator of the parking assist sys-
tem button turns on automatically and
activates the parking assist system
when you shift the gear to the
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS
button. It will turn off automatically
when you drive above 40 km/h(24.8
mph) except in the case when the
parking assist system button is
pressed with the ignition switch ON.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supple-
mentary function. The driver must
check the front and rear view. The
operational function of the parking
assist system can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibility
rests always with the driver.
OJD042081R
OJD042085
OJD042084
OJD042242
■ Rear, 5 Door
■ Front
■ Rear, Wagon
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
SS
SS
ee
ee
nn
nn
ss
ss
oo
oo
rr
rr
ss
ss
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 94
495
Features of your vehicle
Type B
The indicator of the parking assist sys-
tem button turns on automatically and
activates the parking assist system
when you shift the gear to the
R(Reverse) position or press the SPAS
button. It will turn off automatically
when you drive above 40 km/h(24.8
mph).
• If the vehicle speed is above 10km/h
(6.2 mph), the parking assist system
will not operate.
• The sensing distance whilst moving for-
ward is approximately 60 cm (24 in.)
(Type A) or 100 cm (39.4 in.) (Type B)
when you are driving less than 10 km/h
(6.2 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
✽✽
NOTICE
It may not operate if it’s distance from
the object is already less than approxi-
mately 25 cm when the system is ON.
✽
✽
NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration accord-
ing to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
Type of warning indicator and sound
: with Warning sound
: without Warning sound
Distance from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
100cm~61cm Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently (Type B)
120cm~61cm Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
60cm~31cm
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
30cm
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
964
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not oper-
ate normally when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when moisture
melts.)
2. Sensor is covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water, or the sensor
cover is blocked. (It will operate nor-
mally when the material is removed or
the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Sensor is stained with foreign matter
such as snow or water. (Sensing range
will return to normal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such
as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or
gradient.
2. Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes can inter-
fere with the sensor.
3. Heavy rain or water spray.
4. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5. Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease when:
1. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
and narrower than 14 cm in diameter.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sensor
frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
CAUTION
• This system can only sense
objects within the range and loca-
tion of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other
areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim
objects, such as poles or objects
located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
• Be sure to inform any drivers of
the vehicle that may be unfamiliar
with the system regarding the
systems capabilities and limita-
tions.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 96
497
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound sequen-
tially depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
2. The parking assist system may mal-
function if the vehicle bumper height
or sensor installation has been modi-
fied. Any non-factory installed equip-
ment or accessories may also interfere
with the sensor performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects less
than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may
sense an incorrect distance. Use with
caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow or water, the sensor may be
inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor with any hard objects that could
damage the surface of the sensor.
Sensor damage could occur.
✽
✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors,
it can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, or objects located
between sensors may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more of
the below occurs you may have a mal-
function in the rear parking assist sys-
tem.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants related to a parking assist
system. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual
inspection to make sure the vehicle
is clear of all obstructions before
moving the vehicle in any direction.
(blinks)
• is displayed. (if equipped)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
984
The Smart Parking Assist System helps
drivers park their vehicle by using sen-
sors to measure parallel parking spaces,
control the steering wheel to semi-auto-
matically park the car and provide
instruction on the LCD display to help
through parking.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The vehicle will not stop for pedestri-
ans or objects that may be in its path,
so the driver must monitor the
manoeuvre.
• Use the system only in parking lots
and places used for parking.
• The system does not work if there is
no car parked in front of the parking
space you are planning to park or if it
is a diagonal parking space.
• After parking your vehicle using the
system, the vehicle may not be parked
at the exact spot you have wished. For
example, the space between your vehi-
cle and wall may not be the distance
you have desired.
• Deactivate the system and park your
vehicle manually, when the situation
requires parking manually.
• The Parking Assist System's front and
rear warning sound activates when
the Smart Parking Assist System is
activated.
• After searching for a parking space is
completed, the Smart Parking Assist
System will be canceled if the Parking
Assist System is cancelled by pressing
the button to the OFF position.
SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVF041306R
WARNING
• The Smart Parking Assist System
should only be considered as a
supplementary function. The driv-
er must check the front and rear
view for objects. The operational
function of the Smart Parking
Assist System can be affected by
many factors and conditions of the
surroundings, so the responsibili-
ty rests always with the driver.
• The system may not operate nor-
mally if the vehicle needs wheel
alignment adjustment. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
• If you use a different tyre or wheel
size rather than the size recom-
mended by the Kia dealer, the sys-
tem may not work properly. Always
use the same size tyre and wheel.
• If you use additional frame on
license plate then SPAS may gen-
erate abnormal warning sound.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 98
499
Features of your vehicle
Operating condition
The system will help park the vehicle in
the middle or back of a parked vehicle.
Use the system when all the below con-
ditions are met.
• When the parking space is a straight
line
• When parallel parking is required
• When there is a parked vehicle
• When there is enough space to move
the vehicle
Non-operating condition
Never use the Smart Parking Assist
System in the below conditions.
• Curved parking space
• Inclined roads
• A vehicle loaded with longer or wider
cargo compared to the vehicle
• Diagonal parking space
• Parking space with trash, grass or bar-
riers
• Heavy snow or rain
• A pole close to the parking line
• Bumpy roads
• A vehicle equipped with a snow chain
or spare tyre
• Tyre pressure lower or higher than the
standard tyre pressure
• A trailer connected to the vehicle
• Slippery or uneven road
• Big vehicles such as buses or trucks
parked
• Sensor covered with foreign matter,
such as snow or water
• Moisture frozen on the sensor.
• A motorcycle or bicycle parked
• A trash can or obstacle near
• Heavy wind
• Wheel changed to an unauthorised
size
• A problem with the wheel alignment
• Next to a garden or bush
• A accessory installed on the detective
area the of sensors (such as number
plate holder)
• Vehicle leaned severely to one side
• Strong sunlight or very cold weather
• Ultrasonic interference other vehicle's.
Such as horn sounds of other vehicles,
motorcycle's engine noise, air brake
noise of heavy vehicles and with the
other vehicle's parking assist system
working.
OVF041307R
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
1004
WARNING
Do not use the Smart Parking
Assist System in the following con-
ditions for unexpected results may
occur and cause a serious accident.
1. Parking on inclines
The driver must apply the accelera-
tor and brake pedal when parking
on inclines. If the driver is unfamil-
iar with applying the accelerator
and brake pedal, a car accident may
occur.
(Continued)
OJD042156
(Continued)
2. Parking in snow
Snow may interfere with sensor
operation or the system may cancel
if the road is slippery whilst park-
ing. Also, if the driver is unfamiliar
with applying the accelerator and
brake pedal, a car accident may
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3. Parking in narrow space
The system may not search for
parking spaces if the space is too
narrow. Even if it operates always
be careful.
(Continued)
OJD042157
OJD042158
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:10 PM Page 100
4 101
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
4. Parking diagonal
The system is a supplemental for
parallel parking. Diagonal line park-
ing is not available. Even if the vehi-
cle is able to enter the space, do
not operate the Smart Parking
Assist System. The system will
attempt parallel parking.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. Parking in uneven road
Parking in uneven roads, the driver
needs to properly apply the pedal
(clutch, accelerator or brake). If not,
the system may cancel when the
vehicle slips or an accident may
occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6. Parking behind a truck
An accident may occur when park-
ing behind a vehicle higher than
yours. For example, bus, truck, etc.
(Continued)
OVF041308R
OJD042159
OJD042160
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
1024
How the system works
1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist
System
2. Select parking assist mode
3. Search for parking space (slowly move
forward.)
4. Search complete (automatic search by
sensor.)
5. Steering wheel control
(1) Shift according to the instruction on
the LCD display.
(2) Drive slowly with the brake pedal
applied.
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
plete
7. If necessary, manually adjust position
of vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Before activating the system check if
the conditions are possible to use the
system.
• For your safety, always apply the
brake pedal except for when driving.
(Continued)
7. Obstacle in parking space
The system may search for a park-
ing space even though an obstacle
is in the parking space. An accident
may occur if you continue to park
the vehicle with the system.
Do not solely rely on the Smart
Parking Assist System.
OVF041309R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 102
4 103
Features of your vehicle
1. Activate Smart Parking Assist
System
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button (the button indicator will
illuminate).
• The Parking Assist System will be acti-
vated (the button indicator will illumi-
nate).
A warning sound will be heard if an
obstacle is detected.
• Press the Smart Parking Assist
System button again for more than 2
seconds to turn off the system.
• The Smart Parking Assist System
defaults to the OFF position whenever
the ignition switch is turned on.
2. Select parking assist mode
• Select the parking assist mode by
pressing the Smart Parking Assist
System button with the shift lever in N
(Neutral) or D(Drive) and the brake
pedal depressed.
• The right side parallel mode is select-
ed automatically when the Smart
Parking Assist System is activated.
• To select the left side parallel mode
press the Smart Parking Assist System
button once more.
• If the button is pressed again, the sys-
tem will turn off.
3. Search for parking space
• Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately 50cm ~
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the
parked vehicles. The side sensors will
search for a parking space.
• If the vehicle speed is over 30km/h
(18.6mph), a message will appear to
notify to reduce speed.
• If the vehicle speed is over 40km/h
(24.8mph), the system will cancel.
OJD042082R OJD042219/OJD042216
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
OJD042220/OJD042217
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
1044
✽✽
NOTICE
• Turn on the hazard warning flasher if
it is crowded with other vehicles.
• If the parking lot is small, slowly drive
more nearer to the parking space.
• The search for a parking space will be
completed only when there is enough
space for the vehicle to move to park.
✽
✽
NOTICE
• When searching for a parking space,
the system may not be able to find a
parking space if there is no vehicle
parked, a parking space is available
after driving by or a parking space is
available before driving by.
• The system may not operate normally
in the following conditions:
(1) When the sensors are frozen
(2) When the sensors are dirty
(3) When it snows or rains heavily
(4) When a pillar or object is near
✽
✽
NOTICE
Slowly drive forward maintaining the
distance of approximately 50cm ~
150cm (19.6in.~59.0in.) with the parked
vehicles. If not within the distance, the
system may not be able to search for a
parking space.
4. Search complete
Whilst driving forward to search for a
parking space, the above message will
appear with a beep sound if the search is
complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to
the R (Reverse) position.
CAUTION
After searching for a parking space
is completed, continue using the
system after checking the sur-
rounding area.
OVF041310R
50~150 cm
50~150 cm
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• If the parking space is to small
the system may be cancelled at
the Steering wheel control stage.
Do not park your vehicle if the
space is too small.
OJD042221/OJD042218
■ Right side
- parallel mode
■ Left side
-parallel mode
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 104
4 105
Features of your vehicle
5. Steering wheel control
• The above message will appear if the
shift lever is in R (Reverse). The steer-
ing wheel will be controlled automati-
cally.
• The system will be cancelled if you
firmly hold the steering wheel whilst it
is controlled automatically.
• The system will be cancelled if vehicle
speed is over 7km/h(4.3mph).
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you do not follow the instructions
provided, you may fail to park your
vehicle.
However, if the Parking Assist System
warning sound (distance from object
is within 30cm: continuous beep)
occurs, slowly drive the vehicle to the
reverse direction of the detected
object after checking the surrounding.
• Always check the surrounding before
driving your vehicle if the Parking
Assist System warning sound (dis-
tance from object is within 30cm: con-
tinuous beep) is heard for the object is
close to your vehicle.
To cancel the system whilst parking
Press the Smart Parking Assist System
button or turn the steering wheel to the
left or right.
CAUTION
• Always drive slowly with the
brake pedal applied.
• Always check for objects around
your vehicle before driving.
• If the vehicle does not move even
though the brake pedal is not
depressed, check the surround-
ing before depressing the accel-
erator pedal. Be sure not to speed
over 7km/h(4.3mph).
OJD042222
WARNING
Do not put your hands between the
steering wheel whilst it is being
automatically controlled.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
1064
Gear shift whilst steering wheel control
When the above message appears with a
beep sound, shift the gear and drive the
vehicle with the brake pedal depressed.
6. Smart Parking Assist System com-
pleted
Complete parking your vehicle according
to the instructions on the LCD display. If
required, manually control the steering
wheel and complete parking your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
The brake pedal must be depressed by
the driver whilst parking your vehicle.
OJD042224/OJD042225/OJD042223/OJD042225
WARNING
Always be careful whilst parking for
other vehicles or pedestrians.
■ Manual transaxle
■ Automatic transaxle
CAUTION
Always check the surrounding
before releasing the brake pedal.
OJD042226
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 106
4 107
Features of your vehicle
The system may be cancelled in the below
conditions:
• Ignoring the gear shift message and
drive the vehicle approximately 150cm
(59in).
• The front and rear Parking Assist
System warning sound (distance from
object is within 30cm: continuous
beep) is heard at the same time.
• 6 minutes have passed since the vehi-
cle has been controlled by the Smart
Parking Assist System.
• The shift lever is changed to the P
(Park) or R (Reverse) position whilst
searching for parking space.
Additional instructions(messages)
When the Smart Parking Assist System
is operating, a message may appear
regardless of the parking order.
The messages will appear according to
the circumstances. Follow the instruc-
tions provided whilst parking your vehicle
with the Smart Parking Assist System.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In the below conditions the system
will be cancelled. Park your vehicle
manually.
1. Search for parking space
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
40km/h (24.8mph)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to R
(Reverse)
2. Steering wheel control
- When the ABS/ESC is activated
- When the vehicle speed is over
7km/h (4.3 mph)
- When you press the Smart Parking
Assist System button (the front and
rear Parking Assist System operates)
- When you shift the shift lever to D
(Drive) before entering the parking
space
- When you hold the steering wheel
firmly
OJD042227/OJD042229
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:11 PM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
1084
System malfunction
• If there is a problem with the system,
when the system is turned on, the
above message will appear. Also, the
indicator on the button will not light up
and a beep sound will be heard 3
times.
• If there is a problem with only the
Smart Parking Assist System, the
Parking Assist System will operate
after 2 seconds.
If you notice any problem, have your
vehicle checked by an authorised Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
OJD042228
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 108
4 109
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
❈ The actual rear view in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the navigation monitor whilst backing-up.
❈ For more detailed informations, refer
to supplement for navigation system.
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the vehicle in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. Both
turn signal lights will blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though
the key is not in the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch again.
OJD042089R
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibil-
ity of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and whilst backing up
because there is a dead zone that
can't see through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
OJD042086
OJD042088R
RR
RR
ee
ee
aa
aa
rr
rr
vv
vv
ii
ii
ee
ee
ww
ww
dd
dd
ii
ii
ss
ss
pp
pp
ll
ll
aa
aa
yy
yy
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
1104
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to pre-
vent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key (Smart
key : turns off the engine) and opens
the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Headlamp delay function
(if equipped)
The headlamps (and/or taillights) remain
on for same minutes (Type A: 20 minutes,
Type B: 5 minutes) after the ignition key
is removed or turned to the ACC or
LOCK position. However, if the driver’s
door is opened and closed, the head-
lights are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter or smart key twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
You can activate or deactivate the head-
lamp delay fuction. Refer to “User setting”
in this section.
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome
function (if equipped)
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
or smart key, the headlights will come on
for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter or smart key, the headlights
will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the head-
lamp welcome fuction. Refer to “User set-
ting” in this section.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlamp
delay function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, it causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 110
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Static bending light (if equipped)
Whilst driving the corner, for your sight
and safety, the static bending light turns
on automatically. The system will operate
automatically as follows:
• When vehicle speed is under 10km/h
and steering wheel angle approximate-
ly 80 degrees.
• When vehicle speed is over 10km/h
and steering wheel angle approximate-
ly 35 degrees.
• When the vehicle is at a standstill.
• When moving rearwards with one of
the above conditions satisfied the lights
will light up the opposite direction.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Position light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Position light position ( )
When the light switch is in the position
light position, the tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
OED040045 OED040046
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
1124
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light/AFLS position
(if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the adap-
tive front lighting system (AFLS), it will
also operate when the headlamp is ON.
OYN049201
CAUTION
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the instru-
ment panel, this will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the
front windscreen, the Auto light
system may not work properly.
OED040800
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 112
4 113
Features of your vehicle
High - beam operation
1. Turn the light switch to the headlight
position.
2. Push the lever away from you.
• The high-beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for
a prolonged time whilst the engine is
not running.
Flashing headlights
Pull the lever towards you. It will return to
the normal position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other dri-
ver's vision.
OED040801
OED040802
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
1144
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
You can inactivate one-touch lane
change function in “Auto triple turn” of
“User setting”. Refer to “User setting” in
chapter 4.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, bulb may be burned out or have
a poor electrical connection in the cir-
cuit.
OED040804
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 114
4 115
Features of your vehicle
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when the fog light switch (1) is turned
on after the position light is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light
switch (1) to the O (Off) position.
Rear fog light
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the
rear fog light switch (1) to the on position
when the headlight is turned on.
Also, the rear fog lights turn on when the
rear fog light switch is turned on after the
front fog light switch (if equipped) is
turned on and the headlight switch is in
the position light position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear
fog light switch to the on position again.
Rear fog light is located only on the dri-
ver’s side (for wagon).
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-
ful in many different driving conditions,
and it is especially helpful after dawn and
before sunset.
The DRL system will turn off when:
Type A
• The position light or headlight (low beam)
switch is ON.
• The engine is OFF.
Type B
• The headlight (low beam) switch is ON.
• The engine is OFF.
OED040806
OAM049046L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYN049200
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
1164
Headlight levelling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passen-
gers and the loading weight in the lug-
gage area, turn the beam levelling
switch.
The higher the number of the switch is
positioned, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper levelling position, or head-
lights may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Automatic type
It automatically adjusts the headlight
beam level according to the number of
passengers and loading weight in the
luggage area.
And it offers proper headlight beam
under various conditions.
OJD042049R
Loading condition Switch position
Driver only 0
Driver + Front passenger 0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permis-
sible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permis-
sible loading
3
WARNING
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined back-
ward according to passenger's
posture, or the headlight beam is
irradiated to the high or low posi-
tion, we recommend that the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 116
4 117
Features of your vehicle
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses the
steering angle and vehicle speed, to
keep your field of vision wide by swiveling
and levelling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO position
when the engine is running. The adaptive
front lighting system will operate when
the headlamp is ON. To turn off the
AFLS, change the switch to other posi-
tions. After turning the AFLS off, head-
lamp swiveling no longer occurs, but lev-
elling operates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes
on, the AFLS is not working properly.
Drive to the nearest safe location and
restart the engine. If the indicator contin-
uously remains on, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
OJD042090OYN049201
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
1184
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· 2 – High wiper speed
· 1 – Low wiper speed
· --- – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· O – Off
· – Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· – Continuous wipe
· --- – Intermittent wipe
· O – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
Windscreen wipers (front)
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
: For a single wiping cycle, move the
lever to this position and release it.
The wipers will operate continuously if
the lever is held in this position.
O : Wiper is not in operation
--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the
same wiping intervals. Use this mode
in light rain or mist. To vary the speed
setting, turn the speed control knob.
1 : Normal wiper speed
2 : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windscreen, defrost the
windscreen for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windscreen wipers to
ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OXM049230L/OAM049048L
■
■
Front
■
■
Rear (if equipped)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:12 PM Page 118
4 119
Features of your vehicle
AUTO (Automatic) control
(if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windscreen glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates. When
the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper
will operate once to perform a self-check
of the system. Set the wiper to off posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windscreen wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windscreen glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windscreen glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
screen glass.
OEL049900
Rain sensor
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the off position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode whilst washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windscreen glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the off posi-
tion. Otherwise, wipers may operate
and ice may damage the wind-
screen wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windscreen properly prior to
operating the windscreen wipers.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
1204
Windscreen washers (front)
In the O (Off) position, pull the lever gen-
tly toward you to spray washer fluid on
the windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windscreen is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windscreen washer
fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
driver side.
OXM049048E
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windscreen with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
the windscreen and obscure your
vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windscreen, do not
operate the wipers when the
windscreen is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 120
4 121
Features of your vehicle
Headlight washer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the head-
light washer it will operate at the same
time when you operate the windscreen
washer. It will operate when the headlight
switch is in the first or second position
and the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button is in the ON position.
The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the
headlights.
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the headlight washers periodical-
ly to confirm that the washer fluid is
being sprayed properly onto the head-
light lenses.
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
- Normal wiper operation
--- - Intermittent wipe
O - Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you to spray
rear washer fluid and to run the rear
wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiper
operation will continue until you release
the lever.
OXM049103E OXM049125L
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
1224
Interior lamp AUTO cut
• When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the transmit-
ter or the smart key, all interior lamp
will be off after a few seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in the
vehicle after turning off the engine, the
lights will turn off after 20 minutes.
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) to turn the map lamp
on or off
• /OFF (2) : The lamps are off even
if a door is opened.
• /DOOR (3) :
- The map lamp comes on when a door
is opened. If you close the door, the
lamps go out after approximately 30
seconds.
- The map lamp comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds when doors are
unlocked with a transmitter or smart
key as long as the doors are not
opened.
- The map lamp will stay on for approxi-
mately 20 minutes if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp will stay on continu-
ously if the door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position.
- The map lamp will go out immediate-
ly if the ignition switch is changed to
the ON position or all doors are
locked.
• /ON (4) : The map lamp stays on
at all times.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the lamp is turned on by pressing
the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off
even if the switch is in the OFF position
(2).
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
OGD041104
OJD042091
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 122
4 123
Features of your vehicle
Room lamp
Type A
Press the button to turn the light on or off.
If the map lamp turns on by the map
lamp switch, the room lamp will turn on.
Type B
Press the switch to turn on the
room lamp.
Press the switch O to turn off the room
lamp.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this button
is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this button
is pressed.
OGD041151
■ Type B
OGDE041216
■ Type A
OLM049105/H
CAUTION
- Vanity mirror lamp
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage
the sunvisor.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
1244
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the tailgate is opened.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
OJD042092 OJD042093/H
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 124
4 125
Features of your vehicle
Headlamp welcome
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and all
doors (and tailgate) are locked and
closed, the headlight, position light and
tail light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton (on the transmitter or smart key), the
lights will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and tail-
gate) are locked and closed, the room
lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any
of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
When all doors are locked and closed,
the puddle lamp will come on for 15 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside door
handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached with
the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock but-
ton, the lamps will turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
1264
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windscreen, refer to “Windscreen
Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
interior and exterior of the rear window,
whilst engine is running.
• To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the centre facia switch
panel. The indicator on the rear win-
dow defroster button illuminates when
the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is heavy accumulation of snow
on the rear window, brush it off before
operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
The outside mirror defroster will operate
at the same time you turn on the rear
window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
The front wiper deicer will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window
defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OJD042094
OJD042095R
■ Manual climate control
■ Automatic climate control
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 126
4 127
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042100
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Air conditioning button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Mode selection knob
5. Air intake control button
6. Temperature control switch
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:13 PM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
1284
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air
conditioning system on. (if equipped)
OJD042102R
((
((
ii
ii
ff
ff
ee
ee
qq
qq
uu
uu
ii
ii
pp
pp
pp
pp
ee
ee
dd
dd
))
))
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 128
4 129
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard
outlets, or windscreen. Six symbols are
used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor,
Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windscreen and side win-
dow defrosters.
Face/Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, B, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed towards
the face, the floor and the windscreen
with a small amount of air directed to the
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windscreen with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OJD042104
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 129
Features of your vehicle
1304
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel or vent
control lever.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control switch allows
you to control the temperature of the air-
flow in the vehicle.
To change the temperature:
• Turn the knob to the right to increase
temperature.
• Turn the knob to the left to decrease
temperature.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-
lated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
OJD042105
OJD042107R
OJD042108R
OJD042106
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 130
4 131
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging
of the windscreen and side windows and
the air within the passenger compart-
ment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible whilst driving.
OJD042101
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 131
Features of your vehicle
1324
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode
to the position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windscreen. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
screen, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OJD042103
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 132
4 133
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at
the label inside of bonnet. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely whilst driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement
MAC evaporators shall be certi-
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE
Standard J2842.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 133
Features of your vehicle
1344
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windscreen even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 134
4 135
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is found,
we recommend that the system be inspect-
ed by an authorised Kia dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of bonnet. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable
and at very high pres-
sure, the air conditioning
system should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is
important that the cor-
rect type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refrigerant
is at very high pressure,
the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is important
that the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 135
Features of your vehicle
1364
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD042109R
1. Passenger's temperature control knob
2. Dual temperature control selection button
3. Fan speed control button (Higher speed)
4. Fan speed control button (Lower speed)
5. Climate control display
6. Air conditioning button
7. Air intake control button
8. Driver's temperature control knob
9. AUTO (automatic control) button
10. Rear window defroster button
11. Mode selection button
12. Front windscreen defroster button
13. OFF button
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 136
4 137
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
You can choose either the soft mode or
fast mode to select the fan speed.
Soft mode : The wind blows gently.
Fast mode : The wind blows heavier than
the soft mode to reach the selected tem-
perature fast.
Each time you press the AUTO button,
the mode will change as follows:
Soft mode ↔ Fast mode
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows:
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled auto-
matically according to the temperature
setting.
OJD042110R
OJD042119R
Soft mode
Fast mode
n
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 137
Features of your vehicle
1384
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windscreen defrost button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually whilst other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate con-
trol, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F
-Except Europe).
✽
✽
NOTICE
Placing any object over the sensor on
the instrument panel may interfere with
the heating and cooling system.
OGD041120/HOJD042230
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:14 PM Page 138
4 139
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pressing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heat-
ing and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to con-
vert to full automatic control of the sys-
tem.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
If you push the button once, the corresponding switch will turn on, and if you push the
button again, the switch will turn off.
OJD042102R
((
((
ii
ii
ff
ff
ee
ee
qq
qq
uu
uu
ii
ii
pp
pp
pp
pp
ee
ee
dd
dd
))
))
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 139
Features of your vehicle
1404
Face-Level (B, D, F*)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windscreen.
Also you may select 2~3 modes at the
same time.
- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode
- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode
- face ( ) + floor ( ) + defrost ( )
mode
* : if equipped
Maximum (MAX) defrost mode
When you select the MAX defrost mode,
the following system will set automatically:
• The air conditioning system will be turn
on.
• The outside(fresh) air position will be
selected.
• The fan speed will set to the high
speed.
To turn the MAX defrost mode off, press
the mode button or MAX defrost button
again or AUTO button.
OJD042116R OJD042122R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 140
4 141
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the thumbwheel or vent
control lever.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the
right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the
left extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.
When set to the lowest temperature set-
ting, the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Operate the driver’s side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tempera-
ture. Operate the passenger’s side tem-
perature control to adjust the passenger
side temperature.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Also, if the passenger side
temperature control knob is operated,
it will automatically change to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the passenger side
temperature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HIGH) or lowest (LOW)
temperature, the DUAL mode deacti-
vates for maximum heating or cooling.
OJD042113
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OJD042112
OJD042107R
OJD042108R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 141
Features of your vehicle
1424
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same temperature as the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control button. The driver and passen-
ger side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature mode
between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as
follows:
Whilst pressing the DUAL button, press
the Face-Level selection button for 3
seconds or more.
The display will change from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Centigrade.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windscreen and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
OJD042117R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 142
4 143
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
button.
To change the fan speed, press the upper
button ( ) for higher speed, or press
the lower button ( ) for lower speed.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Press the A/C button to turn the air con-
ditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OJD042114R
OJD042115R
WARNING
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem may increase humidity inside
the vehicle, causing the glass to
fog and obscuring visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• The continuous use of recirculat-
ed air in the climate control sys-
tem can produce drowsiness or
sleepiness, which may result in a
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible whilst driving.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 143
Features of your vehicle
1444
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air
climate control system. However, you can
still operate the air intake buttons as long
as the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the venti-
lation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irrita-
tion has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windscreen. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
screen, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
OJD042118R
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 144
4 145
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled
with environmentally friendly refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied to your vehicle at
the label inside of bonnet. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the temperature gauge
closely whilst driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
CAUTION
• The refrigerant system should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to insure
proper and safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated
place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be
repaired or replaced with one
removed from a used or salvaged
vehicle and new replacement
MAC evaporators shall be certi-
fied (and labeled) as meeting SAE
Standard J2842.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 145
Features of your vehicle
1464
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce humidi-
ty and moisture inside the vehicle on
rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windscreen even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the climate
control air filter be replaced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 146
4 147
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air fil-
ter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a bad influ-
ence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia dealer.
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-
1234yf according to the regulation in
your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning
refrigerant is applied your vehicle at
the label inside of bonnet. Refer to sec-
tion 8 for more detail location of air
conditioning refrigerant label.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-1234yf*
Because the refrigerant
is mildly inflammable
and at very high pres-
sure, the air conditioning
system should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is
important that the cor-
rect type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
WARNING - Vehicles
equipped with R-134a*
Because the refrigerant
is at very high pressure,
the air conditioning sys-
tem should only be
serviced by trained and
certified technicians. It is important
that the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage to
the vehicle and personal injury.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 147
Features of your vehicle
1484
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the hottest position
and the fan speed control to the high-
est speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windscreen, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windscreen.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-
tion.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the position is
selected, air conditioning (if equipped)
will also be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected auto-
matically, press the corresponding button
manually.
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-
tioning will be selected automatically.
WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windscreen
heating
Do not use the position during
cooling operation in extremely
humid weather. The difference
between the temperature of the out-
side air and the windscreen could
cause the outer surface of the
windscreen to fog up, causing loss
of visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection to the position
and fan speed control to the lower
speed.
OJD042123 OJD042124
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 148
4 149
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient tem-
perature and outside (fresh) air posi-
tion will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding
button manually. If the position is
selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a
higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windscreen
1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-
tion.
2. Set the temperature to the hottest
(HIGH) position.
3. Press the button.
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
Auto defogging system
(Only for automatic climate control
system, if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibility of
fogging up the inside of the windscreen
by
automatically sensing the moisture of
inside the windscreen.
The auto defogging system operates
when the climate control system is on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The auto defogging system may not
operate normally, when the outside tem-
perture is below -15 °C.
OJD042125
OJD042126
OGDE041135
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:15 PM Page 149
Features of your vehicle
1504
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the moisture
of inside the windscreen and
operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, higher
steps operate as follow.
Step 1 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 2 : Outside air position
Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the wind-
screen
Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the
windscreen
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto
defogging system, it is automatically acti-
vated when the conditions are met.
However, if you would like to cancel the
auto defogging system, press the front
defroster button 4 times within 2 seconds
whilst pressing the AUTO button. The
indicator will blink 3 times to notify you
that the system is cancelled. To use the
auto defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected or
discharged, it resets to the auto defog-
ging status.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off is manually selected whilst
the auto defogging system is on, the auto
defogging indicator will blink 3 times to
give notice that the A/C off can not be
selected.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns on
automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off auto-
matically, when the ignition switch turns
to the OFF position.
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windscreen glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
OJD042129R
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 150
4 151
Features of your vehicle
Centre console storage
To open the centre console storage, push
the lever and then lift up the cover.
Sliding armrest (if equipped)
To move forward
Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)
then pull it forward.
To move rearward
Push the armrest rearward with your
palm.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed whilst
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover can not close
securely.
OJD042130/H OJD042131R
WARNING
Do not grab the front portion of the
armrest (1) when moving the arm-
rest rearward. It may pinch your fin-
gers.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 151
Features of your vehicle
1524
Glove box
To open the glove box, push the button
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items cool in the glove box.
1. Turn on the air conditioning. The tem-
perature of the cool box will change
according to the temperature of air
conditioning.
2. Turn the knob to the open position.
3. When the cool box is not used, turn the
knob to the close position.
✽✽
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool
box is reduced.
OJD042133R
WARNING
Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
OJD042132/H
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
whilst driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
CC
CC
ll
ll
oo
oo
ss
ss
ee
ee
OO
OO
pp
pp
ee
ee
nn
nn
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 152
4 153
Features of your vehicle
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
Luggage tray (wagon)
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-
angle (front tray), tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
Luggage side tray (if equipped)
The luggage side tray can be used for
storing small items.
• To open the cover, pull up the handle
and lift the cover.
OGD041139
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass holder.
Such objects can be thrown from the
holder in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses holder
whilst the vehicle is moving.The rear
view mirror of the vehicle can be
blocked by an open sunglass holder.
OGDE042314
OGDE042313
OJD042153
OGDE042310
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 153
Features of your vehicle
1544
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
Push the lighter all the way into the socket.
When the element has heated, the lighter
will pop out to the "ready" position.
We recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorised Kia
dealer.
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover. (Type B)
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OJD042134R
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and
coffee pots, etc.) may damage the
socket or cause electrical failure.
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
heated will cause it to overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OJD042135/H
OJD042136R
■ Type A
■ Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 154
4 155
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Type B
To use the cup holder, open the cover.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder whilst
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you may burn your-
self. Such a burn to the driver
could lead to loss of control of
the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
whilst the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans and bottles out of direct
sunlight. Placing them in a hot vehi-
cle can cause them to explode.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray
as a waste receptacle.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquid, do not
dry the cup holder at high tempera-
tures. This may damage the chrome
part of the cup holder.
OJD042137/H
OJD042138/H
■ Front
• Type A
• Type B
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 155
Features of your vehicle
1564
Rear
To use the cup holder, pull down the arm-
rest.
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only bottles should be placee in the
holder as it is written in the vehicle
“BOTTLE ONLY”.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side. (2)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and open the mirror cover (3).
To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch it
on. (if equipped)
The ticket holder (4) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
OJD042240R
OJD042139
■ Rear (if equipped)
OJD042162/H
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:16 PM Page 156
4 157
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Close the vanity mirror cover securely
and return the sunvisor to its original
position after use.
❈ To learn how to use the vanity mirror
lamp, refer to "Interior light" in this sec-
tion.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp (if equipped)
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror
lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is
closed without the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage
the sunvisor.
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
OJD042140R
OJD042154R
■ Type A
■ Type B
• Front
OJD042155
OJD042243
■ Rear, 5Door (if equipped)
■ Rear, wagon (if equipped)
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 157
Features of your vehicle
1584
Aux, USB and iPod
You can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in an
USB and also an iPod port to plug in an
iPod.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Clothes hanger
OED040354
CAUTION
• Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
• Be careful when opening and clos-
ing the doors. Clothes, etc. may
get caught between the door gap.
OJD042141R
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get electrocuted or fire
may occur.
CAUTION
• Use power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using
the accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the engine
off could cause the battery to dis-
charge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 158
4 159
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the four holders locat-
ed in the cargo area to attach the lug-
gage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact an authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation,
Kia recommends that the Kia
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
OGDE041219
■ Type A ■ Type B
OJD042152
OGDE042312
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 159
Features of your vehicle
1604
This symbol indicates the
position of the front holders
(wagon).
Cargo area cover (5 Door)
Use the cover to hide items stored in the
cargo area.
The cargo area cover will be lifted when
the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the
strap (1) from holder if you want to return
the cover to original position. To remove
the cargo area cover completely, lift the
cover to a 43-degree angle and pull it out
to the full (2). For installation of the cover,
reverse the removal procedure.
CAUTION
• When you return the cargo area
cover to its original position, hold
the cover and lower it.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the cover removed. It may dam-
age to the cover.
• The cargo area cover may be lift-
ed when the tailgate is opened.
Ensure that the luggage on the
cover is moved to a safe place.
• Since the cargo area cover may be
damaged or malformed, do not
apply excessive force to the cover
or do not put the heavy loads on it.
OJD042150
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net. ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use the luggage net when the strap
has visible signs of wear or dam-
age.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
area cover whilst driving. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 160
4 161
Features of your vehicle
Barrier net (wagon) (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a barrier
net.
When you load some cargoes on the rear
seat or rear cargo area, you must install
the barrier net behind front seatback or
rear seatback.
It is designed to help protect the heads of
the occupants by obstructing objects fly-
ing forward in frontal collisions.
There are eight hook holders on both
side of the headliner over the headrests
for upper side fixation and on the floor
behind the front seats or rear seats for
lower side fixation.
To install the barrier net
1. Open the cover for the holder position
(1) or (2) you want to install.
2. Insert the net upper shaft into the large
hole (3) and then secure by sliding into
the small hole (4).
3. Hang the net strap hooks in the corre-
sponding hook holders on the floor
behind the front seat or rear seat.
This symbol indicates the
position of the hook holders
on the floor behind the rear
seat.
OGDE042299 OJD042244
OJD032057
OGDE042302
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 161
Features of your vehicle
1624
4. Fasten the straps, by using the
adjuster (1).
To remove the barrier net
1. Loosen the straps by using the strap
adjusters and remove the strap hooks
from the hook holders.
2. Remove the net upper shaft by pulling
it through the large holes.
3. Remove the barrier net.
OGDE042303
WARNING
• Make sure that there is no slack
in the barrier net by fastening the
strap securely when installing the
net. The strap should be fastened
after confirming that the hook is
inserted into the upper hook
holder securely.
• Make sure that the seatbacks are
locked securely.
WARNING
• Do not put passengers in the rear
seat or cargo area behind the bar-
rier net.
• Do not put passenger in the rear
centre seat when the barrier net
is installed behind the rear seats.
The barrier net may interfere with
use of the rear centre safety belt.
• Do not load cargo in the area
higher than the barrier net's
upper end.
• Do not load heavy cargo in the
area higher than the seatback to
avoid accident even if the barrier
net is installed.
• Do not load cargo which has
sharp edge that can pass through
the barrier net.
• Do not apply excessive force to
the barrier net by hanging on to
the net or by suspending heavy
cargo and so on.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 162
4 163
Features of your vehicle
Cargo security screen (wagon)
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to hide
items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen
1. Pull the cargo security screen towards
the rear of the vehicle by the handle
(1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide (2).
✽✽
NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen with
the handle in the centre to prevent the
guide pin from falling out of the guide.
When the cargo security screen is not in
use:
1. Pull the cargo security screen rear and
down to release it from the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will auto-
matically slide back in.
✽✽
NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not auto-
matically slide back in if the cargo secu-
rity screen is not fully pulled out. Fully
pull it out and then let go.
OGDE042304 OGDE042305
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 163
Features of your vehicle
1644
To remove the cargo security screen
1. Push the guide pin inward.
2. Whilst pushing the guide pin, pull out
the cargo security screen.
Luggage rail system (wagon)
(if equipped)
The luggage rail system may prevent the
luggage from sliding around in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
security screen. Such objects
may be thrown about inside the
vehicle and possibly injure vehi-
cle occupants during an accident
or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehi-
cle and locate the weight as for-
ward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed, do
not put luggage on it when it is
used.
OGDE042306 OGDE042307
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:17 PM Page 164
4 165
Features of your vehicle
Build in segmentation bar
• Put both pillars (A) from the segmenta-
tion bar in the openings from the rail.
• To move the segmentation bar, put
your hand on the side of the pillar and
push down the lever arm (B).
• Make sure the pillars click into place.
• To release the belt, turn the upper ele-
ment (C) to the left or right until it
clicks.
• Now you can pull the belt (D) and
secure your luggage by putting the belt
around the luggage and put the hook
(E) into the middle of the segmentation
bar (F).
• For bulky luggage, you can hook both
hooks into each other.
• To make sure the belt locks, put the
upper element (C) back into the lock
position (1).
Applying the shackle on the guide rail
• Put the shackle (A) in the position
where the shackle is put in the rail.
• To move the shackle, press the button
(1) and move the shackle along the rail.
• Make sure the shackle is clicked into
place.
• To fix the luggage, pull up the hook (2)
in the middle cargo bay.
• Now you can mount e.g. belt to fix the
luggage in the hook.
• The shackle cannot be used in the
position where the shackle is put in and
out of the rail (3).
❈ The actual luggage room in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Shopping bag holder
CAUTION
• The segmentation bar must be
mounted and demounted with
both pillars simultaneously.
• Max. load: 30 kg with one belt
40 kg with two belts
OGDE042308
CAUTION
• Do not hang a bag weighing more
than 3 kg (7 lbs.). It may cause
damage to the shopping bag
holder.
• Do not hang the frail objects
when you drive rough road, the
objects may be damaged.
OJD042151
CAUTION
Tensile force : max. 30 kgf. for
1 shackle
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:18 PM Page 165
Features of your vehicle
1664
Mounting bracket for roof carrier
(if equipped)
To install or remove a roof carrier, you
can use the mounting bracket and cover
on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool(coin or flat blade driv-
er) into the slot and slide the cover
toward the arrow on the cover.
2. Rotate the cover half way and insert
the cover on the roof hole as the illus-
tration.
✽✽
NOTICE
To prevent loosing the roof carrier
cover, install the cover on the roof before
you install the roof carrier.
3. After using the roof carrier, install the
cover back on the roof in the reverse
order.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof in such a way that it could interfere
with sunroof operation.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
OED046090 OED046091
WARNING
Use a coin or flat blade driver when
you remove the roof carrier cover.
If you use your fingernail, it may
damage your fingernail.
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof,
take the necessary precautions to
make sure the cargo does not
damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:18 PM Page 166
4 167
Features of your vehicle
Roof rack (for wagon)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
We recommend to obtain the crossbars
and fixing components needed to install
the roof rack on your vehicle from an
authorised Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The crossbars (if equipped) should be
placed in the proper load carrying
positions prior to placing items onto
the roof rack.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo onto
the roof rack in such a way that it
could
interfere with sunroof operation.
• When the roof rack is not being used to
carry cargo, the crossbars may need to
be repositioned if wind noise is detected.
WARNING
• The vehicle centre of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt manoeuvres or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof. Severe wind
updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof. This
is especially true when carrying
large, flat items such as wood
panels or mattresses. This could
cause the items to fall off the roof
and cause damage to your vehi-
cle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo whilst driving, check fre-
quently before or whilst driving to
make sure the items on the roof
are securely fastened.
OJD042245
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
• When you are carrying cargo on
the roof rack, do not operate the
sunroof (if equipped).
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:18 PM Page 167
Features of your vehicle
1684
(Continued)
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when car-
rying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo whilst driving, check fre-
quently before or whilst driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible across the crossbars (if
equipped) and roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may dam-
age your vehicle.
• The vehicle centre of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt manoeuvres or high
speeds that may result in loss of
vehicle control or rollover result-
ing in an accident.
(Continued)
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
JD RHD 4a(~168).QXP 7/21/2012 12:18 PM Page 168
4 169
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID head
lamp, your vehicle’s audio and electron-
ic device may malfunction.
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be removed
when parking the vehicle or when
loading cargo on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
OHM048154N
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 169
Features of your vehicle
1704
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio remote control
button is installed to promote safe driving.
VOL (+ / -) (1)
• Push up the lever to increase volume.
• Push down the lever to decrease vol-
ume.
SEEK ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has different
functions base on the system mode. For
the following functions the button should
be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in
each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
MUTE (3)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
MODE (4)
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
CAUTION
Do not operate the audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
OJD042149
■■
■■
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
OJD042147
■ Type A
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 170
4 171
Features of your vehicle
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around your
city. They are intercepted by the radio anten-
na on your car. This signal is then received
by the radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
JBM001 JBM002 JBM003
FM reception AM reception FM radio station
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 171
Features of your vehicle
1724
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-
er station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
JBM004 JBM005
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 172
4 173
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Operating the device whilst driv-
ing could lead to accidents due to
a lack of attention to external sur-
roundings. First park the vehicle
before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle.
Driving in a state where external
sounds cannot be heard may lead
to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume set-
ting when turning the device on.
A sudden output of extreme vol-
ume upon turning the device on
could lead to hearing impairment.
(Adjust the volume to a suitable
levels before turning off the
device.)
• If you want to change the position
of device installation, please
inquire with your place of pur-
chase or service maintenance
centre. Technical expertise is
required to install or disassemble
the device.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen whilst
driving. Staring at the screen for
prolonged periods of time could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or
modify the audio system. Such
acts could result in accidents,
fire, or electric shock.
• Using the phone whilst driving may
lead to a lack of attention of traffic
conditions and increase the likeli-
bonnet of accidents. Use the
phone feature after parking the
vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water or
introduce foreign objects into the
device. Such acts could lead to
smoke, fire, or product malfunc-
tion.
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound can
be heard as these signs may indi-
cate product malfunction.
Continued use in such conditions
could lead to accidents(fires,
electric shock) or product mal-
functions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not touch the antenna during
thunder or lightening as such
acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-
restricted areas to operate the
product. Such acts could lead to
traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle
ignition turned on. Prolonged use
with the ignition turned off could
result in battery discharge.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 173
Features of your vehicle
1744
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate
the audio system for long periods
of time with the ignition turned off
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device, make
sure to turn off the device and
use a dry and smooth cloth.
Never use tough materials, chem-
ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as such
materials may damage the device
panel or cause colour/quality
deterioration
• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling bever-
ages may lead to system mal-
function.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service centre.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 174
4 175
Features of your vehicle
Caring for disc
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows to ventilate
before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges
or the centre hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the centre to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert more
than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods. In such circumstances, con-
tinued use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that inabili-
ties to properly play a copy protected
CD may indicate that the CD is defec-
tive, not the CD player.
NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to sequen-
tially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 175
Features of your vehicle
1764
USING YOUR USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connect-
ed when starting up the vehicle.
Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB flashdrives
are very sensitive to electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off whilst the external USB device is
connected, the external USB device
may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrec-
ognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted to
FAT 12/16/32.
•
USB devices without USB I/F authentica-
tion may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with the
human body or other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or discon-
nect the USB device in a short peri-
od of time, it may break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged or may malfunction. Therefore,
disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of
the external USB device or the type of
the files stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for recogni-
tion of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes
other than playing music files.
• Playing videos through the USB is not
supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause
trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the vehi-
cle’s audio system may not recog-
nize the USB device. In that case,
connect the USB device directly to
the multimedia terminal of the vehi-
cle.
• If the USB device is divided by logi-
cal drives, only the music files on the
highest-priority drive are recognized
by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can be
unrecognizable by standard USB I/F
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 176
4 177
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types that liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-stick
type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be
unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are
not recognizable.
✽✽
NOTICE - USB Jack Damage
• The data in the USB memory may be
lost whilst using this audio.
Always back up important data on a
personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB memory prod-
ucts which can be used as key chains
or cellular phone accessories as they
could cause damage to the USB jack.
Please make certain only to use plug
type connector products as shown
below.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 177
Features of your vehicle
1784
■■
CD Player : AC110A2EE/AC100A2EE
❋No logo will be shown if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 178
4 179
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA
➟ AM ➟ AMA.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB MP3, iPod, BT
MP3, AUX modes.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB, iPod,
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop up
screen will be displayed when [Mode
Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is displayed,
use the TUNE knob or keys
~ to select the desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
(5) ,
Radio Mode : Automatically searches for
broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):
Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
(6) / knob
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume Knob: Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(7)
Changes to FM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA.
(8)
Changes to AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of AM
➟ AMA.
AM
FM
TRACKSEEK
PHONE
5
1
On
MEDIA
6
1
On
RADIO
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 179
Features of your vehicle
1804
(9)
~
(Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-
nels) or receives saved frequencies
(channels)
CD, USB, iPod, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu
pop up screen, the number menu is
selected.
(10) ,
MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search
FM : RDS Program Type Search
(11)
Each time the button is pressed sets
screen Off
➟ Screen On ➟ Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any key
to turn the screen On again.
(12)
Radio Mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
CD, USB, iPod mode
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each
❈ Press the key (over 0.8
seconds) again to continue listening to
the current song (file).
(13)
Displays menus for the current mode.
(14)
Press the key : Moves to the
Display, Sound, Phone(Option), System
setting modes
❈ I
f the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is supported
(15) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right
CD, USB, iPod mode: Searches songs
(files) by turning the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed,
press the knob to play the song.
Moves focus in all selection menus and
selects menus
SETUP
SETUP
MEMU
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
FOLDER
PTY
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 180
4 181
Features of your vehicle
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes
selection mode
• During On state, press the or
key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Scroll Text
[Scroll Text] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
• : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or
‘Album/Artist/Song’.
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
RDM
SETUP
Off
On
OffOn
MEDIA
RADIO
On
1
RPT
SETUP
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 181
Features of your vehicle
1824
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,
Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and
Balance.
Select [Audio Settings] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound
tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader
and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Power Bass
This is a sound system feature that pro-
vides live bass.
Select [Power Bass] Set /
through TUNE knob
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically con-
trol the volume level according to the
speed of the vehicle.
Select [SDVC] Set in 4 levels [Off/
Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE
knob
Volume Dialogue
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Volume Dialogue] Set vol-
ume of
TUNE
knob
OffOn
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 182
4 183
Features of your vehicle
PHONE SETUP (if equipped)
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Pair Phone
To pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone, authentication
and connection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot pair
your mobile phone whilst driving the vehi-
cle. First park your vehicle before use.
Select [Pair Phone] Set through TUNE
knob
➀ Search for device names as displayed
on your mobile phone and connect.
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
❈ The device name and passkey will be
displayed on the screen for up to 3
minutes. If pairing is not completed
within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone
pairing process will automatically be
canceled.
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing will
automatically be followed by connection.
❈ It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled
mobile phones.
3
SETUP
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 183
Features of your vehicle
1844
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones will
be displayed.
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently
connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Connect Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not cur-
rently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile phone.
➂ Connection completion is displayed.
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected
phone and select a new phone to con-
nect.
Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected mobile
phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is dis-
played.
Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (priori-
ty) of automatic connection for the paired
mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Priority]
➀ Select [ Phone] in the [Setup]
➁ Select [Phone List]
➂ From the paired phones, select the
phone desired for No.1 priority.
Select [ Priority]
❈ Once the connection sequence (priori-
ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority
mobile phone will be connected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be con-
nected: Automatically attempts to con-
nect the most recently connected
phone.
- Cases when the most recently con-
nected phone cannot be connected:
Attempts to connect in the order in
which paired phones are listed.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 184
4 185
Features of your vehicle
Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through TUNE knob Select
[Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
❈ When attempting to delete a currently
connected phone, the phone is first
disconnected.
• When you delete a mobile phone, lt's
phone book will also be erased.
• For stable
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
communication, delete the mobile phone
from the audio and also delete the audio
from your mobile phone
Phone book Download
This feature is used to download a phone
book and call histories into the audio sys-
tem.
Select [Phone] Select [ History]
[ P.BOOK] through
TUNE
knob
•
The download feature may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
• If a different operation is performed
whilst a phone book is being down-
loaded, downloading will be discontin-
ued. The phone book already down-
loaded will be saved.
• When downloading a new phone book,
delete all previously saved phone book
before starting download.
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it is
possible to automatically download a
new phone book and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set /
through TUNE knob
Audio Streaming
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled
mobile phone
can be played through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set /
through TUNE knob
•
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
Outgoing Volume
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party whilst
on a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set vol-
ume through
TUNE
knob
Off
On
Off
On
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 185
Features of your vehicle
1864
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system.
Select [
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
System Off] Set through TUNE
knob
❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-
connect the currently connected phone
and turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system off.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology System
To use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
when the system is currently off, follow
these next steps.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
through the Key
Press the key Screen Guidance
❈ Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
functions can be
used and displays guidance.
• Turning On
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
through the Key
Press the key Select [Phone]
through TUNE knob or key
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
will be
displayed.
➁ On the screen, select to turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
and
display guidance.
❈ If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
system is turned on, the system will
automatically try to connect the most
recently connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
con-
nection may become intermittently dis-
connected in some mobile phones. Follow
these next steps to try again.
1)
Turn the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
function within the mobile phone
ON/OFF and try to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power ON/OFF and
try to connect again.
3)
Completely remove the mobile phone
battery, reboot, and then try to connect
again.
4) Reboot the audio system and try to con-
nect again
5) Delete all paired devices in your mobile
phone and the audio system and pair
again for use.
YES
3
SETUP
SETUP
PHONE
PHONE
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 186
4 187
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is supported
Press the key Select [
System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
If the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature is not supported
Press the key Select [
System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed
on the left side whilst the total system
memory is displayed on the right side.
VRS Mode
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal and
Expert modes.
Select [VRS Mode] Set through
TUNE
knob
• Normal : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed instructions
during voice command operation.
• Expert : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When using
Expert mode, guidance instructions can
be heard through the [Help] or [Menu]
commands.
3
SETUP
4
SETUP
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 187
Features of your vehicle
1884
Language
This menu is used to set the display and
voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through TUNE
knob
❈ The system will reboot after the lan-
guage is changed.
❈ Language support by region
-
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 188
4 189
Features of your vehicle
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
Press the
(, )
key
to change the mode in order
: FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA
: FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
: AM
➟
AMA
•
[Mode Pop up] On state : Displays the
change radio mode pop up screen.
Whilst the pop up screen is displayed, you
can change the radio mode
through the
tune knob or ~ keys.
Adjust Volume
Turn the VOL knob left/right to adjust
the volume.
SEEK
Press the ( , )key
,
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches for
the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ( , ) key
~
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency saved in
the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Pressing and holding the
desired key from ~ will
save the currently playing broadcast to
the selected key and sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the ( , ) key
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each. After scanning all
frequencies, returns and plays the cur-
rent broadcast frequency.
Selecting through manual search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust
the frequency.
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
TA/SCAN
AMFMRADIO
61
61
AMFMRADIO
TRACKSEEK
AMFMRADIO
51
AM
FM
RADIO
AMFMRADIO
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 189
Features of your vehicle
1904
Traffic Announcement (TA)
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds): Set
/
TA
Traffic Announcement) mode.
PTY Up/Down
• Press the , key
when searching PTY in RDS
Broadcasting Program Type selection.
MENU
Within key are the AST, AF,
Region and News functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the key Set [ AST]
through TUNE knob or key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save fre-
quencies with superior reception to
presets
~
. If no frequencies
are received, then the most recently
received frequency will be broadcast.
❈ Saves only to the Preset memory
~ of FMA or AMA mode.
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the key Set [ AF]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Alternative Frequency option can be
turned On/Off.
Region
Press the key Set [ Region]
through TUNE knob or key.
The Region option can be turned On/Off.
News
Press the key Set [ News]
through TUNE knob or key.
The News option can be turned On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound volume
upon receiving News or Traffic information.
The info volume can be controlled by
turning the VOL knob left/right whilst a
news or traffic broadcast is playing.
❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio
menus.
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
61
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
FOLDER
PTY
OffOn
TA/SCAN
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 190
4 191
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod / My Music
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD➟USB(iPod)➟AUX
➟My Music➟BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on the
screen.
❈ The CD is automatically played when
a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Song Infomation
Press the key Select [ Display]
through the TUNE knob or key
Select [Song Info] Media Display
• [Song Info] : The screen display info
can be changed to Album/Artist/Song
name.
Repeat
Whilst song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod, My Music
mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing
the key (under 0.8 seconds)): Repeats
the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (Pressing and holding
the key (over 0.8 seconds)): repeats all
files within the current folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
Random
Whilst song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all songs in
random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files
within the current folder in random
order.
iPod mode: ALB RDM on screen
• Album Random (Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files
within albums of the current category in
random order.
MP3 CD, USB, iPod mode: ALL RDM on
screen
• All Random (pressing and holding the
key (over 0.8 seconds)): Plays all files in
random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn off
repeat.
2
RDM
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
1
RPT
SETUP
MEDIA
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 191
Features of your vehicle
1924
Changing Song/File
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the current song from
the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 1 second, the previous song is
played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds the song.
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds): Fast forwards the song.
Scan
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-
onds starting from the next song.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in
iPod mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
Whilst file is playing (Folder
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
Whilst file is playing (Folder
Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the
TUNE knob, the first file within the
selected folder will be played.
❈ In iPod mode, moves to the Parent
Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE
knob : Searches for
songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-
ed song (file).
FOLDER
PTY
TA/SCAN
TA/SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 192
4 193
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key to
set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder
Repeat, All Random, Information, and
Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 193
Features of your vehicle
1944
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
• This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the copied
Music in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed whilst copy-
ing is in progress, a pop up asking you
whether to cancel copying is dis-
played.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod, AUX) whilst
copying is in progress, copying is can-
celed.
❈ Music will not be played whilst copying
is in progress.
MENU : iPod
In iPod mode, press the key to
set the Repeat, Album Random, All
Random, Information and Search fea-
tures.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
Album Random
Press the key Set [ AlbRDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays albums within the currently playing
category in random order.
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 194
4 195
Features of your vehicle
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently play-
ing category in random order.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current song.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• Some iPod models may not support
communication protocol and files may
not properly play.
Supported iPod models:
- iPod Mini
®
- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic) genera-
tion
- iPod Nano
®
1st~4th generation
- iPod Touch
®
1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different from
the order searched in the audio system.
• If the iPod is disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:
Refer to iPod manual)
• An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery.
• Some iPod devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
-interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capa-
bility (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ). The
device can play, but it will not be con-
trolled by the audio system.
• To use iPod features within the audio, use
the cable provided upon purchasing an
iPod device.
• Skipping or improper operation may occur
depending on the characteristics of your
iPod/Phone device.
• If your iPhone is connected to both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology and
USB, the sound may not be properly
played. In your iPhone, select the Dock
connector or
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound output
(source).
• When connecting iPod with the iPod
Power Cable, insert the connector to the
multimedia socket completely. If not
inserted completely, communications
between iPod and audio may be inter-
rupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects of the
iPod and the audio system, the sound
effects of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer func-
tion of an iPod when adjusting the audio
system’s volume, and turn off the
equalizer of the audio system when
using the equaliz
er of an iPod.
• When not using iPod with car audio, detach
the iPod cable from iPod. Otherwise, iPod
may remain in accessory mode, and may
not work properly.
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 195
Features of your vehicle
1964
MENU : My Music
In My Music mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information,
Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays all songs within the currently play-
ing folder in random order.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current song.
❈ Press the key to turn off info
display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete will
delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete by
using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select the
delete menu to delete the selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected and
deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the key
and select the delete menu.
MENU
6
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 196
4 197
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE FOR USING THE My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a maxi-
mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-
rently connected with the AUX terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start when
an external device is connected with the
AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected, you
can also press the key to change
to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless
there is an external device connected
to the AUX terminal.
❈ Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 197
Features of your vehicle
1984
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio
may not be supported depending on
the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio, you must first pair and
connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
mobile phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio
can be used only when the [Audio
Streaming] of Phone is turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Streaming : Press the
key Select [Phone] through the tune
knob or key Select [Audio
Streaming] through the TUNE
knob Set
/
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD➟USB➟AUX➟My
Music➟BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio will start play-
ing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start play-
ing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The previous song / next song / play /
pause functions may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
Changing Song/File
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
• Press the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 1 second, the previous song is
played.
Whilst song (file) is playing
key
• Press the key : Plays the
next song.
SEEK
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
TRACK
MEDIA
OffOn
3
SETUP
On
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 198
4 199
Features of your vehicle
PHONE (if equipped)
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone, you must first pair
and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-
nected, it is not possible to enter Phone
mode. Once a phone is paired or con-
nected, the guidance screen will be dis-
played.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition
(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone will be automatically
connected. Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone
will be automatically connected once
you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection,
set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
to OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
remote controller
(1) VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
(2) MUTE button : Mutes audio Volume
during a call.
(3) button : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
(4) button : Places and transfers
calls.
(5) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed
on the screen.
➂ Press the key again to connect a
call to the selected number.
Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the
key on the steering remote con-
troller.
➁ The most recently called number is
redialed.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 199
Features of your vehicle
2004
Phone MENU
Press the key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone book, Phone
Setup).
Call History
Press the key Set [ History]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The call history is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history
is displayed. (The download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones)
Phone Book
Press the key Set [
P. Book
]
through the TUNE knob or key.
The Phone book is displayed and can be
used to select a number and make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved to
one contact, then a screen showing
the mobile phone number, house and
office number is displayed. Select the
desired number to make the call.
❈ If Phone book does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download Phone
book is displayed. (The download fea-
ture may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the key Set [ Setup]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
The
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed.
For more information, refer to “Phone
Setup”.
3
PHONE
2
RDM
PHONE
1
RPT
PHONE
PHONE
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 200
4 201
Features of your vehicle
NOTE:
If you need more information about
Kia’s
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
.
Contact kia website “www.kia.com”
(OWNERS>General Info>
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
).
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology that
allows multiple devices to be connected
in a short range, low-powered devices
like hands-free, stereo headset, wireless
remote controller, etc. For more information,
visit
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
website at
www.Bluetooth.com
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features
can be used only when the mobile phone
has been paired and connected with the
device. For more information on pairing
and connecting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology endbled mobile phones,
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
• When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone is connected,
a ( ) icon will appear at the top of the
screen. If a ( ) icon is not displayed,
this indicates that a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled device
has not been connected. Your must
connect the device before use. For
more information on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phones,
refer to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology enabled mobile
phone will work only when the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology option
within your mobile phone has been
turned on. (Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ depending
on the mobile phone.)
• In some mobile phones, starting the
ignition whilst talking through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-
free call will result in the call becoming
disconnected. (Switch the call back to
your mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• Some features may not be supported in
some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone and devices.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology func-
tions may operate unstably depending
on the communication state.
• Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
settings
(e.g. pairing a phone) whilst driving.
• Some
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
-
enabled phones may not be recognized
by the system or fully compatible with
the system.
• Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
related features of the audio
system, refer your phone’s User’s
Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
operations.
•
The phone must be paired to the audio
system to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
related features.
• You will not be able to use the hands-
free feature when your phone (in the
car) is outside of the cellular service
area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground,
in a mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 201
Features of your vehicle
2024
(continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the
vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may
be difficult to hear the other person’s
voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or inside
metallic objects, otherwise communica-
tions with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system or cellular service
stations can be disturbed.
• Whilst a phone is connected through
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
your
phone may discharge quicker than usual
for additional
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference noise or mal-
function to audio system. In this case,
store the device in a different location
may resolve the situation.
• Please save your phone name in
English, or your phone name may not
be displayed correctly.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle
ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be auto-
matically connected.
Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be auto-
matically connected once you are in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
• If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power off.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 202
4 203
Features of your vehicle
VOICE COMMAND (if equipped)
• The voice recognition feature of this
product supports recognition of the
commands listed within this user’s
manual.
• Whilst using voice recognition, operating
the steering remote control or the device
will terminate voice recognition and allow
you to manually operate desired func-
tions.
• Position of the microphone is above the
head of the driver’s seat.
• Voice recognition may not function
properly due to outside noise. The fol-
lowing conditions can affect the per-
formance of Voice Recognition:
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the heating/cooling system is on
- When passing a tunnel
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
• After downloading
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone book, the system
requires some times to convert the
phone book into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition may
not operate properly.
• Upon inputting your phone book, spe-
cial symbols and numbers cannot be
recognized by voice. For example, “#
John Doe%&” will be recognized as
“John Doe”.
Starting Voice Command
• To start voice command, shortly press
the key on the steering wheel
remote controller.
• If voice command is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep”
❈ If voice command is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep-”
❈ Setting Voice command [Normal
Mode]/[Expert Mode]:
Press the key Select [ System]
through the TUNE knob or key
Select [Prompt Feedback] through the
TUNE knob Set [Normal Mode]/[Expert
Mode]
• Say the voice command.
• For proper voice recognition, say the
voice command after the guidance
message and the “Beep” sound.
4
SETUP
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 203
Features of your vehicle
2044
Skipping the Guidance Message
Whilst the guidance message is being
stated, shortly press the key (under
0.8 seconds) to discontinue the guidance
message and sound the “beep”.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Ending Voice Command
• Whilst using voice command, press and
hold the key (over 0.8 seconds) to
end voice command.
• Whilst using voice command, pressing
the steering wheel remote controller or
a different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for your voice command, shortly press
the key (under 0.8 seconds) to end
voice command.
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 204
4 205
Features of your vehicle
Monday Monday
Tuesday Tuesday
Wednesday Wednesday
Thursday Thursday
Friday Friday
Saturday Saturday
Sunday Sunday
Use tune knob Use tune knob
Volume Volume
Max Volume maxinmum
Min Volume mininmum
AST (Auto store) Automatically selects and saves
channels
No Media Empty media file in CD or USB
No File Empty media file in CD or USB
Empty File Empty media file in MY MUSIC
Info (Information) Information of playing files
Artist Artist name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Title Song name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Album Album name, MP3/CD file cur-
rently being played
Genres "Genres" is keyword for search-
ing mode of playlists for iPod
Composers "Composers" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
Playlists
"Playlists" is filtering keyword for
searching mode of playlists for iPod
Songs
"Songs" is filtering keyword for
searching mode of playlists for iPod
Audiobooks "Audiobooks" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
Podcasts "Podcasts" is filtering keyword
for searching mode of playlists
for iPod
RPT (Repeat) Audio play mode of Reapeat
F.RPT (Folder Repeat)
Audio play mode of Folder
Reapeat
RDM (Random) Audio play mode of Random
F.RDM(Folder Random)
Audio play mode of Folder
Random
A.RDM (All Random)
Audio play mode of All Random
COPY Copy MP3 file to flash memory
for MY MUSIC
Cancel copy Cancel copy mode
File copied Completed File copy
Free Free size of memory
Copy failed Copy failed
Search Search files
Loading CD Loading CD
Reading CD Reading CD
Reading Error Reading Error
Mechanism Error Mechanism Error
Ejecting CD Ejecting CD
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 205
Features of your vehicle
2064
Audio CD Audio CD
Track Audio CD song order
Reading Media Reading Media
Not supported Not supported file format
Empty iPod Empty iPod, iPod don't have
playable data
Communication Error
Communication error between
audio and iPod or usb
Delete Delete the paired phone or files
in MY MUSIC
Del.All Delete all files
Del.Sel Select files to delete
Return Return menu
List List files or paired phones
Select Files Select Files
Memory is full, Memory is full, Delete
files
Over 6000 files. can Over 6000 files. can not be
copied
Over 1000 same files
Over 1000 same files can not
be copied
System will automati
System will automatically
switchoff after 1 hour with igni-
tion off
Battery discharge Battery discharge
Start the engine
Setup Setup
Display Setup display mode
Mode Pop up This function is used to select
popup menu on or off
Scroll text This function is used to display
characters longer than the LCD
text displays
Song Info Setup display information being
played
Folder/File Display Folder/file name, file
currently being played
Album/Artist/Song Display Album/Artist/Song
name, file currently being played
Sound Setup sound mode
Audio Settings Setup Audio settings that con-
sist BASS,Middle,Treble,Fader
and Balance
PowerBass This function is used to improve
bass sound quality
Speed Dependent Vol.
Automatically adjust the volume
according to the car speed
Volume Dialogue Adjust volume level of Dialogue
Bass Bass is sound of low frequency.
It can be adjusted sound by
user
Middle Middle is sound of middle fre-
quency. It can be adjusted
sound by user
Treble
Treble is sound of high frequency. It
can be adjusted sound by user
cally switchoff after 1
hour with ignition off
Delete files
not be copied
can not be copied
Start the engine
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 206
4 207
Features of your vehicle
System?
activated
Fader Fader is sound positon between
FRONT and REAR. It can be
adjusted sound by user
Balance Balance is sound positon
between Right and Left. It can
be adjusted sound by user
Default This function is used to initialize
setting value
System Setup system or system infor-
mation
Memory Information Display used memory size
VRS Mode Setup Voice command mode
Normal Normal mode. This function is
used to set default value of
voice recognition factor
Expert Expert mode. This function is
used to set exercised value of
voice recognition factor
Language This function is used to select
user language
Deutsch Deutsch
English(UK) English(UK)
Français French
Italiano Italian
Español Spanish
Nederlands dutch
Svenska swedish
Dansk Danish
Polish
Polski Russian
The system will be The system will be
rebooted
Please change language
Please change language when
ignition ON
Bluetooth not ready
You can use BT System for a
moment Because BT system is
being initialized
Add a new Bluetooth Add a new
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device from your phone
Processing Bluetooth
You can use BT System for a
moment Because BT system is
being initialized or processing
other command
Incoming Call Receivng phone
Call Ended Call Ended
Call Rejected When there is unwanted call,
You push the button on the
steering remote controller
Unknown "Unknown" mean Headunit or
phone don't have any informa-
tion about phone number
Call is not possible Call is not possible
MIC Mute Microphone mute
Activate
Bluetooth
Activate
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Bluetooth System
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
system activated
when ignition ON
device from your phone
Please try later
Please wait
rebooted
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 207
Features of your vehicle
2084
No phone paired. Empty phone paired.
Pair a phone?
No connected phone.
No connected phone. Connect a
phone?
Phone book is empty.
Phone book is empty
Available only when This is a warning, Do not enter
the MENU about BT Setup.
When vehicle is moving
Listening... Listen to instruction of audio
Phone book Download
Downloading phone book from
phone paired to audio
Auto Download After pairing phone, audio sys-
tem automatically download
phone book
Audio Streaming
After pairing phone
, a
udio system
can support
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology streaming mode
Outgoing Volume Set outoging volume "0 ~ 5"
Bluetooth
System Off
Turn off
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Bluetooth
System ON
Turn on
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
System
Device :
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
device name
Passkey Passkey for pairing a phone
Pairing complete Pair a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
phone to the audio
Pairing failed Audio & Phone connection have
failed
Already 5 devices All 5 phones have already been
paired. Delete a previously
paired phone to pair new phone
Connection complete
Audio & Phone connection have
succeed
Connection failed. Audio & Phone connection have
failed
Priority changed Changed priority about the reg-
istered phones
Overwrite previous Overwrite previous phone book
information
Phone does not support
Phone does not support Phone
book download
No connected There are phone in the
connection list
Phone does not support
But it was actually not connect-
ed BT pairing
Downloading stopped
Downloading stopped
paired. Delete a
paired phone?
Phone book download
Bluetooth
audio
vehicle is stationary
Download?
Connect a phone?
Pair a phone?
phone book?
Retry?
Bluetooth
device
JD RHD 4b(169~).QXP 7/21/2012 1:00 PM Page 208
4 209
Features of your vehicle
■■
CD Player : AC111A2EE
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:01 AM Page 209
Features of your vehicle
2104
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND
FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Switches to Radio(FM/AM) mode.
Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ FMA
➟ AM ➟ AMA.
(3)
Switches to Media mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod)
AUX, My Music, BT Audio.
(4)
Switches to Phone mode.
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
(5) PWR/VOL knob
Power : Press to turn power on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control vol-
ume.
(6)
When pressed shortly(under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next fre-
quency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes
: changes the track, Song(file)
When pressed and held (0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the
current frequency
-
Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the
call volume.
(7)
RDS Radio mode : searches RDS pro-
gram types.
CD/USB/MP3 modes : searches folders.
PTY
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:01 AM Page 210
4 211
Features of your vehicle
(8)
Turns the monitor display on/off.
(9)
Set TA(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off
(10)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Previews each broadcast for 5
seconds each
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 seconds):
Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset
~
for 5 seconds each.
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.
(11)
Switches to Setup mode.
(12) TUNE knob
Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frequencies.
Media (CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/channels/files.
(13) RESET
Forced system termination and system
restart.
SETUP
61
SCAN
TA
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 211
Features of your vehicle
2124
Steering remote controller
(1) VOLUME
Used to control volume.
(2) MUTE
Mutes audio volume.
(3) SEEK
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast fre-
quencies saved to presets.
- Media (CD / USB / iPod / My Music / BT
Audio) modes : changes the track, file.
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches
broadcast frequencies and channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod/My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or
song(file)
(4) MODE
Each time this key is pressed, the mode
is changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA
➟
USB or iPod
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio
If the media is not connected or a disc is
not inserted, corresponding modes will
be disabled.
(5)
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice prompt,
stops the prompt and converts to voice
command waiting state
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
(6)
When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call Waiting)
When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree wait
mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree call,
switches call back to mobile phone
(Private)
- When pressed whilst calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
(7)
Ends phone call
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 212
4 213
Features of your vehicle
RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Frequency
Displays the current frequency
(3) Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6]
(4) Preset Display
Displays saved presets
(5) Autostore
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons
(6) RDS Menu
Displays the RDS Menu
(7) RDS Info
Displays RDS broadcast information
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
FMA
➟
AM
➟
AMA.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio Pop-
up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 213
Features of your vehicle
2144
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by 50kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by 9kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting /Saving Presets
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
Press the button to display the
broadcast information for the frequency
saved to each button.
✽✽
NOTICE
Whilst listening to a frequency you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one of
the [1] ~ [6] preset buttons (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to save the current frequency to
the selected preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
✽✽
NOTICE
Whilst Auto Store is operating, pressing
the [Cancel] button again will cancel
Auto Store and restore the previous fre-
quency.
61
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 214
4 215
Features of your vehicle
RDS Menu
Press the button to set the AF
(Alternative Frequency), Region and
News features.
✽✽
NOTICE
The RDS Menu is not supported within
AM or AMA mode.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
✽✽
NOTICE
Once scan is complete, the previous fre-
quency will be restored.
Whilst Scan is operating, pressing the
key will cancel the scan opera-
tion.
Program Type
Press the key to search for
the desired Program type.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired program type.
Once you find the desired program type,
press the TUNE knob.
After selecting the desired Program Type
and whilst the Program Type is blinking
(approximately 5 seconds), pressing the
key will allow you to select a
different Program Type broadcast.
TA (Traffic Announcement)
Press the key to turn the TA
(Traffic Announcement) feature
On/Off.
TA
PTY
FOLDER
PTY
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 215
Features of your vehicle
2164
MEDIA MODE
Switching to Media Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of
CD
➟
USB(iPod)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio.
If [Pop-up Mode] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 216
4 217
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track
(4) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(5) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(6) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track
(7
) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(9) List
Moves to the list screen
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 217
Features of your vehicle
2184
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
Whilst playing, press the but-
ton to pause and press button
to play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are support-
ed. Other discs may result in recogni-
tion failure (e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track infor-
mation is included within the audio
CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
track has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 218
4 219
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat
and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random
Press the button to play tracks
in random order.
Press the button again to turn the
Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired track
is displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 219
Features of your vehicle
2204
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 220
4 221
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
Whilst playing, press the but-
ton to pause and press button
to play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could take
more than 10 seconds and the list may
not be displayed or song searches may
not operate. Once loading is complete,
try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the file
has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 221
Features of your vehicle
2224
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Random Folder
➟ Random All➟ Off.
• Random Folder : Plays all files within
the current folder in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in Random
order.
PTY
FOLDER
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 222
4 223
Features of your vehicle
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the fea-
ture changes in order of Repeat ➟Repeat
Folder➟Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files within
the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 223
Features of your vehicle
2244
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file number
(4) File Info
Displays information about the current file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 224
4 225
Features of your vehicle
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
Whilst playing, press the but-
ton to pause and press button
to play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional time if
there are many files and folders within
the USB and result in faulty list display
or file searching. Normal operations
will resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 225
Features of your vehicle
2264
Searching Folders
Press the key to select
and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will
begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file infor-
mation.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ option
is set as the default display, the folder
name/file name are displayed as
detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information are
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
Folder➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Folder : Plays the files in the
current folder in random order.
• Random All : Plays all files in random
order.
PTY
FOLDER
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 226
4 227
Features of your vehicle
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the current
file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during copy-
ing will display a pop-up asking whether
you wish to cancel copying. To cancel,
select 'Yes’.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 227
Features of your vehicle
2284
iPod MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random, displays the
currently operating function
(3) Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs
(4) Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(8) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(9) List
Moves to the list screen
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 228
4 229
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod Songs
Once an iPod is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod song.
Whilst playing, press the but-
ton to pause and press button
to play.
✽✽
NOTICE
iPods with unsupported communication
protocols may not properly operate in
the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to the
previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
song has been playing for 1 seconds
will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Songs
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select and
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 229
Features of your vehicle
2304
Category Menu
Within the iPod Category menu, you
will have access to the , Home,
and features.
(1) : Displays the play screen
(2) Home : Moves to the iPod root catego-
ry screen
(3) : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed whilst
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod device.
iPod Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random, Repeat and
List features.
Random
Press the button to play songs
in random order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
Album➟Random All➟Off.
• Random Album : Shuffle Album plays
album in Random order.
• Random All : Plays all songs in
Random order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 230
4 231
Features of your vehicle
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected to
play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders, car
VCR, etc.) can be played through a ded-
icated cable.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is con-
nected with the AUX terminal, then
AUX mode will automatically operate.
Once the connector is disconnected,
the previous mode will be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an
external audio player (camcorder, car
VCR, etc.) has been connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to AUX
mode, but only output noise. When an
external device is not being used, also
remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power
connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX
jack upon use.
MEDIA
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 231
Features of your vehicle
2324
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
(1) Mode
Displays currently operating mode
(2) Operation State
From Repeat / Random / Scan, dis-
plays the currently operating function
(3) File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files
(4) File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file
(5) Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state
(6) Play Time
Displays the current play time
(7
) Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file
(8) Random
Turns the Random feature on/off
(9) Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off
(10) Delete
Deletes the current file
(11) List
Moves to the list screen
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 232
4 233
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
Whilst playing, press the but-
ton to pause and press button
to play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the current file from the begin-
ning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 seconds will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press the
TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
Whilst playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 233
Features of your vehicle
2344
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random, Repeat,
Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are dis-
played only when such information is
recorded within the MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files in
random order. Press the button again
to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file is
displayed, press the knob to select and
play.
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individually
select the files you want to delete. Once
files are selected, the button and
buttons will be enabled.
(1) : Moves to the previous screen
(2) Sellect All: Selects all files
(3) Unsellet All: Deselects all selected
files
(4) Delete: Deletes selected files
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 234
4 235
Features of your vehicle
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to delete
the selected files.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more
than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
[System] [Memory
Information]
✽
✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
• Whilst Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down whilst
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may result in
pop noises in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be support-
ed in some mobile phones.
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may not
automatically restart in some mobile
phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making
an outgoing call whilst playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
may result in audio interference.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will auto-
matically start.
Whilst playing, press the button to
pause and press button to play.
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 235
Features of your vehicle
2364
✽✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate dif-
ferently depending on the mobile phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key [Phone] button to
display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone, con-
nect/disconnect and delete features from
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly, check
whether the feature is turned off at
[Phone] [Audio stream-
ing]. If the feature is off, turn back on
and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button
once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 236
4 237
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
refers to a short-distance wireless
networking technology which uses a
2.45GHz frequency to connect vari-
ous devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phones, PDAs, various
electronic devices, and automotive
environments,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree refers to a device which
allows the user to conveniently
make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phones through the audio system.
CAUTION
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is a feature that
enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the car audio
system with a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone
allows the user to conveniently
make calls, receive calls, and
manage the phone book. Before
using the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology , carefully read the
contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations
whilst driving may lead to negli-
gent driving practices and be the
cause of accidents.
• Do not operate the device exces-
sively whilst driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 237
Features of your vehicle
2384
✽✽
NOTICE - USING UPON
CONNECTING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology PHONE
• Before connecting the car audio system
with the mobile phone, check to see that
the mobile phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology, the phone will
not be found during device searches if
the phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power is turned off. Disable the hidden
state or turn on the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology power prior to
searching/connecting with the car
audio system.
• If you do not want to automatically
connect your Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, try the following.
1. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your mobile
phone.
- For more information on Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology features within
your mobile, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
2. Turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car
audio system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- To turn off the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature in your car audio
system, go to > [Phone] and
[turn off] the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
• Park the vehicle when connecting the
car audio system with your mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology con-
nection may become intermittently
disconnected in some mobile phones.
Follow these steps to try again.
1. Turn the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone off/on and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3 Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• The Handsfree call volume and quali-
ty may differ depending on the mobile
phone.
(Continued)
SETUP
(Continued)
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle are
as follows. Some features may not be
supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technologydevice.
- Answering and placing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree calls
- Menu operation during call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
Outgoing volume)
- Download Call History
- Download Mobile Phone book
- Phone book/Call History Auto Download
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection - Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
• It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices to the car system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected at
a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired whilst
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologydevice is already connect-
ed.
• When a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is being connected, the connec-
tion process cannot be canceled.
(Continued)
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 238
4 239
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology wireless technology
Device
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
PHONE
PHONE
(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio related features will
operate within this system.
• Normal operation is possible only for
devices that support Handsfree or
audio features, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone or
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio device.
• Only one function can be used at a time
between the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio. (Whilst
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio, streaming will end upon entering
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone screen.)
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected for various reasons, such as
being out of range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology communication error,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and connected.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 239
Features of your vehicle
2404
(1) Device : Name of device as shown
when searching from your
Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device
(2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Here, enter the passkey “0000” to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering remote controller displays the
following screen. Press the [Pair] but-
ton to pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously pair
device.
Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same as
the steps described in the “When No
Devices have been Paired” section.
SETUP
PHONE
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 240
4 241
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• The waiting period during phone pair-
ing will last for one minute. The pair-
ing process will fail if the device is not
paired within the given time. If the
pairing process fails, you must start
the process from the beginning.
• Generally, most Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices will automatically
connect once pairing is complete.
However, some devices may require a
separate verification process to con-
nect. Check to see whether Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology has been proper-
ly connected within your mobile
phone.
• List of paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be viewed at
[Phone] [Paired Phone
List].
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
(1) Connected Phone : Device that is cur-
rently connected
(2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired
but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and press the
button.
SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 241
Features of your vehicle
2424
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
As a result, the “Change Priority’ fea-
ture is used to set the connection pri-
ority of paired phones. However, the
most recently connected phone will
always be set as the highest priority.
Press the key Select [Phone]
Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to change to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu. The selected
device will be changed to the high-
est priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
When a device is currently connected,
even if you change the priority to a differ-
ent device, the currently connected phone
will always be set as the highest priority.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and press the
button.
SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 242
4 243
Features of your vehicle
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press the
button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently connect-
ed device, the device will automatical-
ly be disconnected to proceed with the
deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and phone book
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
(1) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be dialed
to make calls
(2) Call History : Device that is currently
connected
(3) Phone book : Displays the Phone
book list screen
(4) Setup : Displays Phone related set-
tings
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] button
but there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download call history data.
• If you press the [Phone book] button
but there is no phone book data, a
prompt is displayed which asks
whether to download phone book data.
.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more infor-
mation on download support, refer to
your mobile phone user’s manual.
PHONE
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 243
Features of your vehicle
2444
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
(1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone num-
ber
(2) Call : If a number has been entered,
calls the number If no number has
been entered, switches to call history
screen
(3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
(4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
(1) Caller : Displays the other part’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your phone book
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
(3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
(4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the incoming call pop-up is dis-
played, most Audio and SETUP mode
features will not operate. Only the call
volume can be operated.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will auto-
matically convert to Private mode.
PHONE
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 244
4 245
Features of your vehicle
During a Handsfree Call
(1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is saved
within your phone book
(2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
(3) Call time : Displays the call time
(4) End : Ends call
(5) Private : Converts to Private mode
(6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as heard
by the other party
(7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party will
not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and missed
calls is displayed.
Press the [Download] button to download
the call history.
(1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
(2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
✽✽
NOTICE
• The call history list will display up to
30 outgoing, incoming, and missed
calls.
• Upon downloading call histories, pre-
viously saved histories are deleted.
• Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Previously saved phone book entries
are stored even if a device is discon-
nected and re-connected.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 245
Features of your vehicle
2464
Phone Book
Press the key Select
[Phone book]
The list of saved phone book entries is
displayed. Press the [Download] button
to download the call history.
(1) Contact List :
- Displays downloaded phone book
entries
- Connects call upon selection
(2) Download : Download phone book
entries
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted.
• Downloading is not possible if the
phone book download feature is
turned off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. Also, some
devices may require device authoriza-
tion upon attempting to download. If
downloading cannot be normally con-
ducted, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device setting or the screen
state.
• Caller ID information will not be dis-
played for unsaved callers.
• The download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones. Check
to see that the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device supports the down-
load feature.
PHONE
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 246
4 247
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition fea-
ture, only commands listed within the
user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation of
the voice recognition system, pressing
any key other than the key or
touching the screen will terminate
voice recognition mode.
• For superior voice recognition per-
formance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and maintain
a proper position when saying com-
mands.
• Within the following situations, voice
recognition may not function properly
due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof are
open
- When the wind of the cooling / heat-
ing device is strong
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
- When driving on rugged and uneven
roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can be
used only when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a name,
the corresponding contact must be
downloaded and stored within the
audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the phone
book data into voice information.
During this time, voice recognition
may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands natu-
rally and clearly as if in a normal con-
versation.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 247
Features of your vehicle
2484
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller .Say a
command
If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode],
then the system will say “Please say a
command. Beep~”
• If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode],
then the system will only say a “Beep~”
• To change the Normal Mode/Expert
Mode setting, go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback].
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Skipping Prompt Messages
Whilst prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
Whilst system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller (under 0.8
seconds)
The command wait state is immediately
ended and the beep ton will sound. After
the “beep”, say the voice command.
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 248
4 249
Features of your vehicle
ENDING VOICE RECOGNITION
Whilst Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller (over 0.8
seconds)
✽✽
NOTICE
• Whilst using voice command, pressing
a steering wheel remote control or a
different key will end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• In a state where the system is waiting
for a voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering remote
controller to end voice command.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 249
Features of your vehicle
2504
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options relat-
ed to [Display], [Sound], [Phone] and
[System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
(1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
(2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
(3) Night: Always maintains the bright-
ness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Pop-up Mode]
This feature is used to display the Pop-up
Mode screen when entering radio and
media modes.
When this feature is turned on, pressing
the or key will display
the Pop-up Mode screen.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can be
displayed only when two or more media
modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 250
4 251
Features of your vehicle
Scroll Text
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Scroll text]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too long
to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeatedly
scrolled. When turned off, the text is
scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Song Info]
This feature is used to change the infor-
mation displayed within USB and MP3
CD modes.
(1) Folder File : Displays file name and
folder name
(2) Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Audio Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 251
Features of your vehicle
2524
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent
Vol.]
The volume level is controlled automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
SDVC can be set by selecting from
Off/Low/Mid/High.
Voice Recognition Setting
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Volume Dialogue]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Volume Dialog.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 252
4 253
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
can be paired with the audio system.
For more information, refer to the “Pairing
through Phone Setup” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with the
audio system. Upon selecting a paired
phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the “Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
(1) : Moves to the previous screen
(2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
(3) Delete : Deletes the currently select-
ed phone
(
4) Change Priority : Sets currently select-
ed phone to highest connection priority
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING PHONE BOOKS
• Only phone books within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports phone book
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The Phone book for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded. Before
downloading, check to see whether
your phone supports the download
feature.
SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 253
Features of your vehicle
2544
Downloading Phone books
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone book
Download]
The Phone book is downloaded from the
mobile phone and the download
progress is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
copied into car phone book.
• Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be
saved for each paired device.
• Upon downloading phone book data,
previously saved phone book data will
be deleted. However, Phone book
entries saved to other paired phones
are not deleted.
Auto Download (Phone Book)
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Auto Download]
This feature is used to automatically
download mobile phone book entries
once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Auto Download feature will
download mobile phone book entries
every time the phone is connected.
The download time may differ
depending on the number of saved
phone book entries and the communi-
cation state.
• When downloading a phone book,
first check to see that your mobile
phone supports the phone book down-
load feature.
Audio Streaming
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Audio Streaming]
When Audio Streaming is turned on, you
can play music files saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
from the car.
SETUP SETUP SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 254
4 255
Features of your vehicle
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology is
turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to [Phone] and
press “Yes”.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
CAUTION
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio streaming may not be sup-
ported in some Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phones.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 255
Features of your vehicle
2564
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information related
to system memory.
(1) Using : Displays capacity currently in
use
(2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Voice Recognition Mode Setting
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Voice Recognition
System]
This feature is used to select the desired
prompt feedback option from Normal and
Expert.
(1) Normal : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
(2) Expert : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
✽✽
NOTICE
• Voice Recognition is depend on the
Audio System.
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the sys-
tem and voice recognition language.
If the language is changed, the system
will restart and apply the selected lan-
guage.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 256
4 257
Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under
0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Phone book
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command
Please say a command
Please say a...
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Phone book.
Please say the name of the phone book you
want to call.
More Help.
You can say Radio, FM, AM, Media, CD, USB, Aux,
My Music, iPod, Bluetooth Audio, Phone, Call
History or Phone book. Please say a command.
Ding~
Ding~
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Ding~
Shortly pressing the key
(under 0.8 seconds)
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 257
Features of your vehicle
2584
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in
phone book
Ex) Call “John”
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say “Call
History”, “
Phone book
”, “Dial Number” to exe-
cute corresponding functions.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Phone book
Displays the
phone book
screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a
phone book
saved in the
phone book
to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number what
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Radio
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟ FM2➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟
AMA)
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
Command Function
FM
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
FMA Displays the FMA screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
AMA Displays the AMA screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
TA on Enable Traffic Announcement
TA off Disable Traffic Announcement
News on Enable RDS News feature
News off Disable RDS News feature
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These are commands that can be used in all situations. (However, some commands may not be support-
ed in special circumstances.)
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 258
4 259
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
Play Track 1~30 If a music CD has been inserted, plays the
corresponding track.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
Search CD Moves to the CD track or file selection screen.
•
For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the
track number to play the corresponding track.
•
Moves to MP3 CD file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and
play music.
USB Plays USB music.
Search USB Moves to USB file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
iPod Plays iPod music.
Search iPod Moves to the iPod file selection screen. After,
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
Search My Music Moves to My Music file selection screen. After
manually operate the device to select and play
music.
Command Function
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth Audio Plays the music saved in connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device.
Mute Mutes the radio or music volume.
Pardon? Repeats the most recent comment.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 259
Features of your vehicle
2604
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands that can be used
whilst listening to FM, AM radio.
• Audio CD commands: Commands that can be used whilst
listening to Audio CD.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Auto Store Automatically selects radio broadcast fre-
quencies with superior reception and saves in
Presets 1~6.
Preset Save 1~6 Saves the current broadcast frequency to
Preset 1~6.
Seek up Plays the next receivable broadcast.
Seek down Plays the previous receivable broadcast.
Next Preset Selects the preset number next to the most
recently selected preset. (Example: When cur-
rently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no.
4 will be selected.)
Previous Preset Selects the preset number previous to the
most recently selected preset. (Example:
When currently listening to preset no. 3, then
preset no. 2 will be selected.)
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
AF on Enable Alternative Frequency feature
AF off Disable Alternative Frequency feature
Region Enable Region feature
Command Function
Region off Disable Region feature
Program Type Moves to the RDS Program type selection
screen. After, manually operate the device to
select a desired program type.
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Next Track Plays the next track.
Previous Track Plays the previous track.
Scan Scans the tracks from the next track for 10
seconds each.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Search Track Moves to the track selection screen. After, say
the track name to play the corresponding track.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
track.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 260
4 261
Features of your vehicle
• MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands that can be used
whilst listening to music files saved in CD and USB.
• iPod Commands: Commands that can be used whilst play-
ing iPod.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
All Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Folder Repeat Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Search Folder Moves to the folder selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Copy Copies the current file into My Music.
Command Function
All Random Randomly plays all saved songs.
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Next Song Plays the next song.
Previous Song Plays the previous song.
Search Song Moves to the song selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
song.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 261
Features of your vehicle
2624
• My Music Commands: Commands that can be used whilst
playing My Music.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands that can be used whilst playing Phone Music.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next File Plays the next file.
Previous File Plays the previous file.
Scan Scans the files from the next files for 10 sec-
onds each.
Search File Moves to the file selection screen.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will
bypass an additional confirmation process.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
JD RHD 4c(209~).QXP 8/27/2012 10:02 AM Page 262
Driving your vehicle
Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
• Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Engine START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
• Auto start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
• Condition of ISG system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• ISG system deactivation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
• ISG system malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Automatic transaxle/DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Automatic transaxle/DCT operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
• Good driving practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Active eco system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Limitation of Active ECO operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
• Parking brake - Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Electric parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
• Electronic stability control (ESC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
• Good braking practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
• Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
• To increase cruise control set speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on. . 5-53
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-54
• To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
30 km/h (20 mph) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following . . 5-55
5
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:11 PM Page 1
Speed limit control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Speed limit control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To set speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• To turn off the speed limit control, do one of the
following . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . . 5-59
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• The LDWS does not operate when. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• The LDWS may not warn you even if the vehicle leaves
the lane, or may warn you even if the vehicle does not
leave the lane when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
• Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Snowy or Icy conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Change to “winter weight” oil if necessary . . . . . . . . 5-69
• Check spark plugs and ignition system . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
• To keep locks from freezing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system. 5-70
• Don’t let your parking brake freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
• Don’t let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-70
• Carry emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
• Towbar hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
5
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:11 PM Page 2
53
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colourless, odourless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyx-
iation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate/boot open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windscreen
are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:11 PM Page 3
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tyres.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people, espe-
cially children, before putting a vehi-
cle into “D (Drive)” or “R (Reverse)”.
WARNING
Driving whilst distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The dri-
ver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:11 PM Page 4
55
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position. The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgement.
Driving whilst under the influence
of drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
OGDE051055
ACC
ON
START
LOCK
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 5
Driving your vehicle
65
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key whilst turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START posi-
tion to start the engine. The engine will
crank until you release the key; then it
returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle is
moving.This would result in loss of
directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
(if equipped) is not a substitute for
the parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in 1
st
gear
for the manual transaxle or P (Park)
for the automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel whilst the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move whilst driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an acci-
dent.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 6
57
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
✽✽
NOTICE - Kick down mecha-
nism
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
Starting the petrol engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle/DCT* - Place
the transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
❈ DCT: Double clutch transmission
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal, and clutch (if equipped).
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 7
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P(park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START posi-
tion and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is complet-
ed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position for 10 seconds, and
then to the ON position, in order to pre-
heat again.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, run the
engine on idle condition about 1
minute before turning it off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
W-60
Glow indicator light
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 8
59
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Illuminated engine start/stop but-
ton
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed. It will also go off immediately
when the theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-
tion) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop but-
ton will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Vehicles equipped with anti-theft steering
column lock
The steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft.
It locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked prop-
erly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button whilst turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
OJD052001R
White
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 9
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the OFF position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped
with anti-theft steering column lock) and
electrical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to pre-
vent battery discharge.
ON
With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
Press the engine start/stop button whilst
it is in the ACC position without depress-
ing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
whilst the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 sec-
onds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) posi-
tion.
Orange
Blue
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 10
511
Driving your vehicle
START/RUN
With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
With automatic transaxle/DCT
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safe-
ty, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automat-
ic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF
➔
➔
ACC
➔➔
ON
➔➔
OFF or ACC
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button whilst the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock (if equipped) is not a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Before
leaving the driver's seat, always
make sure the shift lever is
engaged in P (Park), set the park-
ing brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel whilst
the vehicle is in motion.The pres-
ence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move whilst driving, inter-
fere with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Not illuminated
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 11
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine
✽✽
NOTICE - Kick down mecha-
nism (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with a kick
down mechanism in the accelerator
pedal, it prevents you from driving at
full throttle unintentionally by making
the driver require increased effort to
depress the accelerator pedal. However,
if you depress the pedal more than
approximately 80%, the vehicle can be
at full throttle and the accelerator pedal
will be easier to depress. This is not a
malfunction but a normal condition.
Starting the petrol engine
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst starting the engine.
Automatic transaxle/DCT - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
5. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing the
accelerator.
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
whilst pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 12
513
Driving your vehicle
3. Press the engine start/stop button
whilst depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more whilst the engine is pre-heat-
ing, the engine may start.
Starting and stopping the engine for tur-
bocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the tur-
bocharger to cool prior to shutting the
engine off.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, a message “Key is not in the
vehicle” will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indicator
or warning will turn off whilst the vehi-
cle is moving. Always have the smart
key with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
CAUTION
Do not turn the engine off immedi-
ately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or tur-
bocharger unit.
W-60
Glow indicator light
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 13
Driving your vehicle
145
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
The side with the lock button should
be contacted directly.
If you press the smart key directly to
the engine start/stop button, the engine
start/stop button and the smart key
right angle to the direction
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
cannot start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button for 10 seconds
whilst it is in the ACC position. The
engine can start without depressing
the brake pedal. But for your safety
always depress the brake pedal before
starting the engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the engine start/stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
OJD052002R
CAUTION
If the engine stalls whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position. If the traffic and road con-
ditions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
whilst the vehicle is still moving
and press the engine start/stop but-
ton in an attempt to restart the
engine.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 14
515
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with the
ISG system, which reduces fuel con-
sumption by automatically shutting down
the engine, when the vehicle is at a
standstill. (For example : red light, stop
sign and traffic jam)
The engine starts automatically as soon
as the starting conditions are met.
The ISG system is ON whenever the
engine is running.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the engine automatically starts by
the ISG system, some warning lights
(ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking
brake warning light) may turn on for a
few seconds.
This happens because of low battery
voltage. It does not mean the system has
malfunctioned.
Auto stop
To stop the engine in idle stop mode
1. Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 5 km/h (3 mph).
2. Shift into N (Neutral) position.
3. Release the clutch pedal.
The engine will stop and the green AUTO
STOP( ) indicator on the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052026
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 15
Driving your vehicle
165
Also, a message "Auto Stop" will appear
on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
You must reach a speed of at least 10
km/h (6 mph) since last idle stop.
✽
✽
NOTICE
If you unfasten the seatbelt or open the
driver's door (or engine bonnet) in auto
stop mode, the following will happen:
• The ISG system will deactivate (the
light on the ISG OFF button will illu-
minate).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A message "Auto Start Deactivated
Start Manually" will appear on the
LCD display.
OJD052003ROJD052036/OJD052049
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052040/OJD052053
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 16
517
Driving your vehicle
Auto start
To restart the engine from idle stop
mode
• Press the clutch pedal when the shift
lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
• A message "Press Clutch Pedal for
Auto Start" will appear on the LCD dis-
play.
• The engine will start and the green
AUTO STOP ( ) indicator on the
instrument cluster will go out.
The engine will also restart automati-
cally without the driver’s any actions
if the following occurs:
- The fan speed of manual climate con-
trol system is set above the 3rd position
when the air conditioning is on.
- The fan speed of automatic climate
control system is set above the 6th
position when the air conditioning is on.
- When a certain amount of time has
passed with the climate control system
on.
- When the defroster is on.
- The brake vaccum pressure is low.
- The battery charging status is low.
- The vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h
(3 mph).
The green AUTO STOP ( ) indicator
on the instrument cluster will blink for 5
seconds and a message “Auto Start” will
appear on the LCD display.
OJD052041/OJD052054
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052037/OJD052050
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:12 PM Page 17
Driving your vehicle
185
Condition of ISG system opera-
tion
The ISG system will operate under
the following condition:
- The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
- The driver’s door and engine bonnet
are closed.
- The brake vaccum pressure is ade-
quate.
- The battery is sufficiently charged.
- The outside temperature is between
-2°C to 35°C (28.4°F to 95°F).
- The engine coolant temperature is not
too low.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG system does not meet the
operation condition, the ISG system is
deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF
button will illuminate and a message
“Auto Stop Deactivated” will appear
on the LCD display.
• If the light or notice comes on contin-
uously, please check the operation
condition.
ISG system deactivation
• If you wish to deactivate the ISG sys-
tem, press the ISG OFF button. The
light on the ISG OFF button will illumi-
nate and a message “Auto Stop Off”
will appear on the LCD display.
• If you press the ISG OFF button again,
the system will be activated and the
light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052003R/OJD052038/OJD052051
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052003R/OJD052039/OJD052052
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 18
519
Driving your vehicle
ISG system malfunction
The system may not operate when:
The ISG related sensors or system error
occurs.
The following will happen:
• The yellow AUTO STOP ( ) indica-
tor on the instrument cluster will stay
on after blinking for 5 seconds.
• The light on the ISG OFF button will
illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the ISG OFF button light is not
turned off by pressing the ISG OFF but-
ton again or if the ISG system continu-
ously does not work correctly, we rec-
ommend that you contact an authorised
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
• When the ISG OFF button light comes
on, it may stop illuminating after driv-
ing your vehicle at approximately 80
km/h for a maximum of two hours and
setting the fan speed control knob
below the 2nd position. If the ISG OFF
button light continues to be illuminat-
ed in spite of the procedure, we recom-
mend that you contact an authorised
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
When the engine is in Idle Stop
mode, it's possible to restart the
engine without the driver taking
any action.
Before leaving the car or doing any-
thing in the engine room area, stop
the engine by turning the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position or
removing the ignition key.
OJD052003R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 19
Driving your vehicle
205
Manual transaxle operation
• The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the
shift knob. The transaxle is fully syn-
chronized in all forward gears so shift-
ing to either a higher or a lower gear is
easily accomplished.
• Depress the clutch pedal down fully
whilst shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-
tion lock switch, the engine will not
start when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• The shift lever must return to the neu-
tral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). The button located immedi-
ately below the shift knob must be
pushed upward whilst moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
•
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052004
The button (1) must be pushed whilst
moving the shift lever.
The shift lever can be moved without
pushing the button (1).
CAUTION
• When downshifting from 5 (Fifth)
gear to 4 (Fourth) gear, caution
should be taken not to inadver-
tently move the shift lever side-
ways in such a manner that sec-
ond gear is engaged. Such a dras-
tic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such over-
revving of the engine may possi-
bly cause engine and transaxle
damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine and transaxle.
• When shifting between 5th and
6th gear, you should always push
the gear level all the way to the
right. You could otherwise shift
unintentionally into 3rd or 4th
gear and damage the transaxle.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 20
521
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant has
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1 (First) or R
(Reverse), put the shift lever in neutral
position and release the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down, and then
shift into 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear
position.
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be depressed all
the way to the floor before shifting, then
released slowly. The clutch pedal should
always be fully released whilst driving.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
whilst driving. This can cause unneces-
sary wear. Do not partially engage the
clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.
This causes unnecessary wear. Use the
foot brake or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the
clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, whilst waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1 (First) gear when the vehi-
cle is parked on a level or uphill
grade, and shifted into R
(Reverse) on a downhill grade.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these pre-
cautions are not followed in the
order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal
whilst the parking brake is
released and the shift lever not in
the neutral position.
CAUTION
When operating the clutch pedal,
depress the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don’t depress the clutch
pedal fully, the clutch may be dam-
aged or noise may occur.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 21
Driving your vehicle
225
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traf-
fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-
shift before the engine starts to labour.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is travelling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better con-
trol of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse). The transaxle can be
damaged if you do not. To shift into R
(Reverse), depress the clutch, move
the shift lever to neutral, wait three sec-
onds, then shift to the R (Reverse)
position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 22
523
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle/DCT opera-
tion
The automatic transaxle/DCT has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.The
individual speeds are selected automati-
cally, depending on the position of the
shift lever.
❈ DCT: Double clutch transmission
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE/DCT (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052005R
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 23
Driving your vehicle
245
✽✽
NOTICE
• The double clutch transmission gives
the driving feel of a Manual
Transaxle, yet provides the ease of a
fully Automatic Transaxle. Unlike a
traditional Automatic Transaxle, the
gear shifting can be felt (and heard)
on the double clutch transmission
- Think of it as an automatically shift-
ing Manual Transaxle.
- Shift into Drive range and you get
great shifting feedback and sound,
but no shifting hassle.
• Dry-type clutch transfers driving
torque and also delivers direct driving
feel which can be felt different from
smooth Automatic Transaxle with slip
of torque converter. This might be
easily felt especially at launch & low
vehicle speed.
• Double clutch transmission adopts
dry-type double clutch, which is dif-
ferent from torque converter of
Automatic Transaxle, and shows bet-
ter acceleration performance during
driving. But, initial launch might be
little bit slower than Automatic
Transaxle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When rapidly accelerating at low
vehicle speed, engine could rev at high
rpm depending on vehicle drive con-
dition.
• For smooth launch at uphill, press
down the accelerator pedal properly
depending on the vehicle drive condi-
tion.
• If you release your foot from the accel-
erator pedal at low vehicle speed, you
may feel strong engine brake, which is
similar to manual transaxle.
• In case if you want to speed down at
downhill, you may use sport mode or
paddle shift to downshift, and also use
foot brake properly depending on
driving condition to get enough decel-
eration.
• When you turn the ignition on and off,
you may hear clicking sounds as the
transmission solenoids turn on and
off, cycling through a self test. This is
a normal sound for the Double Clutch
Transmission.
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 24
525
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
CAUTION - DCT
• If the vehicle is held by applying
accelerator pedal at the hill, the
transmission and clutch will be
damaged. To hold at the hill, use
the parking brake or foot brake.
• An overload of the clutch is indi-
cated by a longitudinal judder and
a blinking display. To exclude a
clutch-damage, the clutch is
opened and the torque flow inter-
rupted. If the clutch is opened,
apply the foot brake and wait
some minutes before driving
again.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead to
severe injuries and damage on
the car.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake has to be applied.
• When the problem of gear system
occurs, the transaxle indicator
will blink. For your safety, we rec-
ommend that you contact an
authorised Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the clutch is overheated,
the safe protection mode oper-
ates. According to the safe pro-
tection mode, the transaxle indi-
cator blinks with buzzer sound.
The buzzer beeps 3 times.
In this time, the LCD warning
about safe protection mode also
displays. In this condition, the
driving may not be smoothly. If
you ignore this warning, the driv-
ing condition is getting worse and
the system may have problem. To
return the normal driving condi-
tion, apply the foot brake and
stop the vehicle for few minutes
before driving off.
• Whilst shifting the gear automati-
cally, you may feel a correspon-
ding shifting of gear. However, it
is not malfunction.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 25
Driving your vehicle
265
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator pedal fully (more than 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R (Reverse)
whilst the vehicle is in motion, except
as explained in “Rocking the vehi-
cle”, in this manual.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 26
527
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
DS mode (Drive Sporty) - DCT
DS mode supports the performance
mode for driver. To shift the DS mode,
shift the transaxle to DS mode which is
centre of sports mode. If you shift [+] or
[–] gear, the mode is change to sports
mode. The transmission shift is automat-
ically changed at higher engine speeds
by engine load, your driving style, vehicle
condition.
In DS mode, whilst coasting downhill, the
engine does not support the vehicle to
slow down.
In DS mode, if you control the paddle
shifter, the gear will be changed to sports
mode. If the gear is changed to D (Drive),
the gear will be changed to D (Drive)
mode.
✽✽
NOTICE - DCT
Whilst stopping the vehicle by applying
parking brake in D gear, even if you
release the parking brake, the vehicle
may not move. In this case, you can
drive the vehicle by applying the foot
brake and release, applying the acceler-
ator or shifting the lever (D
→
→
N
→
→
D).
OJD052006R
Sports mode
or
DS mode
+
+
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 27
Driving your vehicle
285
✽✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-
ated.
• When driving on a slippery road, push
the shift lever forward into the +(up)
position. This causes the transaxle to
shift into the 2nd gear which is better
for smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when the
shift lever is in the D position, DS mode
or the sports mode.
The paddle shifter can operate when the
vehicle speed is more than 10km/h.
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear and the system
changes from D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used to sports mode.
If the vehicle speed is lower than 10km/h,
if you depress the accelerator pedal for
more than 7 seconds, if you shift the shift
lever from D to sport mode and shift it
from sports mode to D again or if you
hold the paddle shifter [+] lever over 1
second, the system will change from
sports mode to D (Drive) mode or DS
mode you used.
With the shift lever in the sport mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once to
shift up or down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't
shift the gear.
• When you change the DS mode to
manual mode, if you want to use DS
mode again, shift the gear lever to D
and shift DS mode.
OJD052025R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 28
529
Driving your vehicle
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia dealer.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and whilst shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the
vehicle.
OJD052007R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 29
Driving your vehicle
305
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 30
531
Driving your vehicle
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
Auto transaxle and DCT
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator pedal gradually whilst releas-
ing the service brakes.
Auto transaxle
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 31
Driving your vehicle
325
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel efficiency
by controlling the engine and transaxle.
But fuel-efficiency can be changed by the
driver's driving habits and road conditions.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green) will
illuminate to show that the Active ECO
is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated, it
does not turn off even though the
engine is restarted again. To turn off
the system, press the active ECO but-
ton again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will return
to the normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated :
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress the
accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance may
be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal condi-
tions when the active eco system is acti-
vated to improve fuel efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur whilst
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there is
no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is low:
The system will be limited until engine
performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill: The system will
be limited to gain power when driving
uphill because the engine torque is
restricted.
• When using sports mode: The system
will be limited according to the shift
location.
• When the accelerator pedal is deeply
pressed for a few seconds: The system
will be limited, judging that the driver
wants to speed up.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052008R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 32
533
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would. The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
BRAKE SYSTEM
(Continued)
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to sefely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
whilst maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
(Continued)
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 33
Driving your vehicle
345
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate whilst the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake whilst
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 34
535
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake - Hand type
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-
tion it is recommended that when parking
the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever
should be positioned in the appropriate
low gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position for automatic
transaxle vehicles.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly press the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) whilst pressing the button.
OJD052011ROJD052010/H
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
It could damage the vehicle sys-
tem and make endanger driving
safety.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 35
Driving your vehicle
365
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will illuminate when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released whilst
the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution whilst operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever instead of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake AND
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in 1st (First)
gear or R (Reverse) for manual
transaxle equipped vehicles and
in P (Park) for automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WK-23
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:13 PM Page 36
537
Driving your vehicle
Electric parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes on.
✽✽
NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer if the vehicle does not stand still,
do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more than
3 seconds.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the fol-
lowing condition:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON position.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
OJD052012R
CAUTION
Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
endanger driving safety.
OJD052013R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 37
Driving your vehicle
385
To release EPB (electric parking brake)
automatically:
• Manual transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine bon-
net and tailgate.
4. Depress the clutch pedal with the
gear engaged.
5. Depress the accelerator pedal whilst
releasing the clutch pedal.
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine bon-
net and tailgate.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal whilst
the shift lever is in R (Rear), D
(Drive).
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to
R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress the
brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral)
to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
Make sure the brake warning light goes
off.
✽✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage the
EPB even though the ignition switch or
engine stop/start button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking brake
manually with the EPB switch when
you drive downhill or when backing up
the vehicle.
✽
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
A vehicle towing a trailer on a hill or on
an incline may slightly roll backwards
when starting the vehicle. To prevent the
situation follow the below instructions.
1. Depress the clutch pedal and select a
gear.
2. Keep pulling up the EPB switch.
3. Depress the accelerator pedal and
slowly release the clutch pedal.
4. If the vehicle starts off with enough
driving power release the EPB switch.
Do not follow the above procedure when
driving on a flat level ground. The vehi-
cle may suddenly move forward.
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning light
is still on even though the EPB
has been released, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with the
EPB applied. It may cause exces-
sive brake pad and brake rotor
wear.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 38
539
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB applied,
but doesn't release automatically, a
warning will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
and any door, the engine bonnet or tail-
gate is opened, a warning will sound
and a message will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a
warning may sound and a message
may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress the
brake pedal and release EPB by pressing
the EPB switch.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the shift
lever in place of the parking
brake. Set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is
securely positioned in P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OJD052035/OJD042195
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 39
Driving your vehicle
405
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is opera-
tion normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator remains
on, comes on whilst driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch or the
engine start/stop button is changed to
the ON position, this indicates that the
EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
The EPB malfunction indicator may illu-
minate when the ESC indicator comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not working
properly, but it does not indicate a mal-
function of the EPB.
CAUTION
• A click sound may be heard
whilst operating or releasing the
EPB, but these conditions are
normal and indicate that the EPB
is functioning properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her how
to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal, depress it slowly.
OJD052014
CAUTION
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few
minutes. The warning light will go
off and the EPB switch will oper-
ate normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does not
go off, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 40
541
Driving your vehicle
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake pedal
whilst driving, emergency braking is pos-
sible by pulling up and holding the EPB
switch. Braking is possible only whilst you
are holding the EPB switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the EPB,
the parking brake warning light will
illuminate to indicate that the system is
operating.
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) does not release
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend that you take your vehicle to
an authorised Kia dealer by loading the
vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
WARNING
Do not operate the parking brake
whilst the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation.
CAUTION
If you continuously notice a noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, we recom-
mend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving manoeuvres. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehicle
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
`Control) may be longer than for
those without it in the following
road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tyre chains installed.
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
(Continued)
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 41
Driving your vehicle
425
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
(Continued)
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 42
543
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS.We recom-
mend that you contact an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your
vehicle over to a safe place and
stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. We recommend
that you contact an authorised
Kia dealer.
W-78
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 43
Driving your vehicle
445
Electronic stability control (ESC)
(if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehi-
cle during cornering manoeuvres. ESC
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESC
applies the brakes at individual wheels
and intervenes with engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic stability control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic stability
control (ESC) System is functioning
properly.
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
manoeuvres and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding manoeuvres that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
OJD052009R
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 44
545
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not increase even if you
press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the
stability and traction of the
vehicle and does not indicate
a problem.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel the engine man-
agement system of ESC,
press the ESC OFF button for
less than 3 seconds (ESC
OFF indicator light illumi-
nates). The brake control
function still operates.
• To cancel the engine man-
agement and brake control
function of ESC, press the
ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds (ESC OFF
indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
-
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 45
Driving your vehicle
465
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily driv-
ing whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off whilst driving, press
the ESC OFF button whilst driving on a
flat road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off by pressing the ESC OFF
button for more than 3 seconds (ESC
OFF light illuminated). If the ESC is
left on, it may prevent the vehicle
speed from increasing, and result in
false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tyres,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tyres.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
whilst ESC is operating (ESC indi-
cator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off whilst ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out
of control.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 46
547
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhance-
ments to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when brak-
ing.
VSM operation
When the VSM is operating:
• ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ( )
light will blink.
• The steering wheel may be controlled.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS (Electronic Power Steering) indi-
cator light remains on the instrument
cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to turn
off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illumi-
nates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by press-
ing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected some-
where in the EPS (Electronic Power
Steering) system or VSM system. If the
ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a sup-
plementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly whilst driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to acti-
vate according to the driver’s
intention, even with the VSM
installed. Always follow all the
normal precautions for driving at
safe speeds for the conditions –
including driving in inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tyre or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tyres, make sure they are the
same size as your original tyres.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 47
Driving your vehicle
485
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to slip back
on a steep hill when it starts to go after
stopping. The Hill-start Assist Control
(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping
back by operating the brakes automati-
cally for about 1~2 seconds. The brakes
are released when the accelerator pedal
is depressed or after about 1~2 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when the
transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park)
or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though the
ESC is off but it does not activate
when the ESC has malfunctioned.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
The Emergency Stop Signal system
alerts the driver behind by blinking the
stop light when the vehicle is braked rap-
idly and severely.
The system is activated when:
• The vehicle suddenly stops (vehicle
speed is over 55km/h and the vehicle
deceleration at greater than 7 m/s
2
)
• The ABS is activating
When the vehicle speed is under 40 km/h
and the ABS deactivates or the sudden
stop situation is over, the stop light blink-
ing will stop. Instead, the hazard warning
flasher will turn on automatically.
The hazard warning flasher will turn off
when vehicle speed is over 10km/h after
the vehicle has stopped. Also, it will turn
off when the vehicle is driven at low
speed for some time. You can turn it off
manually by pushing the hazard warning
flasher switch.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for about
1~2 seconds, so when the vehicle
is starting off always depress the
accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS)
system will not work if the hazard
warning flasher is already on.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 48
549
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake is
not engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before driv-
ing away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle
will not stop as quickly if the brakes are
wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle
to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the vehicle
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and we
recommend that you call an authorised
Kia dealer.
• Do not coast down hills with the vehicle
out of gear. This is extremely haz-
ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all
times, use the brakes to slow down,
then shift to a lower gear so that
engine braking will help you maintain a
safe speed.
• Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
vehicle pointed straight ahead whilst
you slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, do not let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid creep-
ing forward, keep your foot firmly on
the brake pedal when the vehicle is
stopped.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park your
vehicle, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the P (Park) position. If the
parking brake is not fully
engaged, the vehicle may move
inadvertently and injure yourself
and others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 49
Driving your vehicle
505
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away from
the curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to keep
the vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily whilst you put the shift
lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in
first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the vehi-
cle cannot roll. Then release the park-
ing brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 50
551
Driving your vehicle
1. Cruise indicator
2. Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control opera-
tion, when the SET switch is activated
or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will ener-
gize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress the
brake pedal at least once after turning
the ignition switch to the ON position
or starting the engine. This is to check
if the brake switch which is important
part to cancel cruise control is in nor-
mal condition.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(cruise indicator light is illuminat-
ed), the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when travelling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the vehicle at a constant speed,
for instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
CAUTION
During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not
shift into neutral without depress-
ing the clutch pedal, since the
engine will be overrevved. If this
happens, depress the clutch pedal
or release the cruise control ON-
OFF switch.
OJD052015R/OJD052048N
■ Supervision
■ Normal vision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 51
Driving your vehicle
525
Cruise control switch
O: Cancels cruise control operation.
: Turns cruise control system on or
off.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control
speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Move the lever down ( ) on the
steering wheel, to turn the system on.
The cruise indicator light will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (20 mph).
✽
✽
NOTICE - Manual transaxle
For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at least
once to set the cruise control after start-
ing the engine.
3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed. The
cruise set indicator light will illuminate.
Release the accelerator pedal at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly whilst going
downhill.
OJD052016 OJD052017 OJD052018
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 52
553
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the lever at the speed you want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2 km/h (1 mph)
each time you move the lever up (to
RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the lever at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1 mph)
each time you move the lever down (to
SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
OJD052019 OJD052018
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 53
Driving your vehicle
545
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal if equipped
with a manual transaxle.
• Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with
an automatic transaxle.
• Press the O (Cancel) button located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 20 km/h (12
mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph).
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the
cruise set
indicator
light will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume cruise
control operation, move up the lever (to
RES+) located on your steering wheel.
You will return to your previously preset
speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 30 km/h
(20 mph):
If any method other than the button
was used to cancel cruising speed and
the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically
resume when the +RES switch is
pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
30 km/h (20 mph).
OJD052020 OJD052019
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 54
555
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Move the lever down ( ).
• Move the lever up ( ). (If you move
the lever up, the speed limit system will
turn on)
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 55
Driving your vehicle
565
You can set the speed limit when you do
not want to drive over a specific speed.
If you drive over the preset speed limit,
the warning system operates (set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound) until
the vehicle speed returns within the
speed limit.
✽✽
NOTICE
Whilst speed limit control is in opera-
tion, the cruise control system cannot be
activated.
Speed limit control switch
O: Cancels set speed limit.
: Turns speed limit control system on
or off.
RES+: Resumes or increases speed limit
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases speed limit con-
trol speed.
To set speed limit :
1. Move the lever up ( ) on the steer-
ing wheel, to turn the system on.
SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OJD052021OJD052016
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:14 PM Page 56
557
Driving your vehicle
The speed limit indicator light will illumi-
nate.
2. Move the lever down (to SET-).
3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(to SET-), and release it at the desired
speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or
down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed
will increase or decrease by 5 km/h (3
mph).
Move the lever up (to RES+) or down
(SET-) and release it immediately. The
speed will increase or decrease by 1
km/h.
The set speed limit will display on the
instrument cluster.
The set speed limit will be displayed.
OJD052031R/OJD052043N
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
OJD052022
OJD052032R/OJD052044N
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 57
Driving your vehicle
585
To drive over the preset speed limit you
must depress hard on the accelerator
pedal (more than approximately 80%)
until the kick down mechanism works
with a clicking noise. Then the set speed
limit will blink and chime will sound until
you return the vehicle speed within the
speed limit.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Depressing the accelerator pedal less
than approximately 50%, the vehicle
will not speed over the preset speed
limit but maintain the vehicle speed
within the speed limit.
• A clicking noise heard from the kick
down mechanism by depressing the
accelerator pedal fully is a normal
condition.
To turn off the speed limit con-
trol, do one of the following:
• Move the lever up ( ).
• Move the lever down ( ). (If you
move the lever down, the cruise sys-
tem will turn on)
• Turn the ignition off.
If you press the O (CANCEL) button
once, the set speed limit will cancel, but
it will not turn the system off. If you wish
to reset the speed limit, move the lever
up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) on your
steering wheel to your desired speed.
CAUTION
The “---” indicator will blink if there
is a problem with speed limit con-
trol system.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
OJD052023
OJD052033R/OJD052046N
■ Normal vision
■ Supervision
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 58
559
Driving your vehicle
This system detects the lane with the
sensor at the front windscreen and warns
you when your vehicle leaves the lane.
To operate the LDWS, press the switch
with the ignition in the ON position. The
indicator illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the switch
again.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• The LDWS does not make the vehi-
cle change lanes. It is the driver's
responsibility to always check the
road conditions.
• Do not turn the steering wheel sud-
denly, when the LDWS warns you
that your vehicle is leaving the lane.
• If the sensor can not detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 60km/h, the LDWS won't
warn you even though the vehicle
leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windscreen, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Do not let water or any kind of liq-
uid come in contact with the LDWS
sensor.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts and
do not affect the sensor by a strong
impact.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• Always check road conditions
because you may not hear the
warning chime because of audio
and external conditions.
OJD052030R
OJD052029
OJD042178
OJD052028
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 59
Driving your vehicle
605
If your vehicle leaves the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle speed
exceeds 60km/h, the warning operates
as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you leave
on the LCD display blinks yellow with 0.8
second of interval.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning sound
operates with 0.8 second of interval.
If you change the display mode of trip
computer whilst the LDWS is ON, the
symbol of the LDWS will display like a
picture.
The colour of symbol will change depend
on the condition of LDWS system.
- White colour : It means the sensor does
not detect the lane line.
- Green colour : It means the sensor
detects the lane line.
OJD042180
OJD042179
OJD042181/OJD042182
• When the sensor detects the lane line
• When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OJD052057N
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 60
561
Driving your vehicle
Warning indicator
If the LDWS FAIL warning indicator
comes on (yellow indicator), the LDWS is
not working properly. We recommend
that the system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal to
change lane.
But, when the hazard warning flasher
is operating, the LDWS operates nor-
mally.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽
NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn signal
switch, then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you even
if the vehicle leaves the lane, or
may warn you even if the vehicle
does not leave the lane when:
• The lane is not visible due to snow, rain,
stain, a puddle or many other things.
• The brightness of the outside changes
suddenly.
• Not turning on the headlight even at
night or in the tunnel.
• Difficult to distinguish the colour of the
lane from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a curve.
• Light reflects from the water on the
road.
• The lens or windscreen is stained with
foreign matter.
• The sensor can not detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or heavy
snow.
• The surrounding temperature of the
inside rear view mirror is high due to a
direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indistinct.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• There is a mark similar to a lane line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead hides
the lane line.
• The vehicle shakes heavily.
• The lane number increases or decreas-
es or the lane lines are crossing com-
plicatedly.
• Putting something on the dashboard.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construction.
• The lane line is more than two in either
side (Left/Right).
OJD052056N
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 61
Driving your vehicle
625
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
kilometers (miles) you can get from a
litre (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-
cle as economically as possible, use the
following driving suggestions to help
save money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate. Do not make "jack-rabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain
a steady cruising speed. Do not race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to the traffic so you do not have
to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid
heavy traffic whenever possible.
Always maintain a safe distance from
other vehicles so you can avoid unnec-
essary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed,
especially on the highway, is one of the
most effective ways to reduce fuel con-
sumption.
• Do not "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption
and also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with your
foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tyres. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tyre
wear. Check the tyre pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tyre wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condition.
For better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your vehi-
cle in accordance with the mainte-
nance schedule. If you drive your vehi-
cle in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required.
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the vehicle. This
extra weight can result in increased
fuel consumption and also contribute
to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary
weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces
fuel economy.
• Do not let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 62
563
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine bucking. If
this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. We recommend in general that the
vehicle be serviced by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
whilst driving could engage the
steering wheel lock (if equipped)
resulting in loss of vehicle steering
which could cause serious injury
or death.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:15 PM Page 63
Driving your vehicle
645
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1 (First) and
R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with a
manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transaxle. Do not race the
engine, and spin the wheels as little as
possible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating and
possible damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, whilst driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tyre speed
could cause the tyres to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tyre damage.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 64
565
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tyre wear will be held
to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windscreen wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windscreen wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windscreen.
• If your tyres are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tyres are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
whilst driving until normal braking
operation returns.
WARNING - Spinning tyres
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tyre to overheat
which could result in tyre damage
that may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 65
Driving your vehicle
665
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving
Tyres
Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to
specification. Low tyre inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tyres.
Avoid using worn or damaged tyres
which may result in reduced traction or
tyre failure.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-
tion pressure shown on the tyres.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tyres can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check the tyres for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tyre pressures, refer to section
8, “Tyres and wheels”.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving on tyres with no or insuf-
ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tyres can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tyres
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tyre tread before driving your
vehicle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to section
7, “Tyres and wheels”.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 66
567
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the winter
result in greater wear and other prob-
lems. To minimize the problems of winter
driving, you should follow these sugges-
tions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tyres or to
install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow
tyres are needed, it is necessary to
select tyres equivalent in size and type of
the original equipment tyres. Failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle. Furthermore,
speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden
brake applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tyre chains on the tyre will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tyre chains are not legal in all countries.
Check the country laws before fitting
tyre chains.
Snow tyres
If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tyres of the
same size and load range as the original
tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four
wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-
dling in all weather conditions. Keep in
mind that the traction provided by snow
tyres on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment tyres.
You should drive cautiously even when
the roads are clear. Check with the tyre
dealer for maximum speed recommen-
dations.
Do not install studded tyres without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tyre size
Snow tyres should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 67
Driving your vehicle
685
Tyre chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tyre chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
Install tyre chains only on the front tyres.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tyres. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tyre. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mount-
ing. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
• If your vehicle has 225/45R17 size
tyres do not use tyre chain; they
can damage your vehicle (wheel,
suspension and body).
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 68
569
Driving your vehicle
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure that
its freezing point is sufficient for the tem-
peratures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7. We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, we rec-
ommend that you consult an authorised
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING - Tyre chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 69
Driving your vehicle
705
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorised Kia dealer
and most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the paint
finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily whilst you put the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the vehicle to be sure the
movement of the front wheels and the
steering components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er, you should carry appropriate emer-
gency equipment. Some of the items you
may want to carry include tyre chains,
tow straps or chains, flashlight, emer-
gency flares, sand, shovel, jumper
cables, window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 70
571
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for tow-
ing trailers, cars, or other types of vehi-
cles or apparatus may differ. We recom-
mend that you ask an authorised Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE - For Europe
• The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 100
km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of catego-
ry M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehi-
cle of category N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is tow-
ing a trailer, the additional load
imposed at the trailer coupling device
may cause the tyre maximum load
ratings to be exceeded, but not by
more than 15 %. In this case, do not
exceed 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and
increase the tyre inflation pressure by
at least 0.2 bar.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tyres are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also considerably adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling require-
ments.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combi-
nation weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer nose weight are all with-
in the limits.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 71
Driving your vehicle
725
Towbar hitches
It's important to have the correct towbar
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right
towbar hitch. Here are some rules to fol-
low:
• Do you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer towbar hitch? If you do, then be
sure to seal the holes later when you
remove the towbar hitch.
If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for towbar hitches. Do not
attach rental towbar hitches or other
bumper-type towbar hitches to them.
Use only a frame-mounted towbar
hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• A Kia accessory trailer towbar hitch is
available at an authorised Kia dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the towbar hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the towbar hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave just
enough slack so you can turn with your
trailer. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
OJD052024
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 72
573
Driving your vehicle
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is prop-
erly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maxi-
mum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Do not tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer towbar
hitch and platform, safety chains, electri-
cal connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well
in advance.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 73
Driving your vehicle
745
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It is important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
An authorised Kia dealer can assist you
in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat.
If the needle of the coolant tem-
perature gauge moves across the
dial towards “130/H (HOT)”, pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 74
575
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unex-
pectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here is how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (left if headed down hill,
right if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break loose.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 75
Driving your vehicle
765
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down whilst you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it is a good idea to
review these sections before you start
your trip.
Do not forget to also maintain your trailer
and towbar hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied your
trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the start
of each day’s driving. Most importantly,
all towbar hitch nuts and bolts should be
tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 76
577
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a towbar hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, we recommend that you consult an authorised Kia dealer on additional requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60 mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:
Engine
Item
Petrol 1.4L Petrol 1.6L MPI Petrol 1.6L GDI Diesel 1.4L Diesel 1.6L
M/T M/T A/T M/T A/T (DCT) M/T M/T A/T
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake
System
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
600
(1,323)
650
(1,433)
650
(1,433)
650
(1,433)
With brake
System
1,200
(2,646)
1,300
(2,866)
1200
(2,646)
1,400
(3,086)
1,300
(2,866)
1,500
(3,307)
1,500
(3,307)
1,300
(2,866)
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling device
kg (Ibs.)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
60
(132)
75
(165)
75
(165)
75
(165)
Recommended distance from rear
wheel centre to coupling point
mm (inch)
5 Door : 859 (33.8)
Wagon : 1,055 (41.54)
For Europe
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 77
Driving your vehicle
785
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more than
the maximum trailer weight with trailer
brakes. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The nose weight of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the nose weight to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer nose weight. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
Nose weight Total Trailer Weight
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 78
579
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
With increasing altitude the engine per-
formance decreases. From 1.000 m
above sea level and for every 1.000 m
thereafter 10% of vehicle/trailer weight
(trailer weighter + gross vehicle weight)
must be deducted.
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 79
Driving your vehicle
805
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rat-
ing)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label.
Overloading
VEHICLE WEIGHT
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-
cle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an acci-
dent or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
JD RHD 5.QXP 7/21/2012 1:16 PM Page 80
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency whilst driving . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tyre whilst driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls whilst driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly. . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
If you have a flat tyre (with spare tyre). . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Removing and storing the spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Wheel nut tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
If you have a flat tyre (with Tyre Mobility Kit) . . 6-17
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
• Using the Tyre Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
• Distributing the sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Producing the tyre inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Notes on the safe use of the Tyre Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-21
• Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . 6-23
• TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Changing a tyre with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Towing service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
• Removable towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Fire extinguisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Triangle reflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
• Tyre pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 1
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Press the flasher switch with the ignition
switch in any position. The flasher switch
is located in the centre facia switch
panel. All turn signal lights will flash
simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• The hazard warning flasher should
always be on whilst the vehicle is being
towed.
OJD042089R
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 2
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(Second) or 3(Third)
gear and then turning the starter with-
out depressing the clutch pedal.
If you have a flat tyre whilst driv-
ing
If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the vehicle slow down whilst
driving straight ahead. Do not apply the
brakes immediately or attempt to pull
off the road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the vehicle has slowed
to such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the vehicle that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tyre, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
If engine stalls whilst driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle does not start, we recommend
that you consult an authorised Kia
dealer.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 3
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE DOES NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position, check all connectors at
ignition, coil and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
WARNING
If the engine does not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter (if equipped) to
be overloaded and create a fire haz-
ard.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 4
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
■ Engine compartment
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 5
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
✽✽
NOTICE
If the battery is discharged, the engine
can be started using a battery of anoth-
er vehicle and two jumper cables. Only
use jumper cables with fully insulated
clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2). Proceed to
connect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other end
to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for
example, the engine lifting bracket)
away from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that moves
when the engine is cranked. Make
sure that there is no contact between
the bodywork of the two vehicles; oth-
erwise, there is the danger of short cir-
cuits.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable from
the negative terminal of the booster
battery to the negative terminal of the
discharged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to overheat
and crack, releasing battery acid.
CAUTION - AGM battery
(if equipped)
• Absorbent Glass Matt (AGM) bat-
teries are maintenance-free and
we recommend that the AGM bat-
teries be serviced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer. For charging
your AGM battery, use only fully
automatic battery chargers that
are specially developed for AGM
batteries.
• When replacing the AGM battery,
we recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
• Do not open or remove the cap on
top of the battery. This may cause
leaks of internal electrolyte that
could result in severe injury.
• If the AGM battery is reconnected
or replaced, ISG function will not
operate immediately.
If you want to use the ISG func-
tion, the battery sensor needs to
be calibrated for approximately 4
hours with the ignition off.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 6
67
What to do in an emergency
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery. If the
first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before making
another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control sys-
tem. Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started. Follow
the directions in this section for jump-
starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 7
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you will experience a loss of
power, or hear loud pinging or knocking,
the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the vehicle or steam is coming out
from the bonnet, stop the engine. Do
not open the bonnet until the coolant
has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check
for coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air
conditioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining from
it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and we recom-
mend that you call an authorised Kia
dealer.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, we recom-
mend that you call an authorised Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and we recommend that the system
be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Whilst the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to blow out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 8
69
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH SPARE TYRE, IF EQUIPPED)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment.
Pull up the luggage box cover to
reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tyre changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly and fasten the jack screw
fully.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OJD062001
WARNING - Changing
tyres
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tyre. The jack should
be used on firm level ground.
If you cannot find a firm level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
(Continued)
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 9
What to do in an emergency
106
Removing and storing the spare
tyre
Turn the tyre hold-down wing bolt (1)
counterclockwise.
Store the tyre in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tyre and tools
from “rattling” whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tyres
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R (Reverse)
with manual transaxle or P (Park)
with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
OGD061004
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
whilst the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle whilst it is on
the jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OED066033/H
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 10
611
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tyre
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tyre
has been raised off the ground.
WARNING -
Changing a tyre
• To prevent vehicle movement
whilst changing a tyre, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OJD062003
OJD062004
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 11
What to do in an emergency
126
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tyre
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tyre just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tyre, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OJD062002 OJD062005
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 12
613
What to do in an emergency
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tyre to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING
• Wheels and wheel covers may
have sharp edges. Handle
them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury.
• Before putting the wheel into
place, be sure that there is
nothing on the hub or wheel
(such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.)
that interferes with the wheel
from fitting solidly against the
hub. If there is, remove it. If
the contact of the mounting
surface between the wheel
and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
losing control of the vehicle.
This may cause serious injury
or death.
OGD061013
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 13
What to do in an emergency
146
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
If you have a tyre gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tyre in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyre
from rattling whilst the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, we recommend that
you consult an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tyre pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tyre. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tyres and wheels” in
section 8.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 14
615
What to do in an emergency
Important - use of compact spare
tyre (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tyre. This compact spare
tyre takes up less space than a reg-
ular-size tyre. This tyre is smaller
than a conventional tyre and is
designed for temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tyre. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tyre,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tyre.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough to avoid all hazards. Any
road hazard, such as a pothole or
debris, could seriously damage the
compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this
tyre could result in tyre failure, loss
of vehicle control, and possible
personal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tyre.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tyre diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tyre and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tyre and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tyre in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tyre is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at the speed
over 80 km/h (50 mph). The
original tyre should be repaired
or replaced as soon as possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 15
What to do in an emergency
166
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash whilst the com-
pact spare tyre is installed.
• Do not use tyre chains on the com-
pact spare tyre. Because of the
smaller size, a tyre chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tyre should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tyre
on any other vehicle because this
tyre has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tyre’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tyre.
Inspect your compact spare tyre
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tyres with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tyre should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tyres, snow tyres,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tyre at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer whilst the com-
pact spare tyre is installed.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 16
617
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE (WITH TYRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)
Please read the instructions before
using the Tyre Mobility Kit.
(1) Compressor
(2) Sealant bottle
Introduction
With the Tyre Mobility Kit you stay
mobile even after experiencing a tyre
puncture.
The system of compressor and seal-
ing compound effectively and com-
fortably seals most punctures in a
passenger car tyre caused by nails
or similar objects and reinflates the
tyre. After you ensure that the tyre is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tyre (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a vehicle
or tyre dealer to have the tyre
replaced.
It is possible that some tyres, espe-
cially with larger punctures or dam-
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed
completely. Air pressure loss in the
tyre may adversely affect tyre per-
formance.
For this reason, you should avoid
abrupt steering or other driving
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in
use. The Tyre Mobility Kit is not
designed or intended as a perma-
nent tyre repair method and is to be
used for one tyre only.
This instruction shows you step by
step how to temporarily seal the
puncture simply and reliably. Read
the section "Notes on the safe use of
the Tyre Mobility Kit".
OJD062011
OYN069018
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:56 PM Page 17
What to do in an emergency
186
0. Speed restriction label
1. Sealant bottle and label with
speed restriction
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to
wheel
3. Connectors and cable for the
power outlet direct connection
4. Holder for the sealant bottle
5. Compressor
6. On/off switch
WARNING
Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if
a tyre is severely damaged by
driving run flat or with insuffi-
cient air pressure. Only punc-
tured areas located within the
tread region of the tyre can be
sealed using the Tyre Mobility Kit.
Damage to the sidewall must
not be repaired due to safety
reasons.
Components of the Tyre Mobility Kit
OAM060015L
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 18
619
What to do in an emergency
7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
tyre inflation pressure
8. Button for reducing tyre inflation
pressure
9. Hose to connect compressor and
sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
Using the Tyre Mobility Kit
1. Filling the sealant
Strictly follow the specified
sequence, otherwise the sealant
may escape under high pressure.
1) Shake the sealant bottle.
2) Screw connection hose 9 onto the
connector of the sealant bottle.
3) Ensure that button 8 on the com-
pressor is not pressed.
4) Unscrew the valve cap from the
valve of the defective wheel and
screw filling hose 2 of the sealant
bottle onto the valve.
5) Insert the sealant bottle into the
housing of the compressor so that
the bottle is upright.
6) Ensure that the compressor is
switched off, position 0.
7) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
8) With the ignition switched on:
Switch on the compressor and let it
run for approximately 3 minutes to fill
the sealant. The inflation pressure of
the tyre after filling is unimportant.
OYN069018
WARNING
Before using the Tyre Mobility Kit,
follow the instructions on the
sealant bottle.
Remove the label with the speed
restriction from the sealant bottle
and apply it to the steering wheel.
Please note the expiry date on the
sealant bottle.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 19
What to do in an emergency
206
9) Switch off the compressor.
10) Detach the hoses from the
sealant bottle connector and
from the tyre valve.
Return the Tyre Mobility Kit to its
storage location in the vehicle.
Distributing the sealant
Immediately drive approximately 3
km (2 miles) to evenly distribute the
sealant in the tyre.
Producing the tyre inflation pres-
sure
1) After driving approximately 3 km
(2 miles), stop at a suitable loca-
tion.
2) Connect connection hose 9 of the
compressor directly to the tyre
valve.
3) Connect between compressor
and the vehicle power outlet using
the cable and connectors.
4) Adjust the tyre inflation pressure
to 220 kPa (32 psi). With the igni-
tion switched on, proceed as fol-
lows.
- To increase the inflation pres-
sure: Switch on the compressor,
position I. To check the current
inflation pressure setting, briefly
switch off the compressor.
WARNING
Carbon monoxide poisoning
and suffocation is possible if the
engine is left running in a poorly
ventilated or unventilated loca-
tion (such as inside a building).
WARNING
Do not let the compressor run for
more than 10 minutes, otherwise
the device will overheat and may
be damaged.
CAUTION
Do not exceed a speed of 80
km/h (50 mph). If possible, do
not fall below a speed of 20
km/h (12 mph).
Whilst driving, if you experience
any unusual vibration, ride dis-
turbance or noise, reduce your
speed and drive with caution
until you can safely pull off of
the side of the road.
Call for road side service or tow-
ing.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 20
621
What to do in an emergency
- To reduce the inflation pres-
sure: Press the button 8 on the
compressor.
Notes on the safe use of the Tyre
Mobility Kit
• Park your car at the side of the
road so that you can work with the
Tyre Mobility Kit away from moving
traffic. Place your warning triangle
in a prominent place to make pass-
ing vehicles aware of your location.
• To be sure your vehicle won't
move, even when you're on fairly
level ground, always set your park-
ing brake.
• Only use the Tyre Mobility Kit for
sealing/inflation passenger car
tyres. Do not use on motorcycles,
bicycles or any other type of tyres.
• Do not remove any foreign objects-
such as nails or screws -that have
penetrated the tyre.
• Before using the Tyre Mobility Kit,
read the precautionary advice
printed on the sealant bottle!
• Provided the car is outdoors, leave
the engine running. Otherwise
operating the compressor may
eventually drain the car battery.
• Never leave the Tyre Mobility Kit
unattended whilst it is being used.
• Do not leave the compressor run-
ning for more than 10 min. at a time
or it may overheat.
• Do not use the Tyre Mobility Kit if
the ambient temperature is below -
30°C (-22°F).
• Do not use the sealing compound
after its expiration date which can
be found on the label of the bottle.
• Keep away from children.
WARNING
The tyre inflation pressure must
be at least 220 kPa (32 psi). If it
is not, do not continue driving.
Call for road side service or
towing.
CAUTION
If the inflation pressure is not
maintained, drive the vehicle a
second time, refer to
Distributing the sealant. Then
repeat steps 1 to 4.
Use of the Tyre Mobility Kit may
be ineffectual for tyre damage
larger than approximately 4 mm
(0.16 in). We recommend that
you contact an authorised Kia
dealer if the tyre cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tyre
Mobility Kit.
WARNING
Have your tyre repaired as soon
as possible. The tyre may loose
air pressure at any time after
inflating with the TMK.
CAUTION
The Tyre Mobility Kit is a tempo-
rary fix to the tyre and we rec-
ommend that the tyre be
inspected by an authorised Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 21
What to do in an emergency
226
Technical Data
System voltage: DC 12 V
Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V
Amperage rating: max. 15 A
Suitable for use at temperatures:
-30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
Max. working pressure:
6 bar (87 psi)
Size (for 15´´, 16´´ wheel)
Compressor: 170 x 150 x 60 mm
(6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in.)
Sealant bottle: 85 x 77 ø mm
(3.3 x 3.0 ø in.)
Compressor weight:
0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
Sealant volume:
200 ml (12.2 cu. in.)
Size (for 17´´ wheel)
Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle: 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight:
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume:
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
❈ Sealing compound and spare
parts can be obtained and
replaced at an authorised vehicle
or tyre dealer. Empty sealing com-
pound bottles may be disposed of
at home. Liquid residue from the
sealing compound should be dis-
posed of by your vehicle or tyre
dealer or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulations.
CAUTION -TPMS
(if equipped)
When using Tyre Mobility Kit,
the tyre sealant can damage the
tyre pressure sensor. After
using the Tyre Mobility Kit, we
recommend that the tyre pres-
sure sensor be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 22
623
What to do in an emergency
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tyre pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tyre pressure position tell-
tale (Shown on the instrument
panel display)
Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tyres of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tyre inflation pressure for
those tyres.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tyre pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre
pressure telltale when one or more
of your tyres is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tyre pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tyres as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tyre causes
the tyre to overheat and can lead to
tyre failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tyre mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tyre pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low
tyre pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When
the TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking for
approximately 1 minute, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tyre pressure as intended.
OJD062006R
OJD042144R
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 23
What to do in an emergency
246
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tyres or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tyres or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tyres
and wheels allow the TPMS to con-
tinue to function properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
1.The low tyre pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator do
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tyre pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tyre pressure tell-
tale
Low tyre pressure posi-
tion telltale
When the tyre pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tyres is
significantly under-inflated. The low
tyre pressure position telltale light
will indicate which tyre is significant-
ly under-inflated by illuminating the
corresponding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tyres as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tyres to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-
sure label located on the driver’s side
centre pillar outer panel. If you can-
not reach a service station or if the
tyre cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tyre with a
spare tyre.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replaceing the low pressure tyre
with the spare tyre, one of the follow-
ing will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
whilst driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/26/2012 6:00 PM Page 24
625
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under infla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 1 minute.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer to
determine the cause of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tyre pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tyres can cause the tyres
to overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tyre pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tyre pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tyre inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tyre pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tyre inflation
pressure and adjust the tyres to
the recommended tyre inflation
pressure.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 25
What to do in an emergency
266
Changing a tyre with TPMS
If you have a flat tyre, the low Tyre
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tyre
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tyre behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tyres
serviced by an authorised Kia dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 25 km/h
after replaceing the low pressure tyre
with the spare tyre, one of the follow-
ing will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continuous-
ly illuminated because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor not in the vehicle)
• The TPMS malfunction indicator will
remain continuously illuminated
whilst driving because the TPMS
sensor is not mounted on the spare
wheel. (changed tyre equipped with
a sensor in the vehicle)
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by Kia.
The sealant on the tyre pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elem-
inated when you replace the
tyre with a new one.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 26
627
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able identify a low
tyre by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tyre pressure
gauge to measure the tyre's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tyre that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tyre that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tyre to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tyre is cold before inflating
to the recommended pressure.
A cold tyre means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tyre Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tyre pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tyre dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
sealant approved by Kia if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System.
The liquid sealant can damage
the tyre pressure sensors.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 27
What to do in an emergency
286
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an autho-
rised Kia dealer or a commercial tow-
truck service. Proper lifting and towing
procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dol-
lies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the EPB does not release normally, we
recommend taking your vehicle to an
authorised Kia dealer by loading the
vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
OED066011
OED066012
dolly
OED066014
OED066013
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 28
629
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1. Open the tailgate/boot, and remove
the towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
Emergency towing
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OJD062008
■ Rear (5door)
OJD062012
■ Rear (wagon)
■ Front
OJD062009
OJD062010
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 29
What to do in an emergency
306
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorised
Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speed. Also, the wheels,
axles, power train, steering and brakes
must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other con-
ditions from which the vehicle cannot
be driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should com-
municate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. We recommend
that you contact an authorised
Kia dealer or a commercial tow
truck service for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 30
631
What to do in an emergency
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
OXM069009
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 31
What to do in an emergency
326
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the follow-
ing steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extin-
guisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured per-
son.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emer-
gencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any prob-
lems.
Tyre pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tyres normally lose some air in day-to-
day use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tyre, but of
normal wear. Always check tyre pressure
when the tyres are cold because tyre
pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tyre pressure, take the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tyre.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tyre valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tyre pressure on the gauge
to know whether the tyre pressure is
low or high.
5. Adjust the tyre pressures to the speci-
fied pressure. Refer to “Tyres and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
JD RHD 6.QXP 7/21/2012 12:57 PM Page 32
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
• Engine compartment precautions (Diesel engine). . . 7-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
• Owner maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• For Europe, Except Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
• Except Russia, for Russia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-32
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the coolant level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Parking brake - hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fuel filter (for Diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Draining water from fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Extracting air from the fuel filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Battery capacity label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-53
• Checking tyre inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Tyre rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Wheel alignment and tyre balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tyre traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Tyre maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Tyre sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 1
• Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
• Headlight and front fog light aiming (for Europe) . . 7-87
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-96
• License plate light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
• Interior light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
7
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 2
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OJD072001R/OJD072002R
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
3. Positive battery terminal
4. Negative battery terminal
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
■■
Petrol engine - GDI
■■
Petrol engine - MPI
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 3
Maintenance
47
OJD072003R
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
3. Positive battery terminal
4. Negative battery terminal
5. Fuse box
6. Air cleaner
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
11. Fuel filter
■■
Diesel engine
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 4
75
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
We recommend in general that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorised
Kia dealer. You should retain documents
that show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule.You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport. Repairs and
adjustments required as a result of
improper maintenance or a lack of
required maintenance are not covered
when your vehicle is covered by warranty.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 5
Maintenance
67
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
• The injector operates at high voltage
(maximum 200v). Therefore, the follow-
ing accidents may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from the
operating injector may cause the arti-
ficial heart pacemaker to malfunction.
• Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room whilst the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
whilst the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
whilst the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine whilst the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured whilst
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
• Working under the bonnet with
the engine running is dangerous.
It becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine whilst work-
ing under the bonnet, make cer-
tain that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling fans.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room whilst engine is run-
ning, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 6
77
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
We recommend that the following lists
are vehicle checks and inspections that
should be performed by the owner or an
authorised Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe, depend-
able operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recommend
that you consult an authorised Kia deal-
er.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labour, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windscreen washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.
• Check the radiator and condenser.
Check if the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked
with leaves, dirt or insects etc.
If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condi-
tion, we recommend that you contact
an authorised Kia dealer.
Whilst operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
elling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle/double
clutch transmission P (Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning
system during or after use is normal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 7
Maintenance
87
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tyres including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windscreen washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
bonnet hinges.
• Lubricate door and bonnet locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 8
79
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 9
Maintenance
107
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
2
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced according to the severe mainte-
nance schedule.
*
3
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil
and engine oil filter every 20,000 km or 12 months.
*
4
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil
and filter every 15,000 km for MPI engine and replace
engine oil and filter every 10,000 km for GDI engine.
*
5
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and main-
tained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
*
6
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance sched-
ule and we recommanded that you consult an authorised
Kia dealer for details.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately
regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommanded
that you consult an authorised Kia dealer for details.
*
8
: Manual transaxle and double clutch transmission fluid
should be changed anytime they have been submerged in
water.
*
9
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if
necessary correct or replace.
*
10
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
11
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. We recommended that the system
should be checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
*
12
: If good quality petrols that meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorised Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 10
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 12 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 11
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Petrol - Nickel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 12
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Petrol) *
11
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 36 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 13
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 48 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Petrol - Nieckel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 14
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 60 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 60 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❑ Replace spark plug (Petrol - Iridium)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 15
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 144 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Petrol) *
11
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(180,000 km (120,000 miles) or 72 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Petrol - Nieckel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 16
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 168 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 84 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Replace coolant *
10
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 17
Maintenance
187
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA (CONT.)
240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 192 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
(Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
(240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect double clutch transmission fluid (if equipped) *
8
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) *
1
*
2
*
3
*
5
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol) *
1
*
4
*
5
(240,000 km (160,000 miles) or 96 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
6
❑ Replace spark plugs (Petrol - Nieckel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
9
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Replace coolant *
10
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
12
(Every 15,000 km or 12months)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 18
719
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - FOR EUROPE, EXCEPT RUSSIA
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K, L
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
or 12 months
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
C, E
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Double clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Petrol *
1
Diesel *
2
*
1
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 7,500 km or 6 months for MPI engine and 5,000 km or 6
months for GDI engine.
*
2
: If the recommended oil is not available, replace engine oil and engine oil filter every 10,000 km or 6 months.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 19
Maintenance
207
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt spread roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or
in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather
above 32 °C (90 °F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving in very cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Disc brakes and pads,
calipers and rotors
I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake (Hand type) I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, G, H
Drive shaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently depending
on the condition
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently depending
on the condition
C, E, G
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 20
721
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: Inspect drive belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and
if necessary correct or replace.
*
2
: Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*
3
: The engine oil level should be checked regularly and main-
tained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
*
4
: This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently.
If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow
restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem
etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of main-
tenance schedule and we recommand that you consult an
authorised Kia dealer for details
*
5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*
6
: Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. We recommended that the system
should be checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
*
7
: The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but peri-
odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some impor-
tant matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and we recommand
that you consult an authorised Kia dealer for details.
*
8
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*
9
: If good quality petrols that meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not avail-
able, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorised Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:46 PM Page 21
Maintenance
227
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 22
723
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 23
Maintenance
247
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 24
725
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical systems
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filler cap (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap (Petrol)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Replace spark plug (Petrol - Nickel)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 25
Maintenance
267
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 26
727
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
6
(Every 95,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months *
5
)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 27
Maintenance
287
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 28
729
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all electrical system
❑ Inspect brake pedal, clutch pedal (if equipped)
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt (Petrol) *
1
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filler cap (Diesel)
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections (Petrol, Diesel)
❑ Inspect parking brake (Hand type)
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tyre (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapour hose and fuel filler cap (Petrol)
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (Petrol, if equipped)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- Except Middle East *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - MPI)
- For Middle East *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months*
3
)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Petrol - GDI) *
2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - For Russia *
2
*
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Diesel) - Except Russia *
2
*
3
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter (Petrol) *
7
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel) *
4
❑ Replace spark plug (Petrol - Nickel)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Petrol - Iridium) *
5
(Every 160,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120months)
❑ Replace coolant *
8
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months *
5
)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives (Petrol) *
9
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - For Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt (Diesel) - Except Russia *
1
(At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 29
Maintenance
307
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - EXCEPT EUROPE, FOR RUSSIA
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
Petrol -
MPI
Except Middle
East
R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
For Middle East R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Petrol - GDI R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J
Diesel
For Russia R
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
Except Russia R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Air cleaner filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 30
731
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle tow-
ing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
L : Driving in very cold weather
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals Driving condition
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Front suspension ball joints I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F, G
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake (Hand type) I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, G, H
Driveshaft and boots I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter R
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
C, E, G
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 31
Maintenance
327
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,
cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation
and replace if necessary. Drive belts
should be checked periodically for proper
tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. We recommend that
the fuel filter be replaced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. We
recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses
and connections be replaced by an
authorised Kia dealer.
Vapour hose and fuel filler cap
The vapour hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals
specified in the maintenance schedule.
Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel
filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are sub-
ject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-
duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-
ous injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move more than 30cm closer to
the ECU or wiring harness within
the engine room whilst engine is
running, since the high currents in
the Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 32
733
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
We recommend that the air cleaner filter
be replaced by an authorised Kia dealer.
Spark plugs (for petrol engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(for petrol engine)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
We recommend that the valve clearance
be serviced by an authorised Kia dealer.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts, such as
radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Double clutch transmission fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the double clutch transmission
fluid according to the maintenance
schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not be
checked under normal usage conditions.
But in severe conditions, we recommend
that the system be serviced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer in accordance to the
maintenance schedule.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid colour is basi-
cally red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic
transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.
It is normal condition and you should
not judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed colour.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunc-
tion and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 33
Maintenance
347
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Brake pads, calipers and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the Kia
web site.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the EPB actuator, wiring and connec-
tors.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 34
735
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
OGDE071003
■ Petrol engine
OGD071004
■ Diesel engine
OGD071005
■ Petrol engine
OGD071006
■ Diesel engine
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 35
Maintenance
367
Changing the engine oil and filter
We recommend that the engine oil and
filter be replaced by an authorised Kia
dealer.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 36
737
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug whilst the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least once
a year, at the beginning of the winter sea-
son, and before travelling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap whilst the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so might
lead to cooling system and
engine damage and could result
in serious personal injury from
escaping hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back whilst
the pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 37
Maintenance
387
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the level
to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent
coolant refill is required, we recommend
that the system be inspected by an
authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
The electric motor (cool-
ing fan) is controlled by
engine coolant tempera-
ture, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect
the negative battery cable.
OGD071007
■ Petrol engine
OGD071008
■ Diesel engine
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 38
739
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deion-
ized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improp-
er coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
Changing the coolant
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorised Kia dealer.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric around
the radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
OMD072005K-1
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 39
Maintenance
407
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, we
recommend that the system be checked
by an authorised Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
we recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
OJD072009R
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 40
741
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid level
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Plain water may be used if washer fluid is
not available. However, use washer sol-
vent with antifreeze characteristics in
cold climates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
whilst fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
OGD071010
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windscreen and may
cause loss of vehicle control or
damage to paint and body trim.
• Windscreen Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windscreen washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contact-
ing windscreen washer fluid.
Serious injury or death could
occur.
PARKING BRAKE - HAND TYPE
OJD052010/H
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 41
Maintenance
427
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
we recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorised
Kia dealer.
Extracting air from the fuel filter
If you drive until you have no fuel left or if
you replace the fuel filter, be sure to
extract air from the fuel system as it
makes it difficult to start the engine.
1. Pump up and down(1) approximately
50 times until the pump is hard.
2. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
3. Pump up and down(1) approximately
15 times.
4. Extract air from the fuel filter by remov-
ing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
5. Pump up and down(1) approximately 5
times.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Use cloths when you extract air so that
the fuel is not sprayed around.
• Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or
the injection pump before starting the
engine to prevent fire.
• Finally, check each part if the fuel is
leaking.
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
OGDE071011R
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 42
743
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OMD070011
OMD070010 OMD070012
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 43
Maintenance
447
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:47 PM Page 44
745
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the main-
tenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides.
2. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
OJD072013ROJD072012/H
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 45
Maintenance
467
3. Remove the cover whilst pressing the
lock on both side of the cover and
remove the climate control air filter.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OVG079016OJD072014R
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 46
747
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windscreen difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windscreen
or the wiper blades with foreign matter
can reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
screen wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,
paint thinner, or other solvents on
or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122/H
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 47
Maintenance
487
Front windscreen wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift up
the blade clip.
3. Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
4. Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
screen.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windscreen, since it
may chip or crack the windscreen.
OHM078059/H
OSBL071001/H
OSBL071003R
OSBL071002R
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 48
749
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the centre part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, we recommend that
the wiper blade be replaced by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
OGD071041
OGD071042
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 49
Maintenance
507
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
OGDE071015R
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Pb
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 50
751
Maintenance
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
(see the example)
1. CMF65L-BCI : The Kia model name of
battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in amperes
by EN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
whilst the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load whilst the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
(Continued)
The battery contains lead.
Do not dispose of it after
use. Please return the bat-
tery to an authorised Kia
dealer to be recycled.
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
If you use unauthorised electronic
devices, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unauthorised
devices.
OJD072039
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
(Continued)
Example
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 51
Maintenance
527
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery termi-
nal.
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 52
753
Maintenance
TYRES AND WHEELS
Tyre care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tyre
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tyre inflation
pressures
All tyre pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means
the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tyre
wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tyre underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tyre failures that can
result in the loss of vehicle con-
trol leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OJD082005/H
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 53
Maintenance
547
WARNING - Tyre inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tyre life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tyre failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tyre pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tyre each time you
check the pressure of other
tyres.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tyres can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tyres
have been damaged, replace
them.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tyre pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tyre frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the sys-
tem be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the centre of the tyre tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
• Warm tyres normally exceed
recommended cold tyre pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tyres to adjust the pres-
sure or the tyres will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tyre
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 54
755
Maintenance
Checking tyre inflation pressure
Check your tyres once a month or
more.
Also, check the tyre pressure of the
spare tyre.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tyre pressure. You can not tell if your
tyres are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tyres may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tyre's inflation pressure
when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tyre
valve stem. Press the tyre gauge
firmly onto the valve to get a pres-
sure measurement. If the cold tyre
inflation pressure matches the rec-
ommended pressure on the tyre and
loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pres-
sure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tyre, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the
tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
WARNING
• Inspect your tyres frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tyre pressure gauge.
• Tyres with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tyre failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
The recommended cold tyre
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tyre label located on the
driver's side centre pillar.
• Worn tyres can cause acci-
dents. Replace tyres that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tyre. Kia
recommends that you check
the spare every time you
check the pressure of the
other tyres on your vehicle.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 55
Maintenance
567
Tyre rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tyres be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tyres for
correct balance.
When rotating tyres, check for
uneven wear and damage. Abnormal
wear is usually caused by incorrect
tyre pressure, improper wheel align-
ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe
braking or severe cornering. Look for
bumps or bulges in the tread or side
of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find
either of these conditions. Replace
the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.
After rotation, be sure to bring the
front and rear tyre pressures to spec-
ification and check lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section 8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tyres are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tyres that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tyre for tyre rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tyres under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
■ Without a spare tyre
■ With a full-size spare tyre (if equipped)
■ Directional tyres (if equipped)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 56
757
Maintenance
Wheel alignment and tyre balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tyre
life and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tyre
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tyre replacement
If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread
wear indicator will appear as a solid
band across the tread. This shows
there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of
tread left on the tyre. Replace the
tyre when this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tyre.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
WARNING - Replacing
tyres
• Driving on worn-out tyres is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tyres designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tyre and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tyres, be sure to equip all
four tyres with the tyre and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 57
Maintenance
587
Compact spare tyre replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tyre has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tyre.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tyre.
The replacement compact spare tyre
should be the same size and design
tyre as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tyre
wheel. The compact spare tyre is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tyre wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tyre.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
(Continued)
• The use of any other tyre size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tyre clearance, snow tyre
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tyres at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tyres as a pair.
Replacing just one tyre can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tyre
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tyres, all 4
tyres must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-
ferent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tyre clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 58
759
Maintenance
Tyre traction
Tyre traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tyres, tyres that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tyres should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tyre maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tyres installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tyre sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tyre and also provides
the tyre identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tyre in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tyre size designation
A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tyres for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tyre size designation
mean.
Example tyre size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tyre size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
195/65R15 91H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tyres have this marking).
195 - Tyre width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tyre construction code (Radial).
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 59
Maintenance
607
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
91 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tyre can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX15
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tyre speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tyre size desig-
nation on the sidewall of the tyre.
This symbol corresponds to that
tyre's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tyre life
(TIN : Tyre Identification Number)
Any tyres that are over 6 years,
based on the manufacturing date,
tyre strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tyres). Therefore, the
tyres (including the spare tyre)
should be replaced by new ones.You
can find the manufacturing date on
the tyre sidewall (possibly on the
inside of the wheel), displaying the
DOT Code. The DOT Code is a
series of numbers on a tyre consist-
ing of numbers and English letters.
The manufacturing date is designat-
ed by the last four digits (characters)
of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tyre size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1612 represents
that the tyre was produced in the
16th week of 2012.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 60
761
Maintenance
4. Tyre ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric are in the tyre. Tyre
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tyre, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tyre and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tyre. When
replacing the tyres on the vehicle,
always use a tyre that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tyre.
7. Uniform tyre quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tyre sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tyre when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tyre
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tyre graded
100.
The relative performance of tyres
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle
tyres.The tyres available as standard
or optional equipment on your vehi-
cles may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING - Tyre age
Tyres degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tyres generally be replaced
after six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot cli-
mates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the
aging process. Failure to follow
this Warning can result in sud-
den tyre failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious
injury or death.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 61
Maintenance
627
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tyres ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tyre’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tyre to
degenerate and reduce tyre life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tyre is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tyre
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tyre is established for a tyre that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tyre failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:48 PM Page 62
763
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 (or 4) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
others in the engine compartment near
the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
Before replacing a blown fuse, discon-
nect the negative battery cable.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and we recommend
that you consult an authorised Kia deal-
er.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and multi fuse type for higher amperage
ratings.
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse type
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
ORB072110/ODM072020
Normal
Blown
■ Battery fuse terminal
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 63
Maintenance
647
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorised Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigar lighter fuse.
If the headlights, fog lights, turn signal
lights, position lights or interior lights do
not work and there is nothing wrong with
the bulbs, we recommend that you con-
sult with an authorised Kia dealer.
OJD072016R
OGDE071017R
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fas-
tening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-
nals may be fastened incomplete-
ly, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that you
consult with an authorised Kia
dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause con-
tact failure and system malfunc-
tion.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 64
765
Maintenance
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF posi-
tion, some items such as audio and digi-
tal clock must be reset and transmitter
(or smart key) may not work properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for pro-
longed periods more than 1 month,
move the fuse switch to the OFF position
to prevent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-
ing the tap and pulling up.
OGDE071019R
OGD071021
Diesel only
OJD072017R
CAUTION
• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position whilst driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be worn out.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 65
Maintenance
667
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that you
consult an authorised Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel on the right
side in the engine compartment.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse or main fuse is blown,
we recommend that you consult an
authorised Kia dealer.
OJD072018
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse box cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water leaking in.
OGDE071020R
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 66
767
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inner fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
✽
✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OJD072019R
OJD072020
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 67
Maintenance
687
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
1 30A
DRV
P/SEAT DRV
4WAY : Driver Lumbar Support Switch
6WAY : Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module
2 25A H/LP WASHER ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay)
3 25A
RH
P/WDW RH
Power Window Relay RH, Driver/Passenger Safety Power Window Module,
Rear Safety Power Window Module RH
4 10A T/GATE OPEN Tail Gate Relay
5 25A
LH
P/WDW LH
Power Window Relay LH, Driver/Passenger Safety Power
Window Module, Rear Safety Power Window Module LH
6 20A DR LOCK Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Dead Lock Relay
7 20A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
8 20A
POWER
OUTLET2
POWER
OUTLET 2
Cigarette Lighter, Rear Power Outlet
9 20A
PASS
P/SEAT ASS Passenger Lumbar Support Switch
10 15A
RR
RR WIPER ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor
11 7.5A
MODULE
3
MODULE 3 Auto Light & Photo Sensor, AT lever (Shift Lock), Hazard Switch
12 15A
FRT
S/HEATER FRT Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
13 10A
ACC
ACC
A/V & Navigation Head Unit (W/O ISG), Audio (W/O ISG), DC-DC Convertor (With ISG),
Digital Clock, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Outside Mirror Switch, Outside Mirror
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 68
769
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
14 7.5A A/CON Cluster Ionizer, A/C Control Module, Blower Relay, PTC Relay
15 7.5A
IG2
IG2
ICM Relay Box (Head Lamp Washer Relay), Rain Sensor, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Panorama Sunroof, Smart, Key Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
Driver Seat Warmer Module
16 10A HTD MIRR Driver/Passenger Outside Mirror, ECU, A/C Control Module
17 7.5A
INTERIOR
LAMP
Glove Box Lamp, Luggage Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp,
Overhead Console Lamp
18 7.5A
2
PDM 2 Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
19 7.5A B/HORN ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
20 20A SUNROOF Panorama Sunroof
21 10A
MODULE
2
MODULE 2
Electric Parking Brake Module, DC-DC Convertor (With ISG),
Head Lamp Levelling Device Switch, A/C Control Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor,
Smart Parking Assist Control Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, ATM Shift Lever IND.,
Centre Facia Switch, Crash Pad Lower Switch, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
Driver IMS Module
22 15A HTD STRG Steering Wheel Heater
23 20A
IG1
IG1 E/R Fuse & Relay Box (ECU4, B/UP LAMP, ABS3, TCU2 FUSE)
24 25A
FRT
WIPER Wiper Relay , ICM Relay Box (Rain Sensor Relay), Front Wiper Motor
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 69
Maintenance
707
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
25 7.5A
MEMOR
Y
2
MEMORY 2 Immobiliser Module (W/O Smart Key)
26 7.5A
MEMOR
Y
1
MEMORY 1
Driver/Passenger Outside Mirror (Folding), Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle,
Driver IMS Module, Centre Facia Switch, Instrument Cluster, Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Module, BCM, A/C Control Module, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay),
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Rear Parking Assist Switch,
Data Link Connector, Buzzer
27 10A
BRAKE
SWITCH
BRAKE
SWITCH
Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
28 7.5A
CLUSTER
CLUSTER Instrument Cluster, Digital Clock
29 7.5A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
30 7.5A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
31 7.5A START
Start Relay, ECU, Ignition Lock Switch, Transaxle Range Switch,
TCU, Smart Key Control Module
32 15A
MULTI
MEDIA
MULTI MEDIA
A/V & Navigation Head Unit (W/O ISG), Audio (W/O ISG),
DC-DC Convertor (With ISG), Digital Clock
33 10A
SPAR
E
SPARE -
34 25A
1
PDM 1 Smart Key Control Module
35 15A
POWER
OUTLET1
P/OUTLET 1 Front Power Outlet
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 70
771
Maintenance
No. Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
36 7.5A
IND
A/BAG IND Instrument Cluster
37 10A
MODULE
1
MODULE 1
BCM, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Module, AT Lever,
Audio, Adaptive Front Lighting Module, LDWS Unit
38 15A A/BAG SRS Control Module
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 71
Maintenance
727
Engine compartment fuse panel
(for petrol engine)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OGDE071023R
OJD072021
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 72
773
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(for diesel engine)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
OGDE071023R
OJD072022
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 73
Maintenance
747
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
80A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
60A
B+1
B+1
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS1 (H/LAMP HI LH,H/LAMP LOW LH, FRT TURN LH,
POSITION LAMP LH), IPS2 (STATIC BENDING LAMP LH/RH, DRL LH/RH)
40A
1
ABS1 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module
40A
2
ABS2 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A
IG2
IG2
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, START RELAY
With Smart Key : IG2 RELAY, START RELAY
60A
PTC
PTC PTC Relay
60A
B+2
B+2
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS3 (H/LAMP HI RH,H/LAMP LOW RH, FRT TURN RH,POSITION
LAMP RH), IPS4 (FRT FOG LAMP LH/RH, REAR TURN LH/RH), IPS5 (REAR FOG LAMP,
INT TAIL LAMP)
FUSE
40A
RR
HTD
RR HTD RR HTD RELAY , RR HTD
40A
IG1
IG1
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : IG1 RELAY, ACC RELAY,
INNER FUSE PANEL (FUSE No. - 8/13/21/23/28/29/35/36/37/38)
40A
DCT2
DCT2 TCU (DCT)
30A
1
EPB1 Electric Parking Brake Module
30A
2
EPB2 Electric Parking Brake Module
40A C/FAN C/FAN LO RELAY, C/FAN HI RELAY
Engine compartment main fuse panel (for petrol engine)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:49 PM Page 74
775
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
15A DEICER ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
15A
STOP
LAMP
STOP LAMP Stop Signal Electronic Relay , HAC RELAY
20A
5
TCU1 TCU
40A
DCT1
DCT1 TCU (DCT)
40A
7
EMS EMS Box (FUSE No. - 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9)
50A
B+3
B+3 Inner Fuse Panel (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse No. - 6/19/20/17/32/26/25)
50A BLOWER BLOWER RELAY
10A A/CON A/C Control Module
10A WIPER FRT ECU, Rain Sensor
10A
B/UP
LAMP
B/UP LP M/T : Back-up Lamp Switch, A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
15A
4
ECU4 Smart Key Control Module, Immobiliser Module, ECU
10A
3
ABS3 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Yaw Rate Sensor, HAC, ESS RELAY
15A
6
TCU2 Transaxle Range Switch, TCU, Stop Lamp Switch
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 75
Maintenance
767
Symbol Relay Name Type
LO
COOLING FAN LOW RELAY PLUG MICRO
HI
COOLING FAN HIGH RELAY PLUG MICRO
ESS
ESS RELAY PLUG MICRO
BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO
RR
HTD
REAR DEFOGGER RELAY PLUG MICRO
4 (IG2)
IG2 RELAY PLUG MICRO
FRT WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO
3 (IG1)
IG1 RELAY PLUG MICRO
1
START RELAY PLUG MICRO
2 (ACC)
ACC RELAY PLUG MICRO
PTC
PTC RELAY PLUG MINI
HAC
HAC RELAY PLUG MICRO
Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Relay Name
15A
F/PUM
P
F/PUMP FUEL PUMP RELAY
15A
3
ECU3 ECU
15A HORN Horn Relay
10A
INJECTO
R
INJECTOR
INJECTOR, ECU,
FUEL PUMP RELAY
10A
2
ECU2 ECU
20A
IGN
COIL
IGN COIL
Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4,
Condenser
10A
9
SENSOR2
E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(COOLING LOW RELAY),
Oil Control Valve #1/#2
20A
1
ECU1 ECU
10A
8
SENSOR1
Oxygen Sensor (UP/DOWN),
Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 76
777
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
80A
1
POWER
STEERING
EPS Unit
60A
B+1
B+1
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS1 (H/LAMP HI LH,H/LAMP LOW LH, FRT TURN LH, POSITION LAMP LH),
IPS2 (STATIC BENDING LAMP LH/RH, DRL LH/RH)
40A
1
ABS1 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module
40A
2
ABS2 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
40A
IG2
IG2
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, START RELAY
With Smart Key
: IG2 RELAY, START RELAY, INNER FUSE PANEL (
Fuse No. -
14/24/22/15/10)
60A
B+2
B+2
Inner Fuse Panel, IPS3 (H/LAMP HI RH,H/LAMP LOW RH, FRT TURN RH,
POSITION LAMP RH), IPS4 (FRT FOG LAMP LH/RH, REAR TURN LH/RH),
IPS5 (REAR FOG LAMP, INT TAIL LAMP)
FUSE
40A
RR
HTD
RR HTD RR HTD RELAY , RR HTD
40A
IG1
IG1
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
With Smart Key : IG1 RELAY, ACC RELAY, INNER FUSE PANEL (Fuse No. - 38/36/21/37/
23/29/28, Fuse No. - 13/8/35)
30A
1
EPB1 Electric Parking Brake Module
30A
2
EPB2 Electric Parking Brake Module
50A C/FAN C/FAN LO RELAY, C/FAN HI RELAY
15A DEICER ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
15A
STOP
LAMP
STOP LAMP Stop Signal Electronic Relay, HAC RELAY
Engine compartment main fuse panel (for diesel engine)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 77
Maintenance
787
Fuse Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Protected component
FUSE
20A
5
TCU1 TCU
40A
FUEL
HEATER
FUEL HEATER RELAY
40A
7
EMS EMS BOX (Fuse No. - 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9)
50A
B+3
B+3 Inner Fuse Panel (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse No. - 6/19/20/17/32/26/25)
50A BLOWER BLOWER RELAY
10A A/CON A/C Control Module
10A WIPER FRT ECU, Rain Sensor
10A
B/UP
LAMP
B/UP LP M/T : Back-up Lamp Switch, A/T : Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
15A
4
ECU4
Smart Key Control Module, Immobiliser Module, ECU, Air Flow Sensor,
Fuel Water Sensor
10A
3
ABS3 ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Yaw Rate Sensor, HAC, ESS RELAY
15A
6
TCU2 Transaxle Range Switch, TCU
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 78
779
Maintenance
Symbol Relay Name Type
LO
COOLING FAN LOW RELAY PLUG MICRO
HI
COOLING FAN HIGH RELAY PLUG MICRO
ESS
ESS RELAY PLUG MICRO
BLOWER RELAY PLUG MICRO
RR
HTD
REAR DEFOGGER RELAY PLUG MICRO
4 (IG2)
IG2 RELAY PLUG MICRO
FRT WIPER RELAY PLUG MICRO
3 (IG1)
IG1 RELAY PLUG MICRO
1
START RELAY PLUG MICRO
2 (ACC)
ACC RELAY PLUG MICRO
FUEL HEATER RELAY PLUG MINI
HAC
HAC RELAY PLUG MICRO
Fuse rating Symbol Fuse Name Relay Name
15A
SPARE
SPARE -
15A HORN HORN RELAY
10A
2
ECU2
Oil Level Sensor, Fuel
Pressure Control Valve
20A
SPARE
SPARE -
10A
9
SENSOR2
E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(COOLING FAN LOW RELAY),
Lambda Sensor (D4FB),
Stop Lamp Switch
20A
1
ECU1 ECU
10A
8
SENSOR1
DSL Box (PTC1 RELAY,
GLOW RELAY),
VGT Control Sensor,
Camshaft Position Sensor,
Electrical EGR Valve
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 79
Maintenance
807
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Diesel engine only)
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
80A Glow Relay
PTC 1 50A PTC 1 Relay
PTC 2 50A PTC 2 Relay
PTC 3 50A PTC 3 Relay
OGDE071059
OGD071024
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 80
781
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
After driving in heavy rain or washing
the vehicle, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear foggy. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle during
rain and does not indicate a problem
with your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend
that the system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position (smart key:
turn off the engine) and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or getting an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you do not have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
we recommend that you consult an
authorised Kia dealer. In many
cases, it is difficult to replace vehi-
cle light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb. This
is especially true if you have to
remove the headlight assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 81
Maintenance
827
Front light replacement
(1) Front turn signal light
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Static bending light (if equipped)
(4) Position light
(5) Position light / Daytime running light
(DRL, LED Type) (if equipped)
(6) Headlight (High)
(7) Daytime running light (DRL, Bulb type)
(if equipped)
(8) Front fog light (if equipped)
1. Turn off the engine and open the bon-
net.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Disconnect the power connector front
the back of the headlight assembly.
If you can reach the bulb without remov-
ing the headlight assembly, you do not
need to do step 4 to 7.
4. Loosen the retaining bolts on the front
bumper .
- Front bumper upper board : 4 EA
- Front bumper cover : 1 EA
OJD072052
OJD072026
■ Type A
■ Type B
OJD072053
OJD072054
Diesel only
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:50 PM Page 82
783
Maintenance
5. Pull out the front bumper cover.
6. Loosen the retaining bolt .
7. Pull out the headlight assembly from
the body of the vehicle.
Headlight (High, 1) and static bending
light (2, if equipped)
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
section.
8. Remove the cover by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
9. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
10. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward.
11. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
12. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
OJD072041
OJD072055
OJD072062
OJD072056
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 83
Maintenance
847
13. Connect the headlight bulb socket
connector.
14. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
15. Connect the power connector to the
back of the headlight assembly.
Position light (3, bulb type)
Follow the steps 1 to 9 from the previous
page.
10. Pull out the socket from the assembly.
11. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
12. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
13. Install the socket into the assembly.
14. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Headlight (Low, Non-HID Type)
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
page.
8. Remove the cover by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
9. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
10. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
11. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
12. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
13. Install the headlight bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
OJD072042
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 84
785
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
If the headlight aiming adjustment is
necessary after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled, consult an authorised Kia
dealer.
Headlight (Low, HID type),
Position light/DRL (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior performance
vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are esti-
mated by the manufacturer to last twice
as long or longer than halogen bulbs
depending on their frequency of use.
They will probably require replacement
at some point in the life of the vehicle.
Cycling the headlamps on and off more
than typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent lamps.
If a headlamp goes out after a period of
operation but will immediately relight
when the headlamp switch is cycled it is
likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced.
HID lighting components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen bulbs
thus have higher replacement cost.
❈❈
Traffic Change (For Europe)
The low beam light distribution is asym-
metric. If you go abroad to a country with
opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric
part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To
prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
WARNING - HID Headlight
low beam (if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON bulb)
due to electric shock danger. If the
low beam (XENON bulb) is not
working, we recommend that the
system be checked by an autho-
rised Kia dealer.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 85
Maintenance
867
Turn signal light
Follow the steps 1 to 7 from the previous
page.
8. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
9. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
10. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
11. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized
gas that will produce flying pieces
of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be operated
only when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb is damaged or cracked,
replace it immediately and carefully
dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OJD072044
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 86
787
Maintenance
Front fog light, Daytime running light
(if equipped)
1. Pull the wheel guard down by rotating
the screws.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
Headlight and front fog light aim-
ing (for Europe)
Headlight aiming
Without AFLS
1. Inflate the tyres to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tyre,
and tools.
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
tres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through centre of head
lamps) on the screen.
OJD072027
OJD072050
■ Fog light
■ Fog light+DRL
■ DRL
OJD072061/OJD072059/OJD072060
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 87
Maintenance
887
4. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low beam up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
To aim the high beam up or down, turn
the driver (3) clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
With AFLS
1. Turn off the engine
2. Turn the light switch to the low beam
position.
3. Position the tyres straight ahead with
the steering wheel.
4. Turn on the engine.
5. Inflate the tyres to the specified pres-
sure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tyre,
and tools.
6. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
7. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines pass-
ing through respective head lamp cen-
tres) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through centre of head
lamps) on the screen.
8. With the head lamp and battery in nor-
mal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the hori-
zontal and vertical lines.
9. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counter-
clockwise. To aim the low beam up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise or
counterclockwise. To aim the high
beam up or down, turn the driver (3)
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Front fog light aiming
The front fog lamp can be aimed as the
same manner of the head lamps aiming.
With the front fog lamps and battery nor-
mal condition, aim the front fog lamps. To
aim the front fog lamp up or down, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counterclock-
wise.
OJD072028
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:51 PM Page 88
789
Maintenance
Unit: mm (in)
Aiming point
OJD072051
< Ground Height >
< Distance between lamps >
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (Low beam)
H2 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground (High beam)
H3 : Height between the fog lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (Low beam)
W2 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers (High beam)
W3 : Distance between the two fog lamp bulbs centers
centre
centre
centre
centres
centres
centres
Vehicle
condition
H1
H2
H3
W1
W2
W3
Without
AFLS
With AFLS With DRL
Without
DRL
Without
AFLS
With AFLS With DRL
Without
DRL
Without
driver
689
(27.1)
687
(27.0)
646
(25.4)
340
(13.4)
342
(13.5)
1,300
(51.2)
1,299
(51.1)
1,049
(41.3)
1,316
(51.8)
1,306
(51.4)
With driver
680
(26.8)
678
(26.7)
637
(25.1)
331
(13.0)
333
(13.1)
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 89
Maintenance
907
OMD051055L
Head lamp low beam (driver’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.
■ Based on 10m screen
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 90
791
Maintenance
OMD051054L
Head lamp low beam (front passenger’s side)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp levelling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp levelling device switch with 0 positions.
■ Based on 10m screen
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 91
Maintenance
927
OGDE071056_JD
Front fog light
1. Turn the front fog lamp on without the driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the allowable range (shaded region).
■ Based on 10m screen
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 92
793
Maintenance
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked by
an authorised Kia dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Rear turn signal light
(2) Stop/tail light
(3) Back-up light (for 5Door)
(4) Tail light or stop/tail light (for LED type)
(5) Rear fog light (for 5Door)
Rear fog light (Driver’s side) or
back-up light (Passenger’s side),
(for wagon)
❈ The actual rear combination lamp shape in
the vehicle may differ from illustration.
Outside light
Rear turn signal light and stop/tail light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
OJD072045OJD072029/H
OJD072030
OJD072063
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 93
Maintenance
947
6. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Stop and tail light or tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
Inside light
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
OJD072047
OJD072057
OJD072064
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Turn signal light
Stop/taillight
Turn signal light
Stop/tail light
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 94
795
Maintenance
❈ These below steps (4~6) only for the 5 Door
vehicle.
4. Loosen the retaining nuts.
5. Disconnect the power connector.
6. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
❈ Rear fog light is located only on the driver’s
side (for wagon)
Tail light or tail and stop light (Bulb type)
7. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
8. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
9. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
10. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with
the slots in the assembly. Push the
socket into the assembly and turn the
socket clockwise.
11. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OJD072048
OJD072058
■ 5 Door
■ Wagon
Rear fog light
Back up light
Stop light
OJD072065
RR
RR
ee
ee
aa
aa
rr
rr
ff
ff
oo
oo
gg
gg
//
//
BB
BB
aa
aa
cc
cc
kk
kk
uu
uu
pp
pp
ll
ll
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
TT
TT
aa
aa
ii
ii
ll
ll
ll
ll
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 95
Maintenance
967
Back-up light and rear fog light
(if equipped)
7. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
8. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
9. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
10. Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots on the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
11. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle
❈ Rear fog light is located only on the
driver’s side. (for wagon)
Tail light or stop and tail light (LED type)
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement
If the light does not operate, we recom-
mend that the system be checked by an
authorised Kia dealer.
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Remove the bulb assembly by press-
ing the tabs.
3. Remove the socket by turning it coun-
terclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb assembly securely
with the retaining screws.
OJD072037 OGD071046
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:52 PM Page 96
797
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp, vanity mirror lamp,
room lamp, luggage room lamp
and glove box lamp
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
■ Map lamp
■ Glove box lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp
■ Luggage room lamp
■ Room lamp
OGD071039/OTD079035/H/OJD072043/H/OJD072038/OGDE071057/OGD071038
--
--
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
--
--
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
WARNING
Prior to working on the interior
lights, ensure that the light is off to
avoid burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be careful not to dirt or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 97
Maintenance
987
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Ensure
drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors and rocker panels are kept clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted sur-
faces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 98
799
Maintenance
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
OJB037800
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 99
Maintenance
1007
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes whilst driving slowly to see
if they have been affected by water.
If braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly whilst maintaining a slow
forward speed.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 100
7 101
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-
nance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-
gent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produce cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 101
Maintenance
1027
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 102
7 103
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-
metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for the
proper way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its colour can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the colour
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 103
Maintenance
1047
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all emission
regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an autho-
rised Kia dealer in accordance with the
maintenance schedule.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
System
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapours from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
Canister
Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 104
7 105
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions whilst maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorised electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge or fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorised electric
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though
colourless and odorless, it is dan-
gerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poisoning.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 105
Maintenance
1067
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. We recommend that the system be
inspected by an authorised Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the cat-
alytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-
tem removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driv-
ing condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automati-
cally removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot whilst the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off.
Keep away from the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic, you may get
burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 106
7 107
Maintenance
If the malfunction indicator light contin-
ues to be blinked in spite of the proce-
dure, we recommend that the system be
checked by an authorised Kia dealer.
If you continue to drive with the malfunc-
tion indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regu-
lated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be dam-
aged and white smoke can be emit-
ted.
JD RHD 7.QXP 7/21/2012 12:53 PM Page 107
Specifications & Consumer information
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Weight and volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tyre specification and pressure label. . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 1
Specifications & Consumer information
28
DIMENSIONS
ENGINE
Item Petrol 1.4 Petrol 1.6 Diesel 1.4 Diesel 1.6
Displacement cc
(cu. in)
1,396 (85.19) 1,591 (97.09) 1,396 (85.12)
1,582 (96.53)
Bore x Stroke mm
(in.)
77x74.99
(3.03x2.95)
77x85.44
(3.03x3.36)
75x79
(2.95x3.11)
77.2x84.5
(3.03x3.32)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
4, In-line
Item
mm (in)
5 Door Wagon
Overall length 4,310 (169.7) 4,505 (177.4)
Overall width 1,780 (70.1) 1,780 (70.1)
Overall height
Except Russia 1,470 (57.9) 1,485 (58.5)
For Russia 1,480 (58.3) 1,495 (58.9)
Front tread
195/65R15 Steel wheel 1,563 (61.5) 1,563 (61.5)
205/55R16
Steel wheel 1,553 (61.1) 1,553 (61.1)
Aluminum wheel 1,555 (61.2) 1,555 (61.2)
225/45R17 Aluminum wheel 1,549 (61.0) 1,549 (61.0)
Rear tread
195/65R15 Steel wheel 1,571 (61.9) 1,571 (61.9)
205/55R16
Steel wheel 1,561 (61.5) 1,561 (61.5)
Aluminum wheel 1,563 (61.5) 1,563 (61.5)
225/45R17 Aluminum wheel 1,557 (61.3) 1,557 (61.3)
Wheelbase 2,650 (104.3)
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 2
83
Specifications & Consumer information
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH R-1234yf)
WEIGHT AND VOLUME
Item
Weight or
Volume
Classification
Refrigerant 500±25g R-1234yf
Compressor lubricant 150±10cc PAG (FD46XG)
For vehicles equipped with R-1234yf * For vehicles equipped with R-134a *
Item
Weight or
Volume
Classification
Refrigerant 500±25g R-134a
Compressor lubricant 150±10cc PAG (FD46XG)
*: Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of producing.
You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied your vehicle at the label inside of bonnet. Refer to section 8 for more
detail location of air conditioning refrigerant label.
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
Min. : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max. : Behind front seat to roof.
DCT : Double clutch transmission
Item Petrol 1.4L Petrol 1.6L Diesel 1.4L Diesel 1.6L
Gross vehicle
weight
kg (lbs.)
M/T
5 Door 1,820 (4,012) 1,820 (4,012) 1,910 (4,211) 1,920 (4,211)
Wagon 1,820 (4,012) 1,820 (4,012) 1,910 (4,211) 1,920 (4,211)
A/T
5 Door - 1,850 (4,079) - 1,940 (4,277)
Wagon - 1,850 (4,079) - 1,940 (4,277)
DCT
5 Door - 1,840 (4,057) - -
Wagon - 1,850 (4,079) - -
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
5Door - Min. : 380 (13.42), Max. 1,318 (46.54)
Wagon - Min : 528 (18.65), Max. 1,642 (57.99)
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 3
Specifications & Consumer information
48
BULB WATTAGE
HID : High Intensity Discharge
AFLS : Adaptive Front-Lighting System
* : if equipped
Light Bulb
5 Door Wagon
Wattage Bulb type Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlights
Low
55 or 35
(AFLS with HID)
H7LL or D1S*
55 or 35
(AFLS with HID)
H7LL or D1S*
High 55 H7LL 55 H7LL
Static bending light* 55 H7LL 55 H7LL
Daytime running light 21/LED P21/5WXL/LED 21/LED P21/5WXL/LED
Front turn signal lights 21 PY21WLL 21 PY21WLL
Position lights 5/LED W5WLL/LED 5/LED W5WLL/LED
Side repeater lights 5 5W 5 5W
Front fog lights 35 H8L 21 P21WL
Rear
Rear fog light 21 P21WL 21 P21WL
Stop and tail lights 21/5 or LED P21/5WL or LED 21/5 or LED P21/5WL or LED
Rear turn signal lights 21 P21WL 21 P21WL
Tail light 5 or LED P21/5WL or LED 5 or LED P21WL or LED
Back-up lights 16 W16W 21 P21WL
High mounted stop light LED LED LED LED
License plate lights 5 W5W 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamps 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Room lamps 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON 8 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON 5 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON 5 FESTOON
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 4
85
Specifications & Consumer information
TYRES AND WHEELS
*
1
: Load Index
*
2
: Speed Symbol
*
3
: For eco dynamics trim
Item Tyre size
Wheel
size
Load Capacity Speed capacity
Inflation pressure bar(psi, kPa)
Wheel lug nut
torque Kgf·m
(lb·ft, N·m)
Normal load Maximum load
LI *
1
Kg SS *
2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size
tyre
195/65R15*
3
6.0J×15 91 615 H 210
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
2.5
(36,250)
9~11 (65~79,
88~107)
195/65R15 6.0J×15 91 615 H 210
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
205/55R16 6.5J×16 91 615 H 210
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
225/45R17 7.0J×17 91 615 V 240
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
Compact
spare tyre
T125/80D15 4.0T×15 95 690 M 130
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
T125/80D16 4.0T×16 97 730 M 130
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 5
Specifications & Consumer information
68
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Petrol
Engine
1.4 MPI
3.6 l (3.8 US qt.)
For Europe
API Service SL or SM, ACEA A5 or above
Except Europe
API Service SM, ILSAC GF-4 or above
1.6 MPI
1.6 GDI
Diesel
Engine
with DPF *
3
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
ACEA C2 or C3
without DPF *
3
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
ACEA B4
Manual
transaxle fluid
Petrol Engine
1.8 l ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~ 2.01US qt.)
HK MTF(SK),
HD MTF(H.K.SHELL),
Kia Genuine transaxle fluid (API GL-4, SAE 75W/85),
Consult an authorised Kia dealer for details.
Diesel
Engine
High
1.8 l ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~ 2.01US qt.)
Low
1.9 l ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
Automatic
transaxle fluid
Petrol Engine
7.3 l (7.71 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV
SK ATF SP-IV
NOCA ATF SP-IV
Kia genuine ATF SP-IV
Diesel Engine
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
Double clutch
transmission fluid
Petrol Engine
1.9 l ~ 2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
HK SYN MTF(SK),
HD SYN MTF(H.K.SHELL),
GS PAO MTF (GS CALTEX),
Kia Genuine transaxle fluid (API GL-4, SAE 75W/85),
Consult an authorised Kia dealer for details.
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 6
87
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommends Engine oil (For Europe)
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
Petrol Engine
5.7~5.8 l
(6.0~6.1 US qt.)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Diesel Engine
6.7~6.9 l
(7.1~7.3 US qt.)
Brake/clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel
53 l (14.0 US gal.)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on 8-8 page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
Diesel Particulate Filter
Supplier
Product
Petrol Engine Diesel Engine
Shell
HELIX ULTRA AH-E 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA AP 5W-30
HELIX ULTRA 5W-40
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 7
Specifications & Consumer information
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Petrol
Engine Oil
(For Europe)
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
0W-40, 5W-20 *
1
,5W-30, 5W-40
Petrol
Engine Oil *
2
(Except Europe)
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-20*
3
, 5W-30
*
1
: If you use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20, replace engine oil and filter after
driving 15,000 km or 12 month with MPI engine (10,000 km or 6 month with GDI engine) in
normal condition and replace engine oil and engine oil filter after driving 7,500 km or 6 month
with MPI engine (5,000 km or 6 month with GDI engine) in severe condition.
*
2
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE
5W-20,5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF 4 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in
your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
3
: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
Diesel Engine Oil
5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
0W-30
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 8
89
Specifications & Consumer information
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your vehi-
cle and in all legal matters pertaining to
its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the driver’s seat. To check the
number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windscreen from outside.
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
centre pillar gives the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
OJD082002
■ Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OBH088005N
■ VIN label (if equipped)
OBH088005N/H
OJD082003
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
AA
AA
TT
TT
yy
yy
pp
pp
ee
ee
BB
BB
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 9
Specifications & Consumer information
108
The tyres supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tyre label located on the driver's side
centre pillar gives the tyre pressures rec-
ommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
TYRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
OJD082005/H
■ Petrol engine
■ Diesel engine
OGDE081006
OGD081005
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 10
811
Specifications & Consumer information
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part num-
ber, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
The refrigerant label is located on the
underside of the bonnet.
OHC081001
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
REFRIGERANT LABEL
OJD082001
JD RHD 8.QXP 7/21/2012 12:45 PM Page 11
Index
I
I
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 1
Index
2
I
Active ECO system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-117
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Passenger’s front air bag ON indicator . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch . . . . . . . 3-50
Side impact air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
SRS components and functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Aming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Appearance care
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Armrest (Rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Ashtray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Auto defogging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Auto light/AFLS position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . 4-137
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Automatic transaxle / DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
DS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Sports mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Aux, USB and iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Barrier net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Battery replacement (Remote keyless entry) . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
A
B
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 2
I
3
Index
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Parking brakes (Hand type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Vehicle stability management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button . . . . . 5-9
Calender. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Camera (Rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Capacities (Lubricants) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Care
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Cargo area cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Centre console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Chains
Tyre chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Changing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Checking tyre inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134, 146, 7-45
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Compact spare tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Compact spare tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Crankcase emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
C
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 3
Index
4
I
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Dashboard, see instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . 4-46
Dashboard, see instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . 4-59
Daytime running light (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Deadlocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Defogging (Windscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Defroster (Rear window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Defrosting (Windscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Displays, see instrument cluster (Normal vision) . . 4-46
Displays, see instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . 4-59
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Deadlocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Double clutch transmission shift indicator
(Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Double clutch transmission shift indicator
(Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Drinks holders, see cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Driver position memory system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
DS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Economical operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Electric parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Emergency commodity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Emergency starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Emergency whilst driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
E
D
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 4
I
5
Index
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine compartment panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine temperature gauge (Normal vision). . . . . . . 4-54
Engine temperature gauge (Super vision) . . . . . . . . 4-67
Engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Exhaust emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-32
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
Exterior features
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Exterior overview(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Flat tyre (with spare tyre) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Changing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Compact spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Removing and storing the spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Flat tyre (with tyre mobility kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Fluid
Brakes/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Fluid
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fog light (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Fog light (rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Front seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Fuel gauge (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Fuel gauge (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Engine compartment panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
F
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 5
Index
6
I
Fuse/relay panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
Inner panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Multi fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Gauge (Normal vision)
Engine temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Gauge (Super vision)
Engine temperature gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Headlight levelling device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Headrest(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Height adjustment (seat belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Hill-start assist control (HAC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Icy road warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster . . . . . . . 1-6
Indicators and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Instrument cluster
LCD display information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Warning and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Instrument cluster (Normal vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator . . . . . 4-49
Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . 4-49
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Manual transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speed limiter indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
G
H
I
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 6
I
7
Index
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Instrument cluster (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Automatic transaxle shift position indicator . . . . . 4-62
Double clutch transmission shift indicator . . . . . . 4-62
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Manual transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speed limiter indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Inner panel fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Instrument panel illumination (Normal vision). . . . 4-47
Instrument panel illumination (Super vision) . . . . . 4-60
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Aux, USB and iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Barrier net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Cargo area cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Cargo security screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Cup holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ISG (Idle stop and go) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
K
J
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 7
Index
8
I
Label
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Air conditioner compressor label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Tyre sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tyre specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Lane Departure Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Lane Departure Warning System Mode. . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
LCD display information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
LCD display warnings and indicators
(instrument panel display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Calender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Icy road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Outside ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) . . . . . . . 5-59
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System). . . . . . . 4-117
Auto light/AFLS position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Daytime running light (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight (Headlamp) welcome function. . . . . . . 4-110
Headlight levelling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Position light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Rear fog light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Luggage rail system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Luggage side tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Lumbar support (Automatic Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar support (Manual seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . 7-32
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
M
L
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 8
I
9
Index
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Tyre maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Manual transaxle shift indicator (Normal vision). . 4-48
Manual transaxle shift indicator (Super vision) . . . 4-61
Map lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Inside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Mounting bracket for roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Odometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Odometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Outside ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Paddle shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Panorama sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Parking brake-Hand type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Passenger’s front air bag ON indicator . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF switch . . . . . . . . 3-50
Position light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
O
P
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 9
Index
10
I
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-93
Rear parking assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Rear window wiper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures . . . . . . 7-53
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Recommends Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Remote keyless entry
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Replacement light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rocking the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Roof antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Maintenance under severe usage conditions
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Normal maintenance schedule
(except Europe, for Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Normal maintenance schedule
(for Europe, except Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Seat warmer(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Headrest(rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Lumbar support (Automatic Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Lumbar support (Manual seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Seat warmer(front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
R
S
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 10
I
11
Index
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Service mode (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Service mode (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Shift lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Shopping bag holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Smart key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart parking assist system (SPAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Snow tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Spare tyre
Compact spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Compact spare tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Removing and storing the spare tyre . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
SPAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Rocking the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Speed limit control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Speed limiter indicator (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Speed limiter indicator (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Speedometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Speedometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Sports mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start . . . . . . . 6-4
Static bending light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Flex steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Centre console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Cool box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Luggage side tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
Sunroof, see panorama sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 11
Index
12
I
Tachometer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tachometer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Theft-alarm system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Transaxle
Automatic transaxle/DCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Double clutch transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Trip computer (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Trip computer (Super vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Lane Departure Warning System Mode . . . . . . . . 4-67
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Tyre chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 6-23
Tyre rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Tyre specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53, 8-5
Checking tyre inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Compact spare tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Recommended cold tyre inflation pressures . . . . . 7-53
Tyre care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Tyre maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tyre replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Tyre rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Tyre sidewall labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Tyre traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
Wheel alignment and tyre balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
User Settings (Normal vision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
User Settings (Super vision). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Vanity mirror lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Vehicle break-in process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle stability management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
U
V
T
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 12
I
13
Index
Warning and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Weight/volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Wheel alignment and tyre balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Manual windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Windscreen defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Auto defogging system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Snow tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Tyre chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Front indshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Front windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
W
JD RHD Index.QXP 7/21/2012 1:10 PM Page 13
